Another Exciting Scold About AI From A University Professor!

According to the New York Times, “Debbie Millman is a designer and brand strategist, the host of the podcast “Design Matters” and the chair of the master’s program in branding at The School of Visual Arts.”

She’s also married to the magnetic author Roxanne Gay.

These two stars burn so bright, I have to look away.

How is Roxanne Gay married, blissfully married, and I am not? Asking for a friend.

Debbie Millman writes in The New York Times:

There is a stern warning to anyone who wants to study Kabbalah, a mystical tradition within Judaism that seeks to uncover the hidden nature of God and the universe: Just wait. In traditional practices, prospective students are urged to delay their studies until they reach the age of 40, at which point it is assumed they will have developed the inner ballast to withstand what they might encounter.

We should consider doing something similar for artificial intelligence.

I understand how extreme this may sound, especially now that artificial intelligence has already entered seemingly every area of our lives. But the extremity is the point.

We have been so quick to treat access to new technology as an inevitability that we have failed to question whether every powerful tool should be placed in the hands of every developing mind the moment it becomes available.

Does Debbie Millman know anything about Judaism or Kabbalah? If she knew something, she’d know that Judaism contains thousands of stern warnings, and this one is not dispositive. It’s just the opinion of a few rabbis widely cited by those who like to boss the youth.

I don’t think Millman is out to lunch on this topic. She’s just addicted to scolding those below her in status.

She has a point. If the degree certifies that the holder can construct and defend an argument, and a model constructed it, the credential misinforms employers. Her line about writing to find out what you think is good. The failure is that she runs three arguments together. One is fraud, which justifies discipline. One is pedagogy, which justifies redesigning the assignment. One is an age hierarchy, which justifies nothing.

If she had run her piece by AI before publishing it, if she had pushed AI to critique her arguments, she would have saved herself great embarrassment.

I know that in her world, this shlock is a hit. To everybody else, these clichés are tiresome.

Would Debbie Millman describe her students as squirming, incapable of tolerating discomfort, unwilling to stay inside difficulty, if they were named and could answer back? Anonymity lets her characterize their interior lives on the op-ed page while they sit in her seminar incentivized to absorb her abuse and not fight back.

Where does Millman get the idea that she has a strong formed mind? On the basis of this post, she’s unimpressive.

Millman (b. 1961) is sixty-four. She co-founded the Masters in Branding at the School of Visual Arts in 2009 and chairs it. Her students are graduate students, many of them working adults in their late twenties and thirties. The illustration over the essay shows a baby in a crib reaching for blocks. The argument is pitched at children. The enforcement landed on adults paying graduate tuition to a private art school in Manhattan. She never reconciles those two facts, and the essay depends on not reconciling them.

Now the contract. The rule permits AI for research and the visualization of ideas and forbids it as a replacement for original thinking and writing. No one can draw that line. A student asks a model for five objections to his position and then writes his own answers to them. Has he researched or outsourced the thinking? He drafts a paragraph, asks for three tighter versions, picks one and rewrites half of it. Which half is his? A vague standard puts all the risk on the student and all the discretion with the chair. She then decides after the fact that “augment” was a euphemism that made the intervention sound clerical. The students supplied a word for what they did. She has the power to rename the act after the act, and she uses it, then reads their word choice as evidence of a character defect.

The thesis is the credentialing document. The tool is free, sitting in the browser, used by the agencies these students want to join. Detection is unreliable. Peers are using it. A rule with those properties does not produce compliance. It sorts students by willingness to conceal and taxes the honest ones. Her own account confirms the norm never landed: they admitted it at the first question. Students who believe they have committed fraud do not fold that fast.

Then there is the guild argument, which is the one she cannot see from where she stands. Every craft that meets a labor-saving tool produces the claim that the tool blocks the acquisition of real skill and can be handled safely by those trained before it arrived. Draftsmen said it about CAD. Compositors said it about desktop publishing. The claim is not false on its face. The people making it hold skill capital the tool devalues, and they also control access to it for the young. Millman’s standing rests on a formed voice acquired the slow way over thirty years at Sterling. Her rule preserves the price of that formation. This makes her an interested party who never discloses the interest.

The Kabbalah frame is ludicrous and that she chose to lead with it shows her ignorance. The age-forty custom is late and contested. The usual anchor is Isserles at Yoreh Deah 246:4, and what he requires is that a man first fill his belly with meat and wine, meaning Talmud and the codes. Age forty attaches later and unevenly. The Ari died at thirty-eight. Ramchal wrote Mesillat Yesharim in his twenties. Moshe Idel and others have described the restriction as a guild rule as much as a spiritual safeguard, which cuts both ways for her. The restriction also bound the teacher. It governed transmission, who may hand down what to whom, inside a community that shared the premise. Millman’s version exempts the person who wrote it and binds the people who pay her, and offers no path to qualification except waiting fifteen years.

Her other two analogies invert. We license sixteen-year-olds by putting them behind the wheel with a licensed adult in the passenger seat and graduated privileges after. Surgeons cut in their twenties under supervision. Both are apprenticeship models with staged access and a ladder. She offers prohibition and no ladder.

She concedes the rule cannot function as policy and then defends it as expression, saying a rule can be valuable because it tells us what a culture reveres. Expressive rules imposed downward on students who pay you are not expressive. She enforced it on particular people who have to endure her to get where they want to go.

We’ve all dealt with old people with power who demand to be flattered. Why does Millman want to announce to the world that she is one of them?

Scolding is the cheapest thing a professor can do. A pledge costs an afternoon. Redesigning a thesis sequence costs a year and a faculty fight. The pledge also casts the professor as the last defender of something sacred, which is a good part to play in front of colleagues, and it converts an institutional problem into a moral defect in the young. That trade has been available to teachers for a long time and they keep taking it.

The better postures are known, and Millman is better placed to run them than most.

Start with the defense. If a tool defeats the assignment, the assignment was measuring the wrong thing. Brand strategy is a presentation field. These students will spend their careers standing in a conference room defending a positioning to a client who did not want to hear it. A model can produce the thesis document. It cannot sit in the chair for forty minutes and answer why the second objection got dropped, what the third interview changed, which version she abandoned and when. Put the students in front of three faculty and two practitioners and ask hard questions for an hour. Nobody needs to sign anything. The problem solves itself and the exercise gets closer to the work.

Second, teach the tool as craft, because she can. Her claim is that a formed mind rejects false polish and hears when a sentence has not been earned. That is a teachable skill and she has it. Sit with a student, run three versions of a paragraph, mark why all three are dead. An hour of that teaches more than a signed agreement and it hands the student the discrimination she says only age confers. She has taken her strongest teaching asset and converted it into a reason for exclusion.

Third, make the record the deliverable. Ask for the dated notes, the abandoned direction, the interview transcripts, the paragraph that failed. Wolfe kept his notes. Reporters keep theirs. If the thinking is supposed to become visible, then grade the visible thinking and stop treating the finished document as the only evidence. This has the side benefit of teaching a habit the students will use for thirty years.

Fourth, disclosure beats prohibition. Ask every student to write a page describing what he used, where, and what he changed afterward. Compliance costs nothing, so most will comply, and the professor can grade the judgment on display. A prohibition regime generates lying and gives the faculty no information at all. Millman ended her year knowing less about how her students work than she knew at the start, which is a strange outcome for someone whose subject is how people make decisions.

Fifth, go first. If she published a piece showing where a model improved her own draft and where it wrecked a sentence she loved, the age asymmetry would dissolve on contact. She is asking for a restraint she has not demonstrated in public. Students read that quickly and it costs her more authority than the infraction cost them.

Sixth, compete on the ground the machine cannot reach. Send them out. Twelve interviews. Three hours standing in the store watching who picks up the package and puts it back. A model cannot go to the mall in Paramus. Brand strategy had already drifted toward decks assembled from other decks long before 2023. The tool exposed a rot that was there, and the response might be more contact with the world rather than a pledge about prose.

None of this requires believing AI is harmless. Grant her the strongest version. Something does get built by sitting with confusion, and some students will skip it and graduate weaker. The reply is that nobody has ever been shamed into loving a blank page. If the interior life is at stake, the work is to make the interior life attractive, which means small assignments, fast response, praise that lands, and a teacher who reads closely enough that the student wants to be worth reading. That is expensive and unglamorous and does not produce an op-ed.

The tell in her essay is her delight in others pain. She reports that the students squirmed. She read enjoyment into her own account of the moment. Good teachers like their students. Socrates worried in the Phaedrus that writing would ruin memory, and he was partly right, and the answer was never to make the young sign something.

A professor who believes the tool destroys judgment, and who has judgment, has one obligation, and it is to teach the judgment. Waiting until forty is not a curriculum.

What kind of bubble does she live in that nobody has told her the time of day?

There’s something about teaching that leads to some people to develop a bossy scolding personality, constantly instructing others. These people don’t bring joy.

She built her whole argument on a Jewish tradition she describes with confidence, and the description is shaky. Between her draft, her editor, the copy desk, the fact checkers, and whatever friends read it first, nobody asked where the age of forty comes from or whether the tradition says what she says it says. The Times has rabbis on speed dial. The claim sailed through because in that room a reference to Kabbalah reads as depth rather than as a factual assertion someone might verify. She reached for it the way one reaches for a color. That tells you more about her circle than any of her opinions do.

Second, the material stake she never discloses. Generative models are cutting through commercial design and illustration right now. Packaging comps, logo exploration, storyboards, stock photography, the middle tier of the work that fed shops like Sterling Brands for thirty years. Her students are paying for a credential in a field being repriced while they sit in the seminar. In that world, hostility to the tool is the ingroup position, and announcing that you caught your students using it earns applause from everyone whose income the tool threatens. She is not writing into resistance. She is writing into a standing ovation from people with the same exposure.

Third, the deformation of the craft. She has spent twenty years delivering monologues to an audience that arrived admiring her, and seven hundred interviews asking questions of guests who came to be understood. That is a fine life and it builds a real skill, which is the sincere spoken paragraph. It builds none of the other one, which is argument written for a reader who will look for the hole. Nothing in her week trains her to anticipate the objection that a graduate student in her thirties is not a baby in a crib. Her prose in this piece has the cadence of the podcast open: three clauses, a turn, a resonant close. It sounds finished. It has not been tested.

Fourth, the scolding. It has a payoff and she is collecting it. Complaint about the young is the one form of aggression in professional life that costs nothing. The targets cannot answer, the peers agree, and the complainer comes off as the person who still cares about standards. Compare the alternatives. Rebuilding a thesis sequence means a faculty fight, an admissions conversation, and an admission that the program measured the wrong thing for two years. Writing the op-ed takes a morning and produces a lifetime achievement award’s worth of nodding.

Fifth, the genre pulled her. The opinion desk buys a specific shape: personal anecdote from inside an institution, a diagnosis of the culture, an exotic frame borrowed from somewhere old, and a closing line that sounds like wisdom. She gave them the shape. The desk did not ask her to check the shape against the world, because the shape is what they bought. Some of what looks like her judgment is the form doing its work on her.

Now the fair part. She has run a program for seventeen years, she reads closely enough to notice that a word like augment is doing concealment work, and her worry about young people skipping the difficult stage is not silly. A smart version of her essay exists. The bubble did not make her wrong. It let her publish the first draft of a position instead of the fourth.

What would puncture it is small and unavailable to her. One student, on the record, under her name, replying in the same paper. Not a comment thread. A reply with a byline, describing what the tuition costs, what the job market looks like in July of 2026, what the rule said and how it could not be followed, and what it was like to read her own teacher characterize her interior life to two million strangers. Millman would have to sit with that the way she wants her students to sit with confusion. She has built a life where that reply never arrives.

That is the shortest description of the bubble. Every part of her week is structured so that the person who might answer her cannot.

The classroom is the only room most adults ever get where the audience cannot leave, cannot answer on equal terms, and is graded by the speaker. Run that five days a week for twenty years. A manner forms. In every other adult relationship, correcting a man’s reasoning or his usage is a small aggression you have to pay for. In teaching it is the job description, and the license does not switch off in the parking lot.

Add the answer key. Most conversations in life, nobody knows who is right. The teacher knows on schedule, has known since August, and gets to reveal it. That is a strange daily experience and few people are built to absorb it without effect.

Then the turnover. Students cycle out every year or two. The teacher never faces the person who heard the first version of the lecture and found the hole in it. Same material, fresh room, no correction arriving from anywhere. It preserves bad arguments and it preserves manner. A man who has said the same thing to a new audience for two decades has no way to know whether it holds.

The status. Humanities faculty carry high cultural capital and modest income, which Bourdieu called the dominated fraction of the dominant class. They hold the credential and the person they lecture out-earns them. Resentment paired with a podium produces a specific tone, and you hear it whenever a professor addresses the public rather than his students.

Selection runs the same direction. People who become teachers are people who liked school. School rewards verbal fluency, rule compliance rewarded from above, and comfort inside a grading hierarchy. The profession draws from the population that found that arrangement congenial and did well in it.

And the flattery. Nobody tells a plumber his work shapes minds. Teachers hear that they serve, sacrifice, and form the future, from administrators, from parents, from each other, at every commencement. A steady diet of hearing your work described as noble makes it easy to slide into believing your opinions are noble too.

The scolding trait tracks exposure rather than teaching. A piano teacher’s student either plays the piece or does not, in front of an audience, and the teacher’s reputation rides on it. A clinical instructor is judged by whether the resident kills anyone. A trade instructor’s graduates either pass the licensing exam or fail it. Those teachers are hard to find in the bossy category, because a verdict arrives from outside the room and lands on them. The manner concentrates where the field grades its own work and the teacher is the only judge.

Any role that pairs a captive audience with an evaluation license produces the same deformation. The columnist. The podcaster. The man with a livestream and no crosstalk who answers the objections he selects. The rabbi at the shiur. The therapist. The manager.

What comes out as scolding often starts as fear. Adjuncts on nine thousand a course, enrollments falling, a room of phones, a discipline nobody outside believes in. Scolding is what fear sounds like from behind a podium. Millman has less excuse than most, given the podcast and the awards, but the general case is more anxious than arrogant.

Here is the test I would use, and it takes ten seconds. Watch what a teacher does the moment a student is right and he is wrong in front of the room. Everything you want to know shows up there, and it does not correlate with subject, rank, or politics. Some of them light up. Those are the ones who came for the material. The rest came for the room.

Posted in AI | Comments Off on Another Exciting Scold About AI From A University Professor!

Sociologist Philip N. Cohen

AI helped me with this post, which has gone through several versions.

Ithaca, New York, sometime around 1986. An eighteen-year-old sits at a news desk in front of an IBM Selectric. To his right, a stack of tape cartridges, each one labeled on the front so the label can be read while the cart sits in the machine. To his left, single sheets of paper laid out on the table, each sheet paired with a cart. Each pair is a story.

Interviews get recorded on cassette in the field, on reel-to-reel in the office. Back at the station the useful seconds get copied onto the carts. If a clip needs trimming, you cut the tape with a razor blade and splice it. As he types each story he takes a cart off the stack on his right and sets it beside the page on his left. When it is time for the newscast he carries the pairs down the hall to the booth, hands the carts in order to the engineer, who is also the disc jockey, and keeps the pages to read. When he reaches the part with the quote in it, he points, and the engineer fires the cart. The cart rewinds to the start of the clip and waits, in case it is needed again.

He is a reporter at WHCU-AM/FM, the CBS affiliate, about thirty hours a week at something like five dollars an hour. He graduated from the local alternative high school in 1985 and did not feel ready for college. He had trained in news at WVBR, the Cornell student station, through a school district internship. He got the interview at WHCU because his parents were friends with the news director. He covers city council, school board, planning board, crime, and research news out of Cornell University.

The craft has rules. Each story needs two versions, each carrying a different quote, to run on alternating half-hour newscasts, plus one-sentence headline versions for the quarter hours. Same length every time, whether the story is a fire or a zoning variance. The quotes have to be gathered in person, which means walking up to the mayor after the meeting and managing an interaction with an adult who outranks you while listening closely enough to know whether you have two clean stretches of fifteen seconds. And the newscast is live. At the end of the local evening news he wraps the market report and the weather while the second hand sweeps toward twelve, because at six o'clock the CBS World News Roundup begins and his time is over.

In May 2026, when the CBS Radio Network shut down after ninety-nine years, Philip N. Cohen (b. August 12, 1967) posted the photograph of himself at that desk and explained the workflow to readers who have never seen a Fidelipac. He noted what Ithaca had then: fewer than thirty thousand year-round residents and three radio stations with full-time news reporters, plus reporters from the Ithaca Journal, the Ithaca Times, the Grapevine, and the student papers. Four or five reporters at a school board meeting. When something big happened, more came down from Syracuse and Binghamton.

He added a footnote his students have not read. He still runs an undergraduate class to fill the time allotted, and says thank you as the last second elapses.

Forty years later he is a professor of sociology at the University of Maryland, the author of the leading undergraduate textbook on American families, the founder of the largest nonprofit preprint archive in the social sciences, a former plaintiff against a sitting president, and the man most likely to tell you, with the arithmetic attached, that a celebrated study cannot be right. The habits from the news desk are visible in all of it: fixed deadlines, no retakes, an insistence on getting the quote in person, and a working assumption that a story exists to be handed to strangers.

He came from a house where science was the family trade and where the terms of women's employment in it were a live subject at the dinner table. His father, Marshall Cohen, took a doctorate in mathematics at Michigan in 1965, did a postdoc at Princeton, where Philip was born, and then went to Cornell as a geometric topologist and combinatorial group theorist. His mother, Avis H. Cohen (1941–2026), took a bachelor's degree at Michigan in 1964, moved with two small boys to Ithaca, and started graduate school at Cornell in the early 1970s. Writing about that decision decades later, she gave two reasons. One was that she had already worked out a view of dynamical systems, before enrolling, and had found a new Cornell professor in neurobiology who shared it. The other was shorter: “Being a full time mom was wearing very thin.”

Her dissertation concerned locomotion in rats. She switched nerves across muscles and filmed the animals running with x-ray cinematography. Her adviser, the biolinguist Eric Lenneberg (1921–1975), died before she finished. She took the degree in 1977 and went to the Karolinska Institute in Stockholm for two years, the family with her, and there she did the work she is known for. Cut a short segment out of a lamprey's spinal cord, isolate it in a dish, and the nerves keep firing in the pattern of swimming. No brain required. The capacity to generate the rhythm is distributed along the cord. Back at Cornell she worked with mathematicians on a model of these central pattern generators that neuroscientists still cite, and the finding turned out to matter most to engineers: robots walk better when the pattern lives in the limbs and gets corrected by feedback than when the brain has to compose each step. Her most cited paper is about a quadruped robot.

Cornell kept her for ten years as a research associate. She won her own federal grants and ran a lab. No tenure-track offer came. Maryland hired her in 1990 as a full professor, and she went on to found its interdisciplinary neuroscience program, direct a National Science Foundation project for women in science, and be elected a fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. Her son's judgment on the Cornell decade, published on his blog after her death, is split: passing on her in 1979 may have been reasonable, and passing on her by 1990, with the grants and the publications in hand, was not. He notes that Suzanne Bianchi, the Census Bureau demographer who became his mentor at Maryland and died in 2013, followed the same route. Faculty women who were never assistant professors.

Avis Cohen liked to say that her understanding of nervous systems bore on how people should think about their societies, and that the nervous system was less hierarchical than male scientists had assumed. She also told a story from her Illinois girlhood in the 1950s: that if she got all A's, no one would want to marry her. Someone did.

Her son has never, as far as I can find, drawn the obvious line in print between a mother who showed that coordination can be distributed rather than commanded and a career spent dismantling central authorities in his own discipline.

Before sociology there was more journalism and more politics. He reviewed local bands for the Ithaca Times, finding something to write about every weekend on a weekly deadline. He worked in the Ithaca left, the environmental and labor and alternative-media world that a college town of that size sustained in the 1980s. He did editorial work at the Michigan Daily as an undergraduate. He took his bachelor's degree in American culture at Michigan in 1992, with high distinction, a master's in sociology at Massachusetts in 1995, and a doctorate at Maryland in 1999 under Reeve Vanneman, with a dissertation on Black population size and the structure of American labor market inequality.

Two apprenticeships in the government's statistical apparatus completed the training. He was a research assistant at the National Center for Health Statistics in 1997 and a statistician and demographer at the United States Census Bureau from 1998 to 1999. Anyone who has built a household roster for a federal survey learns the same lesson, and it turns up in his work for the next thirty years: the categories are constructed by people for purposes, they change, and when they change the numbers move even if the world stands still.

He went to the University of California, Irvine, in 1999, and made his reputation there with Matt L. Huffman on the economics of gender at work. The two of them pushed past the familiar observation that women crowd into low-paying jobs. They examined whether an occupation pays less because it has come to be identified with women, and found evidence that it does. They joined individual earnings data to organizations, occupations, and metropolitan labor markets, which became his lasting methodological commitment: a worker's education and experience are worth what the surrounding structure will pay for them. Their 2007 article in American Sociological Review on female managers and the gender wage gap won the section award for sex and gender; later work with Jessica Pearlman on workplace desegregation won an award from the organizations and work section. He extended the same logic into the home, studying housework, care work, paid domestic labor, and the way state policy and wage structures set the terms of bargaining between spouses.

At the University of North Carolina from 2005, and at Maryland from 2012, the subject shifted from labor markets to families, with inequality still the question. Families distribute money, time, care, housing, standing, and risk. They shelter people from markets and reproduce advantage between generations. An early paper with Lynne Casper reconstructed historical levels of unmarried cohabitation from census data, and the exercise shows the pattern of his mind: before you explain a trend, establish that the instrument did not change.

Three words organize his textbook, The Family: Diversity, Inequality, and Social Change, now in its fourth edition and the standard assignment in the course. The mid-century arrangement of early marriage, a breadwinning husband, a homemaking wife, and several children was a historical episode resting on a particular labor market, legal order, and economic expansion. Its erosion widened women's options and produced cohabitation, later marriage, same-sex marriage, one-person homes, childless adults, and stepfamilies. People with money, education, health, and support build flexible family lives; people without them experience the same freedom as instability.

His essay collection Enduring Bonds appeared in 2018 from the University of California Press. His wife, the historian Judy Ruttenberg, supplied the title, having found the phrase in Justice Anthony Kennedy’s opinion in Obergefell v. Hodges. The subtitle promises everything that makes families great and terrible, and the book delivers. The same bonds that produce intimacy and obligation produce dependency, unequal labor, and stigma. His position is that sociology's job is to explain how the benefits and burdens get distributed.

The paper that made him famous among people who follow family statistics is “The Coming Divorce Decline.” He posted it to his own archive in September 2018, where three thousand people downloaded it, and Socius published it a year later. The proportion of married women divorcing each year fell about eighteen percent in the decade after 2008; adjusting for age, education, race and ethnicity, nativity, marriage order, and years married, it still fell about eight percent. The decline came from younger women. Newer marriages carry lower risk because the people entering them are older, better educated, more often marrying for the first time, and less often bringing children into the marriage. He concluded that marriage is becoming rarer and more durable at once, and stable marriage is concentrating among people who already have the resources that make it stable. He then did the thing that distinguishes him: every year, when the new American Community Survey data came out, he checked his own prediction in public. And in his own comment section he let a reader make the case against his framing, that divorce has become a poorer measure of instability as cohabitation, serial cohabitation, and third marriages have risen, and that a falling divorce rate can be used to paint a rosy picture.

This is the ground on which he has fought his longest fight, against what its advocates call the success sequence: finish school, get a job, marry, then have children, and you will very probably avoid poverty. Cohen does not dispute the correlations. His objection is that the sequence converts a description of who is not poor into an instruction for people who are, and that a public campaign urging the sequence supplies none of the things that make the sequence available, which are affordable schooling, steady employment, health care, housing, and a suitable partner. He points to the federal marriage promotion programs and their evaluations, where couples received their allotted hours of services and the measured effects on marital stability came out small or absent. His research with Joanna Pepin developed the argument into a question of supply: the availability of unmarried men differs sharply between Black and White metropolitan populations, so the advocates who compare married people with unmarried people and attribute the difference to marriage are assuming that the men are there to be married.

His antagonist in this argument has been W. Bradford Wilcox (b. 1970) of the University of Virginia and the Institute for Family Studies, and the argument has not stayed methodological. Cohen accuses Wilcox of overstating the causal benefits of marriage, minimizing selection, and presenting a preferred family form as an empirical result, and his blog post titles now say that Wilcox lies. A reader who wants to evaluate the selection argument has to walk past the accusation to get to it.

Two research controversies established his standing as a man who audits his own side. The first was Mark Regnerus's 2012 study of adults whose parents had same-sex relationships, which conservative litigators used against same-sex marriage. Cohen was among roughly two hundred researchers who signed a letter arguing that the comparison groups did not support the conclusions, and he spent years on the study's funding, its review process, and its afterlife in court filings. Politically, that intervention cost him nothing.

The second cost him something. Alice Goffman's On the Run, an ethnography of policing and warrants in a poor Black Philadelphia neighborhood, had been celebrated in the discipline and beyond it. Cohen went at the one component of the work that could be checked by anybody: a household survey Goffman reported conducting with a man she calls Chuck. Her article in American Sociological Review described 217 homes in the neighborhood, 308 men aged eighteen to thirty found in residence, and 144 of them with warrants outstanding. Cohen did the arithmetic against census figures for comparable Philadelphia neighborhoods and found more than twice as many young men as those homes should hold. He noted that the residence rule, three days a week, could count the same man in two places, and that the reporting fell short of ordinary standards. Goffman's answer was that this was an ethnographic survey with different sampling and different definitions of who belongs to a home, designed to capture people whom conventional surveys never see.

American Sociological Review declined to publish his comment. The editors agreed he had identified errors and chose not to correct the record. He put the comment on his university web page and eventually published a version as a review in Social Forces in 2017. What began as a dispute about one survey became his standing complaint about the discipline: that a request to inspect the evidence behind admired work gets treated as a breach of manners.

Ten years later he is still counting. In December 2025, having been invited to talk with a National Academies panel on corrections and retractions, he sat down and went through Volume 90 of American Sociological Review article by article, clicking the links, and posted the results. Of eighteen quantitative papers, twelve provided code and data or information about obtaining the data, and six provided nothing. He counted the qualitative and mixed papers too. He gave his earlier tallies for comparison: four of fifteen in 2020, eight of twenty-five in 2023. He described his own methods as squishy and invited corrections, to be mailed to his office written on the back of a fifty-dollar bill. He noted that one article has been retracted from an American Sociological Association journal this century, in a case of documented fraud by a Dutch psychologist, and that the association's 2018 guide for editors does not contain the word retraction. He also advised the journal's staff to click their own links before publishing, since several papers carried blinded review links, and one pointed to a repository that required asking the author's permission.

In the comments, one of the authors he had marked as providing nothing agreed with him, promised a replication package when teaching quieted down, and thanked him.

The association was the institution he tried hardest to fix from inside. He chaired its family section, served as secretary-treasurer of its population section, sat three years as an elected member of its Committee on Publications, and co-edited Contexts, its public-facing magazine, with Syed Ali. In 2019 the association’s leadership signed a letter to the White House opposing open distribution of federally funded research. He organized a petition against it, gathered more than two hundred signatures, got the Publications Committee to pass a resolution urging the governing Council to take up the question, and watched the Council ignore it. Committee members spent years trying to get the journals to adopt a policy that would merely tell readers whether a published article came with its data and code. Two subcommittees produced a mild version. The Council rejected it. At one point, he says, staff invented a rule that would have barred him from taking part in the discussion of his own proposal.

He resigned his membership in November 2021 and published his reasons. Membership and the annual meeting cost too much, and the association's own survey said so. The staff outlast the elected leadership and can stall anything. Publications are the largest source of revenue, which means library subscriptions, which means a transfer from teaching-heavy institutions to research-heavy ones, since publication in the association's journals is dominated by elite universities. Subscription prices had more than doubled in eight years. The association signed a new seven-year contract with Sage in 2018 without notifying members in advance. And, in the sentence that gives the whole document its flavor: “Sage throws the leadership a nice party at the conference.”

He also listed what the association does well. It publishes good research. It creates community. It has raised the standing of women and scholars of color through member elections. His conclusion was that these were no longer enough for him, and that the organization would have to hit bottom first.

The best objection came from his own comment section, from a junior scholar who agreed with the analysis and asked where new people would build professional networks if established people left. Cohen, a tenured full professor at a research university with a large blog audience, is the man in this dispute least exposed to the cost of exit. A commenter who said they had grown up with him added that they had always been the sibling who made trouble and started arguments about what was right, and that it was nice to see he had picked up the habit.

The other exit was involuntary. On June 6, 2017, the president of the United States posted about a plan to hand air traffic control to a private nonprofit. Cohen, who had learned that the fastest replies to a presidential tweet get the most attention, and who was verified, replied with a picture of Donald Trump (b. 1946) and a caption: “Corrupt Incompetent Authoritarian. And then there are the policies. Resist.” He had no view on air traffic control. Fifteen minutes later he found he was blocked.

He became one of seven individual plaintiffs in Knight First Amendment Institute v. Trump, filed in the Southern District of New York in July 2017, arguing that the interactive space beneath the president's tweets was a public forum from which citizens could not be excluded for their views. The district court agreed in May 2018 and granted declaratory relief. The Second Circuit affirmed in July 2019. The Supreme Court vacated the judgment as moot in 2021, after Trump had left office and the account was gone.

The best image of him comes from a reporter at the courthouse. Leaving a hearing, Cohen hands the clerk his numbered chip, gets his phone back, and says: “Who knows what he did while we were in here?” Outside on Pearl Street he bounds down the steps to the photographers and holds the phone up to the cameras so they can shoot the blocked notice on the screen. He told a British education reporter that some of his friends thought the whole enterprise was a waste of time, playing into the president's hands and feeding the outrage industry without improving anything. “And honestly, they may be right,” he said.

Cohen told reporters: “I often don’t read his tweets before replying. The point is not to have a dialogue with him, but to engage with the millions of people who read his tweets. … When I have a popular reply it can be viewed by 100,000 people or more, which, while small in the grand scheme, is very satisfying as an individual act of resistance.”

His other public campaign was quieter. In May 2021 he circulated an open letter to the Pew Research Center, signed by roughly a hundred and fifty demographers and social scientists, urging it to stop using labels like Silent Generation, Baby Boom, X, Millennial, and Z. The argument: the boundaries are arbitrary, they invite stereotyping, and they blur the difference between the effects of age, the effects of a period, and the effects of a birth cohort. Pew’s director of social trends, Kim Parker, replied in July that “Generations are one of many analytical lenses researchers use,” acknowledged the risk of age stereotyping, and offered to discuss it. In May 2023 Pew published a new policy: generational analysis only where historical data allow comparison of people at the same age in different periods, the standard labels used sparingly, readers advised to treat them as reference points.

Cohen's own illustration of the distinction is the essay he wrote on turning fifty. Being fifty was of no analytic interest. Having been fourteen in 1981 placed him at a particular intersection of technology, music, politics, and money.

He founded SocArXiv in 2016, after Elsevier bought the Social Science Research Network and the discipline discovered how a commercial owner can change the terms of a repository it has acquired. The archive is free, nonprofit, run through the Open Science Framework, and supported by the University of Maryland Libraries. Its rationale is a sociological claim about sociology: journals do not only transmit findings, they allocate prestige, impose delay, restrict access, and convert unpaid academic labor into corporate revenue. A preprint archive cannot flatten the hierarchy. It can let work circulate before the hierarchy has processed it, and let a researcher in a country whose libraries cannot buy the packages read the same paper as a researcher at Harvard.

By the time the Kohli Foundation gave it the 2025 Infrastructure Prize for Sociology, ten thousand euros and an invitation to Fiesole, the archive held around seventeen thousand papers. It accepted 3,162 new ones in 2025, twenty percent more than the year before, and in early 2026 was running at a pace of about forty-three hundred a year.

Then the volume turned into a different problem than the one he built the thing to solve. Much of the growth was machine-generated. In November 2025 the archive stopped accepting papers about artificial intelligence to relieve its moderators. In February 2026 he wrote up the case that had unsettled him. Someone submitted a paper the archive would have accepted a few years earlier: dull, unoriginal, thin on literature, competent in its statistics, coherent, relevant, with real citations. Attached was a disclosure listing the tools used to generate the code, run the literature search, advise on the models, and draft the text. The author claimed to have formulated the question, chosen the variables, directed the analysis, interpreted the results, and verified every data point and quotation, and offered an audit on request. To reject it, the archive would have to reject it for the tools.

He worked through the arguments in public, against himself as much as anyone. He is not persuaded that using such tools is unethical, because all knowledge is learned from someone else and no norm requires citing everything you read. He thinks training may be fair use and that displacing the original producers' income would not be. He grants that an archive that assigns digital object identifiers without peer review is an attractive place for machines to deposit and to harvest. He also says he will not enter an arms race he expects to lose, and that a disclosure requirement he cannot verify is close to useless, since the chatbots read the rules too. And he says, more bluntly than most administrators would, that there is a great deal of bad work on his platform, that this does not damage the good work, and that where rejecting is more expensive than accepting, accepting may be the practical course.

The policy came out in March 2026, drafted by a subcommittee and revised by the full moderation team. One key passage in his announcement reads: “We feel the need to express our humanity in this process.” The archive will make human judgments, will not defer to automated detection, and promises fairness without any claim to algorithmic purity.

The man who spent a decade demanding that journals let readers check the code has ended up defending a queue of volunteers reading papers by hand and admitting that their standard cannot be written down completely.

His third book, Citizen Scholar: Public Engagement for Social Scientists, appeared from Columbia University Press in January 2025, and is the closest thing he has written to a statement of method. Its argument is that values shape the questions anyone asks. The obligations that follow are disclosure of where you stand, honesty about uncertainty, deference to evidence, and clarity about the edges of your expertise. A man may speak as a researcher, a teacher, an activist, an officer of an institution, a litigant, or a private citizen, and the trouble starts when academic authority is used to smuggle him from one role into another.

He practices the disclosure part relentlessly. In June 2026 he published a tribute to his mother nine days after her death, including his own assessment of the promotion she did not get, and quoted the line she had used near the end when asked how she was: “Thank god, I'm fine!”, which he notes tended to amuse the doctors treating whatever was wrong with her. In her last years she would tell him that he had grown. He would protest that he was fifty-eight. She insisted. Two weeks later he published an account of a year on a weight-loss drug, including the detail that his state government health plan covers GLP-1 medications only for diabetes, so the year cost him about six thousand dollars out of pocket, and the advice that people should not comment on anyone's body unless invited. A demographer who publishes on deaths from alcohol, overdose, and suicide, and on the mortality of the married and the unmarried, treating his own metabolism as a public data point with the insurance code attached.

The same instinct produces his least defensible work. In July 2026 he published a post whose title asserts that Lyman Stone, a demographer associated with conservative family research, is a bigot, and set out the evidence: a 2023 thread in which Stone said the share of the population that is baptized and churchgoing is his primary measure of a good society and that he would dislike a high-functioning Sikh country, and a January 2026 post in which Stone wrote that “The Somali community is a scourge on the republic” and called for reviewing naturalization forms and deporting those with deportable offenses. Stone's defense, quoted in the post, is that the objection concerns pastoralist clan social organization rather than race, and that plenty of other African immigrants do fine. Cohen answers that condemning a whole community for its supposed behavior is the oldest available cover for condemning it, and compares Stone to Charles Murray (b. 1943), who once told him that his own position was not shouting fire in a crowded theater but “saying quietly and unhysterically, 'there's smoke.'” Cohen ends by saying that he would not hire Stone or publish his work and that his readers should not either.

Everything in that post is sourced, quoted, and linked, which is more than most such accusations offer. It is also a piece of writing whose conclusion is a hiring recommendation, from a man whose authority rests on his willingness to check arithmetic. Readers who think that judgments about evidence and judgments about character should travel separately will find the post an argument against its author's method. Readers who think a scholar owes the public a verdict when the evidence supports one will find it the method's fulfillment. He knows the reaction; he mentions, in a footnote, that Stone regularly calls him a liar.

He has kept a running account of how he is seen. Updating the media page on his website, he found himself mentioned in a piece about a journal editor, and in the anonymous comments beneath it, one reader asking “Why give Philip N. Cohen a voice in this discussion?” and another answering, with a laughing emoji, that he was the best sociologist of his generation. He posted both, said ouch, and added the observation that time spent on public outreach is time not spent on research, so if he had fewer media mentions he might have more research. The alumni blog of his old high school, meanwhile, has filed his career under a crusade for equality.

The checkable work has moved things. Anyone can recount the divorce rates in the American Community Survey, and the finding that marriage is becoming rarer and steadier has entered the standard account. Anyone can compare the number of young men Goffman reported in 217 homes with the number census data would predict, and the episode changed what sociologists expect to be able to inspect in celebrated ethnography. Anyone can count how many articles in a volume of the flagship journal come with their code, which is why the fraction has climbed from roughly a quarter to two-thirds in five years. Anyone can read the arbitrary birth years behind a generational label, which is why the largest survey organization in the country changed its policy. And anyone can download a paper from his archive without a subscription.

The unverifiable work has moved less. Whether a researcher at a think tank is lying or merely wrong, whether a man's views disqualify him from employment, whether an association's staff act in bad faith or merely in their own interest: these are judgments that ask the reader to trust the writer's character, and they are exactly the sort of claim that his own program says should be inspectable. He makes them anyway, in the prosecutorial register he learned reading copy against a clock, and they are the reason some colleagues who accept every one of his statistical arguments will not cite him.

His career amounts to an argument that sociology should be answerable to its data, its subjects, its students, the public that pays for it, and the readers who never get past the paywall. He has made that argument in journals, in a textbook, in a thousand blog posts, in federal court, in a letter to a survey organization, and finally in infrastructure, which is the form that outlasts an argument. What remains uncertain is whether the tool he built can survive a flood of writing that no one wrote, and whether the discipline that keeps improving its transparency numbers under his counting will keep counting once he stops.

He is fifty-eight, turning fifty-nine in August. He still posts most weeks. He still ends class as the second hand reaches twelve, and says thank you.

Notes

Opening scene (1986 newsroom). All detail is from his own account — the Selectric, the carts and paired pages, razor-blade editing, pointing at the engineer, two versions per story plus quarter-hour headline versions, ~30 hours/week at ~$5/hour, the job obtained through his parents’ friendship with the WHCU news director, WVBR training via a school-district internship, high school graduation 1985, the 6:00 p.m. CBS World News Roundup, the Ithaca media census, and the footnote about ending classes on the second. Earlier account of the Ithaca Times music reviewing (a review due every weekend, around 1988) and his Mastodon note to the same effect.

Parents. Marshall Cohen’s Cornell page (PhD Michigan 1965; geometric topology, combinatorial group theory). Avis Cohen’s obituary post, the source for her birth (November 29, 1941, Chicago) and death (June 6, 2026), the 1964 Michigan BS, the Cornell PhD in 1977, Lenneberg, Karolinska 1977–79, the lamprey work, the ten years as research associate without a tenure-track offer, the Maryland professorship, NACS, the AAAS fellowship (2008), Distinguished Scholar-Teacher (2011–12), the robotics afterlife of central pattern generators, the Bianchi comparison, the “all A’s” story, “Thank god, I’m fine!” and “You’ve grown!” — verbatim quotes used: “Being a full time mom was wearing very thin.” (originally from her 2013 GGSTEM essay, quoted in his post) and “Thank god, I’m fine!” There is also a Transmitter obituary linked from his post. One softening on my part: his post says Lenneberg died by suicide. I wrote only that Lenneberg died before she finished.

Lehman Alternative Community School. Confirmed by Wikipedia and by his old school’s alumni blog, which titled its profile of him “How ACS Inspired Philip Cohen’s Crusade for Equality” (November 22, 2017) (search that title if the URL has moved).

Degrees, positions, awards. His CV and Wikipedia. Date discrepancy to resolve: Wikipedia gives UNC 2005–2011 and Maryland 2011–; his CV-derived material gives professor at UNC in 2011 and Maryland from 2012. I used 2012. Same for Contexts: Wikipedia says 2014–2017, his own site says 2015–2017.

Huffman collaboration. “Working for the Woman? Female Managers and the Gender Wage Gap,” ASR 2007, and Huffman, Cohen and Pearlman on workplace desegregation, 1975–2005

Divorce decline. Paper: Socius 2019. Preprint. Blog version with the 18% unadjusted and 8% adjusted figures and the reader objection about serial cohabitation and redivorce. The three thousand preprint downloads before journal publication.

Success sequence and Wilcox. The failure of the success sequence; on marriage markets and partner availability, Who are you gonna marry?; on the Supporting Healthy Marriage evaluation and the 27 hours of services, This Supporting Healthy Marriage, I do not think it means; the 2025 post whose title accuses Wilcox of lying.

Goffman. His comment as filed; the original blog post with the arithmetic; the ASR rejection; the Social Forces review (95:4, June 2017, p. e5) and the full text. Goffman’s “ethnographic survey” reply is as paraphrased by Jesse Singal and quoted in Cohen’s post. The 217/308/144 figures are from her 2009 ASR article. Paul Campos’s Chronicle piece is the other place the arithmetic is laid out. Note: I deliberately did not say the ethnography was fabricated, and neither did he.

Regnerus. I wrote “among roughly two hundred researchers who signed” rather than crediting him with organizing the letter, because the 2012 letter to Social Science Research was organized by Gary Gates and others. His account of the review process.

ASR transparency audits. The December 2025 audit, with the 2025, 2023 and 2020 counts, the National Academies panel invitation, the single retraction from an ASA journal this century, the 2018 Publications Manual lacking the word retraction, the fifty-dollar-bill joke, the advice about blinded OSF links, and the author conceding in the comments. Earlier audits: Sociologist, scientist: toward transparency, accountability, and a sharing culture and Quick update on American Sociological Review’s failure to meet current social science standards. Sociological Science’s reproducibility policy, which he holds up as the comparison.

ASA. The two-stage exit: end of his elected term on the Committee on Publications and the resignation, source for the doubled subscription fees, the 2018 Sage contract, the library wealth-transfer argument, the invented rule barring him from discussing his own proposal, his list of what ASA does well, and the verbatim quote “Sage throws the leadership a nice party at the conference.” The petition against the 2019 ASA letter to the White House. The junior scholar’s objection and the sibling’s comment are both in the comment thread of the resignation post. I did not name the commenter who says they grew up with him, and did not assign a gender or relationship beyond their own words; the display name is “Ness Blackbird.” Also note: there is a widely circulated 2025 “Letter of Resignation from the American Sociological Association” over the Sociologists for Palestine resolution. It is by a different sociologist.

Trump. The tweet, the block fifteen minutes later, and the June 6, 2017 air traffic control post: complaint coverage at Forward and Lawfare. The courthouse scene, including the numbered chip, the steps on Pearl Street, and the verbatim quote “Who knows what he did while we were in here?” His explanation that he replies fast without reading, and the verbatim quote “And honestly, they may be right.” Case history: SDNY May 2018; Second Circuit, 928 F.3d 226 (2019); vacated as moot by the Supreme Court in 2021. Full plaintiff list: Buckwalter-Poza, Cohen, Figueroa O’Reilly, Gu, Neely, Papp, Pappas.

Pew. Open letter, May 26, 2021. Signatory count is reported variously as ~150 and ~170; I used “roughly a hundred and fifty.” Kim Parker’s July 12, 2021 response, source of the verbatim quote “Generations are one of many analytical lenses researchers use.” Pew’s new policy, May 22, 2023. His Washington Post op-ed, “Generation labels mean nothing. It’s time to retire them.” The turning-fifty essay.

SocArXiv. The archive’s own public figure is about 17,000 papers. See SocOpen news and essays. It accepted 3,162 papers in 2025, up 20%, and was running at roughly 4,300/year in early 2026: SocArXiv new submissions at record pace. Kohli Prize (€10,000, ceremony November 2025 at the European University Institute, Fiesole): SocArXiv wins Kohli Foundation for Sociology 2025 Infrastructure Prize and Kohli Foundation. The AI material is the freshest and most useful thing in the file: the case of the paper he would once have accepted, at Where should SocArXiv draw the AI line?, and the policy announcement at SocArXiv releases AI policy, source of the verbatim quote “We feel the need to express our humanity in this process.” The November 2025 moratorium on AI-topic papers and the November 2025 decision to stop accepting arts and humanities work are linked from those posts.

Citizen Scholar. January 2025.

GLP-1 post — source for the insurance detail (state plan covers GLP-1s only for diabetes; about $6,000 out of pocket for the year) and the verbatim quote “never comment on anyone’s body unless invited.” I omitted his weight, BMI, and body-composition numbers, which are in the post. They are his to disclose and I saw no reason to relay them.

Lyman Stone post — source for both Stone quotations (Cohen links the original X posts), Stone’s clan-organization defense, the Murray comparison, the hiring recommendation, and the footnote about Stone calling him a liar. The Murray line, verbatim “saying quietly and unhysterically, ‘there’s smoke,'” comes from What they say about race, where Cohen reports Murray confirming it to him. I gave Stone’s own framing in his own terms and left the adjudication to the reader.

Self-assessment. The anonymous exchange about giving him a voice, and his remark that outreach eats research time (verbatim quote used: “Why give Philip N. Cohen a voice in this discussion?”).

Extrapolations I made without citation: that a razor-blade splice, a live newscast, and a weekly music-review deadline train particular habits; that anyone building a federal household roster learns categories are constructed; that a tenured full professor bears less risk in leaving a professional association than a job candidate does. The one interpretive move I want to flag explicitly is the paragraph pairing his mother’s distributed-control science with his own institution-building. I say in the text that he has not drawn that line in print, and I did not assert a causal relationship. Her claim about hierarchy and nervous systems is quoted from his own post.

The Luc Boltanski Frame on Philip Cohen

In Paris, at the start of the 1980s, a sociologist sat with a box of letters that a newspaper had received and not printed. Luc Boltanski (b. January 4, 1940) had 275 of them, sent to Le Monde between 1979 and 1981 by people who wanted an injustice exposed. Working with Yann Darré and Marie-Ange Schiltz, he coded everything he could think of. The characteristics of the affair. How long it had been going on. Whether the letter came typed or on letterhead. Whether the writer had underlined heavily. Whether he had used insults.

Then he did the two things that made the study. He convened a jury of ordinary readers and asked each of them to rate every file for normality after one quick pass. And he defined the positions any denunciation has to fill: a victim, a denouncer, a persecutor, and a judge. Each position got coded for size, on an axis running from a single named individual to a collective.

What came back from the jury was a ranking by configuration. A letter in which a man speaks for himself about a persecutor who wronged him alone reads as private business, or as illness. The same complaint, with the victim enlarged into a category and the persecutor turned from a man into an office, reads as a cause. Boltanski called the work required to move from the first to the second desingularization, and the rise to generality. His paper's central sentence, in the standard English rendering, is that a normal denunciation is marked by the otherness of the denouncer and the victim, and that carrying one out requires the standing to speak up for someone else, to come symbolically to his aid.

Normality here is a judgment made by an audience. It runs loose from truth. A man can be right and be filed.

Boltanski built this instrument at the moment he was breaking with Pierre Bourdieu (1930–2002) over what a sociologist does. Bourdieu's sociologist unmasks. Boltanski's studies the unmasking, treating ordinary people as competent accusers whose grammar can be described. He got a theory of denunciation by declining to denounce. Anyone who picks up the instrument should keep that in view, because the model rates admissibility and says nothing about who deserves condemnation. Used as a verdict, it becomes the thing it describes.

Philip Cohen has spent twenty years filling the denouncer position in a discipline that has no established procedure for it. His work sorts along Boltanski's axis, and the sort explains something that complaints about his tone cannot.

Start with the case that works.

In December 2025, having been asked to meet a National Academies panel on corrections and retractions, Cohen opened Volume 90 of American Sociological Review and went through it article by article, clicking the links to see whether the code and data were there. Eighteen quantitative papers. Twelve arrived with replication packages or directions to the data. Six arrived with nothing. He counted the qualitative and mixed papers too, and he printed his earlier tallies for comparison: four of fifteen in 2020, eight of twenty-five in 2023. He added that the association's 2018 guide for editors does not contain the word retraction, and that a single article has been pulled from an association journal this century, in a documented fraud case involving a Dutch psychologist.

Now read the positions. The victim is anyone who wants to check a result and cannot, which is a category with no face. The persecutor is a procedure, a journal that permits the phrase available upon request. The judge is any reader holding the same volume, and the judge can overturn the denouncer, which Cohen invites when he calls his own methods squishy and asks that corrections be mailed to his office written on the back of a fifty-dollar bill. He appears in the file as a man who counted, and who can be recounted.

Boltanski's jury would have rated it high, and the discipline did. An author whose paper Cohen had marked as providing nothing arrived in the comment thread, agreed he was right, promised a package once teaching quieted down, and thanked him for what he does for the field. The share of quantitative papers shipping code has roughly tripled across the three audits.

The Pew campaign has the same architecture built by a different route. There Cohen enlarged the denouncer rather than shrinking him: an open letter in May 2021 carrying about a hundred and fifty signatures from demographers and social scientists. The victim is a category, everyone sorted by arbitrary birth years and described by traits assigned to the sort. The persecutor is a practice at a research organization, never a person. Kim Parker answered in July in the organization's voice, granting the risk of age stereotyping. In May 2023 the organization published a new policy: generational analysis only where the data support comparing people at the same age in different periods, the labels used sparingly.

Nobody was accused of anything. The configuration did the work.

The most exacting case in the file is the one where the victim is his mother.

Avis Cohen ran a lab at Cornell University for ten years on her own federal grants and got no tenure-track offer. Maryland hired her as a full professor in 1990. Her son published his account of this nine days after her death in June 2026, and every operation Boltanski describes is visible in the paragraph. He concedes the defensible version first: passing on her right after the postdoc may have been reasonable. He specifies the indefensible one: with the grants and the publications she held by 1990, it was not. He names no chairman and no colleague. The persecutor is a department that had no offer for her. And then he desingularizes the victim, setting Suzanne Bianchi beside her and naming the category they share, faculty women who were never assistant professors.

A grieving son writing about his own mother sits in the corner of the diagram Boltanski's jury filed as pathology, and Cohen gets out of that corner in four sentences. He knows how the filter works. He passed his mother through it.

The Goffman affair is where the configuration starts to move.

Cohen went after the one element of On the Run a stranger could test: a household survey reporting 217 homes on the block, 308 men aged eighteen to thirty in residence, and 144 of them carrying warrants. Census figures for comparable Philadelphia neighborhoods gave less than half that many young men. The residence rule, three days a week, could put the same man in two homes. He declined to say the ethnography was fabricated, which kept the persecutor from collapsing into a single young scholar: the file also indicted the referees who let the survey through, the committees that gave the book its prizes, and the professional habit of treating a request for the evidence as a discourtesy.

Then American Sociological Review rejected his comment. The editors agreed he had found errors and chose not to correct the record.

At that moment Cohen became the victim of his own affair, which is the position from which no denunciation travels. Watch the repair. He published the rejection. He put the comment on his university web page and later a version of it in Social Forces. And ten years on, in the audit, his rejected comments appear as evidence about journals rather than as evidence about him: two comments submitted, errors conceded by editors both times, no correction either time, one case described and the other withheld. The injury got converted into a data point in a series. Boltanski would recognize the maneuver as the only legitimate route out of that corner. A denouncer who is also the victim can be heard if he makes his own injury an instance of a general condition.

The Wilcox posts run the other way.

The empirical dispute has a high-normality victim: people with no money being instructed that finishing school, working, marrying and then having children will keep them out of poverty, when the schooling, the work, the health care and the available partners are the things they lack. That victim is a category, and the argument about selection into marriage is checkable by anyone who understands what a comparison group has to do.

Then there is the title asserting that Brad Wilcox lies, and the tag on the end of it, part whatever.

Boltanski's team coded for insults. They also coded for duration, the accumulating file, the correspondent who writes again. Both markers are in that title, one announcing the insult and the other announcing the series. And the persecutor has contracted to a single named man at the moment the reader needed him to stay general. The consequence is measurable in the reading: a person who wants the selection argument has to walk past a character verdict to reach it. The selection argument invites him to check. The verdict asks him to trust.

The Lyman Stone post from July 2026 is the strongest file in the drawer on evidence and the weakest on form.

The victims are general and plural: Somalis, and everyone outside the denouncing party's religion. The evidence is sourced and linked, which is more than most such accusations offer, and it consists of Stone's own posts. Stone's defense is in the file too, that his objection concerns clan social organization rather than ancestry.

Two moves then take the configuration apart. Cohen delivers the verdict rather than submitting the case, and he instructs the judge to act against the man: he would not hire Stone or publish his work, and neither should you. The judge position folds into the denouncer position, and the audience Boltanski's model reserves for weighing is handed a sentence to execute. Then Stone returns the same word, calling Cohen a liar, and Cohen answers in a footnote that he will not spell it out and that readers should ask Stone for receipts.

Two men trading the accusation of lying is the configuration ordinary readers file as a quarrel, whatever the record shows. None of this bears on whether Cohen has read Stone correctly. The jury in Paris was not rating truth.

The association posts are the mixed case.

Cohen had served three years on the Committee on Publications and failed to get a policy adopted that would have told readers whether a published article came with its data. He says the staff invented a rule that would have barred him from taking part in the discussion of his own proposal. That grievance is as singular as a grievance gets, one man wronged by named colleagues in a committee room.

His resignation post in November 2021 puts the money first. Dues and conference costs that the association's own membership survey identified as the largest problem. Subscription prices more than doubled in eight years. A seven-year contract signed with a commercial publisher in 2018 without notice to members. Library revenue that transfers money from teaching-heavy institutions to research-heavy ones, since publication in the association's journals is dominated by elite universities. The personal insult about the invented rule appears well down the page, after the victim has been established as somebody else.

And then the model's signature: the victim showed up. A community college instructor wrote in the comment thread that the subscription fees had always been prohibitive for faculty like her, that she had stayed out of commitment to the organization, and that she was now cancelling. A denunciation that has completed its rise to generality recruits the people it claimed to speak for.

The best reply in that thread also turns on configuration. A junior scholar agreed with the whole analysis and asked where new people would build networks if established people left. The question resingularizes Cohen. A tenured full professor at a research university with a large audience bears none of the cost of exit. He speaks for the community college instructor and he does not stand where she stands. Boltanski's requirement of standing to come to another man's aid cuts in both directions, and the junior scholar found the edge that cuts back.

Something in the 2026 material suggests Cohen understands all of this.

His archive spent late 2025 and early 2026 drowning in machine-written submissions, and had to start refusing papers it would once have taken. Read the March 2026 policy announcement next to the July post about Stone. The policy comes in the first person plural. It names the five people on the subcommittee. It states the competing interests it is trying to balance, the scholars who want a reliable literature, the volunteers facing the queue each day, the independent researchers who need guidance. It declines to promise a fair standard that could be written down completely, says the archive will make human judgments and will not defer to detection software, and invites appeals. The line everyone quotes from it is that the team felt a need to express its humanity in the process.

That is a man writing from the judge's chair, and writing carefully, four months before he wrote a hiring recommendation from the denouncer's.

A complaint about tone locates the trouble inside a man, where nothing can be done about it, and where the complaint doubles as an excuse for ignoring arithmetic that happens to be correct. Boltanski locates it in a system of places, and places can be occupied differently. Cohen's consequential work stands where the injured party is somebody else and the accused is a procedure. His inconsequential work stands where he is the injured party and the accused has a name and a face.

Two things follow.

The filter has a cost, and the cost falls on the people it looks most reasonable to protect. Requiring desingularization means that a man wronged by an institution, alone, with nobody to speak for him and no series to attach himself to, cannot make himself heard until he finds a category to stand in front of. Institutions benefit from that requirement. The editors who conceded Cohen's error and printed no correction were protected by his singularity for ten years, until he could file his injury as one of a pair inside a longer count. Most people never get the second instance.

And arithmetic is the cheapest desingularization available. A number anyone can recount arrives without an author. The reason Cohen's audits move journals while his verdicts move nobody is that a count of replication packages in Volume 90 has no interest in the outcome, no history with the accused, and no standing to establish. It does not need to come symbolically to anyone's aid. It just needs to be right, and to be checkable by a stranger with the same volume open on his desk.

Notes

Luc Boltanski, with Yann Darré and Marie-Ange Schiltz, “La dénonciation,” Actes de la recherche en sciences sociales 51 (March 1984), 3–40. Full text free at Persée: https://www.persee.fr/doc/arss_0335-5322_1984_num_51_1_2212. Corpus confirmed as 275 letters sent to Le Monde, 1979–1981 (summary; a pedantic correction of a common overstatement of the corpus size is at https://thesociologicalpages.org — see https://thesocietypages.org/theory/2021/01/06/shai-dromi-reads-luc-boltanski/, which notes the letters went to something like the paper’s investigative desk). The English-language development is Love and Justice as Competences (Polity, 2012), whose opening chapter is the source for the coding scheme (typewriter or letterhead, underlining, insults), the jury of ordinary readers rating each file for normality after a rapid first reading, the four actants, and the coding of each actant for size on a singular-general axis. The key sentence I paraphrase about the otherness of denouncer and victim is Boltanski et al. 1984, p. 32; the English rendering I worked from appears in a 2025 Open Book Publishers volume applying the model to denunciations in the arts. On normality as a function of how a political order relates private interest to the common good, see the discussion of Love and Justice as Competences pp. 193–94 in https://academic.oup.com/ips/article/16/1/olab024/6408727. On the Bourdieu break and the pragmatic sociology of critique: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luc_Boltanski and Boltanski, “Sociologie critique et sociologie de la critique,” Politix 10–11 (1990).

There was a fortieth-anniversary colloquium in Paris in March 2024 with Boltanski present, and a resulting volume, Théories et pratiques de la dénonciation publique (Le Bord de l’Eau, 2026): https://www.editionsbdl.com/produit/theories-et-pratiques-de-la-denonciation-publique/ and https://carism.assas-universite.fr/fr/colloque-scenes-denonciation-publique-medias-langages-societes.

I applied only the 1984 model and its direct extension in Love and Justice as Competences. I kept Distant Suffering and On Justification out, though both are tempting: the topic of denunciation in the former and the orders of worth in the latter would each pull the essay into a second frame. The single line I let in from outside is the historical note that Boltanski developed the model while breaking with Bourdieu, which sets up the instrument rather than analyzing Cohen with it.

Two claims I want to flag as mine rather than Boltanski’s. First, that arithmetic is the cheapest desingularization available, because a recountable number arrives without an author. Boltanski does not say this; the singular-general axis in his paper runs over persons and collectives, not over kinds of evidence. It follows from his framework and it is the closest thing in this essay to an original contribution, so it should be defended as an extension rather than smuggled in as exegesis. Second, that the requirement to desingularize systematically advantages institutions over the individuals they have injured. Boltanski implies something adjacent when he says the constraints of normality depend on how a political order relates private interest to the common good, and he is describing rather than complaining.

The essay reaches an unflattering conclusion about Cohen’s verdicts and a flattering one about his counts, and it reaches both by the same procedure, which is the only defense against the charge that the frame was chosen for the outcome. The Stone passage states his evidence, states Stone’s defense, and declines to say who is right, which keeps me out of a fight neither man needs me in. The guardrail paragraph is early on, that the model rates admissibility and not merit. Without it a reader can take the essay as a claim that Cohen’s accusations are false, which it does not make and which the frame cannot support.

The Audit Society: Rituals of Verification

Michael Power trained in the philosophy of the social sciences, then qualified as a chartered accountant and did audit work for Deloitte Haskins and Sells. He arrived at the London School of Economics as a lecturer in accounting and finance in 1987, which put him in Britain at the moment the word audit slipped its moorings. Medical audit. Environmental audit. Teaching audit. Technology audit. Quality audit. Value-for-money audit. A term that had meant a licensed professional checking a company’s books against evidence was suddenly available for any activity that somebody wanted held to account.

He wrote a pamphlet about it for Demos in 1994 called The Audit Explosion, and three years later a book of 183 pages, The Audit Society: Rituals of Verification, from Oxford. The argument has six moves, and the chapter titles carry them: the rise of audit, the audit explosion, audit and the dialectic of regulatory failure, audit knowledge and the construction of auditees, and then the last chapter, “Beyond Audit, Towards Trust.”

Audit expands where confidence in professional self-regulation has failed, which means audit demand is a symptom of withdrawn trust. Audit does not restore the trust whose absence created it; it relocates trust onto the audit process and the auditor, at a further remove and with less visibility. What audits check, once they scale, is the system of control rather than the substance of the work, which Power calls control of control. Activities do not arrive auditable; they have to be made auditable, and the making reorganizes them around what can be documented. And the audited respond in one of two ways, either by producing compliance for the inspection while leaving the work untouched, or by internalizing the audit’s categories until the activity becomes the thing the audit can see.

Power has been careful about being read as a debunker. In a 2021 paper on the logic of the audit trail he wrote that accounting and auditing are “not inherently value-subverting and may be value-enhancing.” His complaint has always been narrower and harder to answer: the audit explosion has never been subjected to the scrutiny it applies to everything else.

Philip Cohen calls his own procedure an audit. In December 2025, reporting that two-thirds of the quantitative papers in the most recent volume of American Sociological Review came with replication packages, he described this as better than the results of his previous informal audits.

He counts replication packages by volume. He counts how many articles have been retracted from the association’s journals this century, and arrives at one. He counts the birth years behind generational labels and demonstrates that the boundaries float. He counts the association’s subscription price increases across eight years and reads its revenue structure out of its own audited accounts. He counted the households and young men in Alice Goffman’s neighborhood survey against census figures for comparable Philadelphia blocks. He counts his archive’s submissions in thirty-day windows and posts the Stata code that pulls the metadata. When his own divorce prediction was published under a title that promised a future trend, he went back every year as new survey data landed and checked it in public.

A sociologist who does this much counting of other people’s compliance is running a private regulatory regime with no budget, no statutory basis, and one employee.

Asked to meet a National Academies panel on corrections and retractions, Cohen’s message was that sociology almost never corrects or retracts, and that the reason is circular: the discipline’s practices make it impossible to know whether serious errors or fraud are occurring. Trust cannot be extended because nothing can be checked, and nothing can be checked because trust has been extended. Elsewhere he describes the professional reflex he ran into over the Goffman survey, where asking to inspect the evidence behind an admired book got treated as a breach of collegial manners. That reflex is the claim of professional self-regulation, and Power’s book is about what happens after the claim stops being believed.

Cohen does not count correct findings. He counts whether a package exists. In the 2020 version of the audit he said so, noting that he had assessed the packages at a glance and had not tested anybody’s code. The improvement he has documented, from four of fifteen quantitative papers in 2020 to eight of twenty-five in 2023 to twelve of eighteen in 2025, is an improvement in documentation. Whether the code runs, whether the data support the tables, whether the models were specified before or after the results were seen: none of that is in the count. Nobody has run those replications. The audit checks the control system.

Power’s term for the produced condition is auditability, and the tripled proportion is a record of auditability being manufactured across five years. The relation between auditability and correctness is an open empirical question that Cohen’s series does not address and could not address, and he does not claim otherwise.

The auditees behaved as Power’s fifth chapter predicts. Cohen’s tables catalogue the ceremonial forms: data available from the corresponding author on reasonable request, materials on the author’s personal website where they are not, a PDF of the code linked from a homepage, a repository link that requires asking permission, and blinded review links pasted into published articles by authors who had no interest in whether a reader could follow them. He tells the journal’s staff to click their own links before publishing. Each of those artifacts is what compliance looks like when the count is known and the substance is not.

Then the other response arrived in his comment thread. A sociologist who had published in a journal with a mandatory reproducibility policy wrote that assembling a replication package for the first time took a full day of work despite tidy file management, that people default to available upon request because collating for a stranger is labor rather than because they are hiding anything, that most researchers keep a system only they understand, and that the experience had converted him: he plans to build packages from now on whether or not journals require them, and at fifty-nine he does not accept being set in one’s ways as an excuse.

Both of Power’s responses to audit, ceremonial compliance and internal conversion, appeared in the same thread on the same December morning, one in the tables and one in the comments. The compliance cost the convert described, a day of skilled labor per paper, appears nowhere in the count. Power’s observation is that audit generates work whose value is invisible to the audit that generated it.

If audit displaces trust onto the auditor, then the auditor has to be trusted, and audit has produced a new object of faith rather than eliminating the need for faith. Financial audit cannot escape this, because the evidence the auditor examined belongs to the client and the auditor’s report is an opinion delivered to a principal. The public gets the opinion and never the working papers.

Cohen’s evidence is a journal volume sitting on a library shelf. His caveat is that his methods are squishy. His invitation is that corrections be mailed to his office, written on the back of a fifty-dollar bill. His metadata code is posted. Anyone who thinks he has miscounted Volume 90 can open Volume 90. The audit’s inputs are as public as its output, which makes trust in the auditor optional, and optional trust is the only kind that survives contact with a discipline that has stopped extending it.

That is also the best available account of why his counts move institutions and his verdicts do not. A count anyone can redo carries no author with it.

The costs of his regime are visible in two places. The first is his own career, which has migrated from first-order work to second-order work. The man who established a reputation on the devaluation of women’s work, on metropolitan labor markets, on divorce rates and marriage markets, now spends December afternoons clicking other people’s links. He has said as much: time spent on public outreach eats research time, and with fewer media mentions he might have more research worth mentioning. Power’s audit explosion is second-order activity, checking, at the expense of the first-order activity being checked, and here it can be traced through one publication record.

The second is the archive, which publishes its own compliance costs. Rejection rates far above historical levels. Moderation burden up. Revised versions now passing through the queue, which is welcome and which doubles the reading. Volunteers thanked. Cohen is one of the few people running an inspection regime who audits the cost of his own inspection in public.

Then came the paper that took the argument to its end.

Somebody submitted work to the archive that would have been accepted a few years earlier. It had an abstract. It had a title that reflected the contents. It had an ORCID. It had cited references, and the citations and quotations appeared to be real. Its statistical models were complex and apparently competent, with graphical and tabular results. It was coherent and relevant to existing research. The code was in a public repository. And at the end there was an AI disclosure listing the tools used to write the code, run the literature search, advise on the statistics, and draft nearly all of the text, alongside the author’s claim to have formulated the question, chosen the framework and the variables, directed the analytical decisions, interpreted the results, and verified every data claim and every citation. He offered a methodology audit on request.

Every element of the audit trail was present. The paper was dull, unoriginal, superficial, thin in its literature review, and empty where it claimed a theoretical contribution.

Power’s 2026 essay on auditability in the digital age describes the general condition: notions of evidence and auditability have become fluid, the spread of algorithms through the systems being audited pushes audit toward becoming algorithmic in turn, and the evidentiary basis loses its independence, until at the limit the audit becomes self-referential and the auditor is left as a “de-skilled curator” of models and their outputs. Cohen reached the same place from the other direction and wrote it out in the first person. The audit trail was manufactured by the technology whose presence the trail exists to disclose. He noted that a disclosure requirement he cannot verify is worthless, since the chatbots read the rules and will help an author appear to satisfy them, and that any attempt at detection would be an arms race against the people who own the machines, lost at the cost of the archive’s work.

He conceded the further problem in the same breath. His platform accepts work without peer review and assigns digital object identifiers and the other trappings of scholarly legitimacy, which makes it an attractive place both to deposit synthetic papers and to harvest real ones. He built an institution that issues auditable form without quality judgment, and the form is now being produced at industrial scale by systems with no interest in the judgment.

The policy that came out in March 2026 reads like the last chapter of Power’s book. It is written in the collective voice with the five members of the drafting subcommittee named. It states the competing interests it tries to balance. It refuses automated detection, refuses the arms race, commits the moderators to human judgment using perception and experience, makes no promise of a rule that could be stated completely, and invites appeals. Cohen and his colleagues wrote that they felt a need to insist on their humanity in the process.

Beyond audit, towards trust, arrived at by the auditor.

Cohen spent three years as an elected member of the association’s publications committee trying to get a policy adopted that would merely tell readers whether a published article came with its data. Two subcommittees produced a mild version. The governing council rejected it. He organized a petition against the association’s letter opposing open distribution of federally funded research, got more than two hundred signatures, got the committee to pass a resolution, and watched the council ignore it. Persuasion inside the institution moved nothing across three years. Counting in public moved the proportion of quantitative articles shipping code from a quarter to two-thirds across five. A reader who takes Power’s book as an argument against auditing has to explain that record.

An audit trail records what a person can be made to show. It was always a proxy, and everyone involved knew it, and the proxy held for as long as producing the trail was more expensive than doing the work. That condition failed sometime in 2025. The archive’s queue is now full of papers whose trails are immaculate, and the only remaining question about them is the one no trail has ever been able to answer, which is whether anybody meant it.

Cohen built the trail, followed it to the end, and came out into a room where somebody has to decide.

Notes

Michael Power, The Audit Society: Rituals of Verification (Oxford University Press, 1997; paperback 1999), 183 pages, six chapters, the last titled “Beyond Audit, Towards Trust.” Table of contents and publisher description. The precursor pamphlet is The Audit Explosion (Demos, 1994). Biographical detail, including the philosophy training, the Deloitte Haskins and Sells years, and the 1987 arrival at LSE, is from https://www.lse.ac.uk/people/michael-power and the publisher’s author note.

The two later pieces I lean on: “Modelling the Microfoundations of the Audit Society: Organizations and the Logic of the Audit Trail,” Academy of Management Review 46, no. 1 (2021): 6–32, open access at http://eprints.lse.ac.uk/100243/, source of the verbatim phrase “not inherently value-subverting and may be value-enhancing” and of the argument that the audit trail is performative of the conditions of its own expansion. And “Auditability in the Digital Age,” International Journal of Auditing (2026), https://doi.org/10.1111/ijau.70038, source of the fluidity of evidence, the platformization risk, the non-independence of the evidentiary basis, and the verbatim phrase “de-skilled curator.” Also relevant: “Theorizing the Economy of Traces: From Audit Society to Surveillance Capitalism,” Organization Theory 3, no. 3 (2022), which won the 2024 James G. March Prize, and the new book Economy of Traces: Traceability, Tracking and the Accounts We Live By (Oxford, 2026). The self-critical retrospective is “Afterword: Audit Society 2.0?” (2022), http://eprints.lse.ac.uk/115189/.

Power’s own vocabulary carries the essay. I kept out the neighboring literature that would have turned this into a composite: Espeland and Sauder on reactivity, Meyer and Rowan on ceremonial conformity, Strathern on audit cultures, Muller on metric fixation. The two-response pattern I describe as ceremonial compliance and internal conversion is Power’s chapter 5 material on the construction of auditees, in his terms rather than the institutionalist terms it draws on.

Two claims that are mine. First, that Cohen’s practice escapes Power’s regress of trust because his audit inputs are public in a way financial audit evidence never is. Power’s regress argument turns on the privacy of audit evidence and the delivery of an opinion to a principal; he does not consider the case where the audited material is a published artifact available to every reader. This is the essay’s contribution and it is arguable, since a reader still has to trust Cohen’s coding decisions about what counts as a package, which is why his squishy-methods caveat is doing more work than it appears to. Second, that the proxy held only while producing the trail cost more than doing the work, and that the condition failed in 2025. Power’s 2026 essay gestures at the same collapse without dating it.

The debunking pull is real and the essay resists it in three places: the paragraph early on where Power disclaims being read as a debunker, the sentence conceding that the relation between auditability and correctness is unknown in both directions rather than known to be absent, and the late paragraph laying out the three years of failed committee work against the five years of successful counting.

The obvious next move is to ask whether Cohen’s audits have improved the correctness of published sociology, and the honest answer is that nobody knows, because the replications have not been run. Saying more than that would require me to assert something the record does not support. It is also the strongest single sentence available to a critic of open-science reform, and the fact that Cohen has never claimed otherwise is to his credit.

Philip N. Cohen Responds

From Philip N. Cohen (@philipncohen.com), Bluesky, July 27, 2026, 2:41 PM. Five posts.

1/ Well now I have been slop biographied. It’s on the website of someone named Luke Ford, along with 475 other biographies that “AI helped” him to “write.” I’m probably the only person who has ever read it, including the “author.”

2/ At 13,000 words, it’s pretty thorough, and superficially accurate, with lots of correct facts linked to real sources. But next time you read a real biography, be grateful the didn’t just rely on free online content: blog posts, the subjects writings, CV, official websites, and Wikipedia page!

3/ Also, I don’t know if this is a glitch, or these are supposed to be separate chapters, but halfway through it has a bibliography, and then starts what looks like a new biography of Luc Boltansky, except it’s using incidents from my life to reflect on Boltansky’s key works.

4/ Then it does it again and starts what looks like a new biography of Michael Power, my life now reflected through The Audit Society. It wraps up with conclusions about me, so maybe these are chapters in my biography? Someone is definitely sampling hallucinogens (& by someone I mean me, right now)

5/ We’re only a couple years into this hellscape, and already concepts like “author,” “writing,” “document,” “research,” and “hallucination” have been radically destabilized. If you think they haven’t, I’m jealous of your life!

On July 26, 2026, I emailed Cohen:

Dear Professor:

I’m a blogger in LA with no credentials (I just like to read your papers and posts). If you have the patience and the inclination, I’d be grateful for any feedback, even if it is just “LOL.”
I’d love to learn where I was inaccurate or unfair or just missing the point. If you’d rather read this with the links inserted, let me know. I wrote this with assistance from AI.

I then included the text from early versions of these two posts: The Live Questions in Sociology and Turner v Turner. Other sociologists I emailed responded with substantial answers that improved my posts.

Cohen responded:

Hi –
My feedback is: stop using AI to write.
Cheers,
Philip

I tried to enter a conversation and I succeeded.

My interlocutor, the great auditor, can’t point out a mistake. He condemns my first pass on genre.

Bliss was in that dawn to be alive.

Cohen criticizes me for producing a slop biography. He is right. My first pass fails to add anything to his story. It is the jumbled mess he describes.

It is also a breadcrumb dropped in an online wilderness.

Breadcrumbs along the way is my motto.

When I am curious, I read what’s at hand, and then I might post something. The mediocrity of my initial effort embarrasses me and I feel driven to improve it.

If I have time and interest, I return to the post and to add value. The tenth edition is always better than the first one.

Is There a Contribution in this Blog?

A colleague of Stanley Fish’s at Johns Hopkins was approached on the first day of a semester in the late 1970s by a student with a question. She asked whether there was a text in this class. He told her yes, the Norton Anthology. She said no, she meant in this class do we believe in poems and things, or is it just us.

He worked out where she had been. She had taken Fish’s course on interpretive theory the previous term, and she had arrived in a new room wanting to know which game was being played in it before she committed to a position.

Fish (b. April 19, 1938) built a career on the argument her question contains. The words on the page do not carry their meaning independently of a community of readers who have agreed, without ever voting on it, what counts as a reading, what counts as evidence for one, and who is qualified to offer it. He calls this anti-foundationalism and denies that it is relativism. Members of a community are constrained, and the constraint is real, and it comes from membership rather than from anything outside.

Seventeen years after that exchange he applied the position to his own profession in a book called Save the World on Your Own Time, published by Oxford in 2008. The academic job is a distinct enterprise with a distinct good, which is to introduce students to bodies of knowledge and traditions of inquiry and equip them to work inside them. Three rules follow. Do your job. Do not try to do somebody else’s job. Do not let anybody else do your job. Political questions belong in the classroom as objects of analysis, which he calls academicizing them, detached from their real-world urgency so that a student examines what would make a president good rather than being asked to conclude that a particular one is bad. Academic freedom is freedom to do the academic job, and not freedom to do whatever job a professor thinks the moment requires.

In January 2025, Columbia published a book by Philip Cohen making close to the opposite argument. Values shape the questions anybody asks, the value-free posture is a fiction, and a scholar owes the public disclosure of where he stands, honesty about uncertainty, deference to evidence, and clarity about the edges of his competence. He grants that a man occupies several roles, researcher and teacher and activist and litigant and citizen, and locates the trouble in moving between them without saying so.

Both men have written the book. Neither has been made to argue with the other. There is a recording that does it for them.

On the afternoon of April 3, 2020, Cohen sat down in front of a screen and recorded a lecture for his undergraduate social problems class at the University of Maryland. He opens by saying he has missed them. Ninety seconds in he says he is not an expert on pandemics or global public health, that he is a social scientist who reads a lot and can understand what he reads, and that he is a teacher trying to explain where things stand.

What follows for six minutes is the work of a competent explainer. The etymology of pandemic. The date of the World Health Organization declaration. Why this virus is bad, stated as four conditions with the uncertainty attached to each: no immunity, high transmissibility, asymptomatic spread, and a mortality rate he says is maybe around one percent while saying three times that nobody knows. He explains why the six-foot rule is six feet. He tells them a cloth mask recommendation is coming.

At the seven-minute mark the lecture turns. He puts up the CDC budget falling from just under eight billion to just over seven with a proposed cut below that. He puts up the elimination of the pandemic office in the National Security Council and a report from the previous fall noting that it remained unclear who would be in charge in a cross-border biological crisis. He describes the 2019 federal exercise that found the government unprepared and produced recommendations that went unused. Then he quotes the president saying nobody could have seen this coming, and says it is a total lie, and adds that Trump did not know because he does not know a lot.

Then he plays the montage. Two minutes of clips. Totally under control. One person from China. Fifteen cases going to close to zero. It will disappear like a miracle. When it ends he tells the class that none of it was true and that the messaging existed so that the president would feel he was doing a good job.

The rest is arithmetic again, and it is the best part. The log-scale doubling chart with days since the tenth death. The correction he makes to his own slide, that the American curve looks worse than Europe’s until you notice the country is the size of Europe and holds several outbreaks. The lag argument: the people arriving at hospitals today were infected around the time the schools closed, so everything visible is already history. Thousands will die and the slope will not break on its own.

At the twenty-seven minute mark he tells them what to do. Follow real public health advice. Do not listen to the president. Do not listen to the politicians in his orbit. Listen to your governor, your local public health officials, the Centers for Disease Control.

Then he tells them to look after each other, not to let physical distance become social distance, and to think about who they want to be in the world that comes after.

Fish’s rule permits almost all of that lecture and forbids a specific part of it, and the part it forbids is smaller than his critics assume.

The budget numbers are teachable. The eliminated office is teachable. The ignored exercise is teachable. The doubling chart, the lag, the flattening logic, the correction about outbreak units, all of it is the academic job done well, and a professor who withheld it because the subject had become partisan would be failing at the thing Fish says is the only thing.

Even the policy dispute survives. Cohen argues that the federal government should have seized control of ventilator production and distribution rather than leaving it to the market. That is his own field and it is a live argument with a serious case on the other side about procurement capacity and the costs of commandeering supply chains, and Fish’s method would have him teach it as an argument. He teaches it as a finding.

What the rule forbids is the last minute. The instruction to a captive class holding his grade in their transcripts, from a man who has twice told them he lacks the relevant expertise, about which public officials to believe.

Cohen has an answer. There is no neutral version of that lecture. A professor who decides to show the CDC budget has already chosen, and one who decides not to has also chosen, and the choice is invisible in the second case, which makes it worse. He disclosed his limits at the start and at the end. The instruction he gave was about competence rather than party: listen to your governor, whoever your governor is, and to the public health agency. And in April 2020 the cost of the professorial shrug was measurable in a currency other than pedagogy.

Fish’s reply is the one about structure. The disclosure changes nothing about the room. A nineteen-year-old who thought the administration was handling it adequately now knows what the man grading his papers thinks of people who hold that view, and the disclaimer does not restore his position. Fish would say Cohen is trading on an authority the university conferred for a competence Cohen has already denied having, and that saying so out loud is a courtesy rather than a solution. Academic freedom protects the analysis. It does not underwrite the verdict.

The men disagree about whether a role can be limited by an act of will and announcement.

Run Fish further and he takes something from Cohen.

The chapter of Fish’s work that applies here is the one on anti-professionalism, from Doing What Comes Naturally (1989). His claim is that attacking the profession from inside it is a professional move, the highest-status one available, and that the attacker’s standing to attack is a product of the institution he is condemning. There is no outside from which to speak. The critique of the guild is a genre of guild performance.

Cohen resigned from the American Sociological Association in November 2021 and published his reasons. Dues too high. Subscriptions doubled in eight years. A publishing contract signed without notice. Revenue transferred from teaching-heavy libraries to research-heavy ones because publication in the journals is dominated by elite universities. Every one of those claims is correct as far as I can check.

The letter carried because a tenured full professor at a flagship wrote it, and it reached an audience because he had spent a decade accumulating the standing the association helps distribute. He speaks for the community college instructor from a chair she will not occupy, and she arrived in his comment thread to say she was cancelling her membership, which is the effect he wanted and also the transaction Fish describes. A junior scholar in the same thread asked where new people would build networks if established people left. That question is Fish’s argument arriving by instinct from somebody with no theory and something to lose.

Fish would say the position is unavoidable and that Cohen should stop describing it as an escape. Then he would look at the archive, which issues digital object identifiers and the other marks of scholarly legitimacy without peer review, and observe that a man who left one credentialing body has spent ten years building another.

Fish’s model says interpretive strategies constitute their objects, which implies there is no evidence available to settle a dispute between communities that disagree about what evidence is. Cohen’s audits are an awkward case. He opens a volume of a journal, clicks the links, and reports how many quantitative papers arrived with code and data. Twelve of eighteen in 2025, against four of fifteen in 2020. An ethnographer who thinks the count is beside the point can redo the count and get the same number. The count travels across the boundary while its meaning does not.

Fish might say that the agreement about what a link is, what counts as a package, and what makes two counts the same count is not evidence of a world outside interpretation. It is the description of a community wide enough to include both parties, and the width was invisible until somebody tested it. What the audits show is that the community sharing a notion of a countable artifact is larger than the community sharing a notion of a valid ethnography.

That answer is also unfalsifiable. Every apparent counterexample gets absorbed by widening the community until it contains the agreement. A theory that cannot lose is doing something other than explaining.

Which brings the argument to July 2026.

Cohen read a long essay about his own life, produced with a machine’s help, and wrote five posts on Bluesky about it. He called it slop. He said it was thorough and superficially accurate with correct facts linked to real sources. He complained that it relied on freely available material, his blog and his writings and his CV and Wikipedia. He described losing his place halfway through, hitting a bibliography, and finding what looked like a second biography, of somebody else, using incidents from his life. His last post said that a couple of years into this the concepts of author, writing, document, research, and hallucination have been radically destabilized, and that he envies anyone who thinks otherwise.

Fish has been saying for fifty years that those concepts were never stable in the way the complaint assumes. Author is a set of practices for assigning credit and blame. Research is what a community recognizes as research. Document names a thing a community has agreed to treat as fixed. None of them ever rested on a property of the object, and all of them held firm anyway, because agreements that nobody has to defend feel like facts. What the machines did was withdraw the agreement. Fish would say nothing was destabilized in July 2026 that had ever been stable, and the panic is what it feels like when a settled practice becomes visible from outside.

Four months before the thread, Cohen’s own committee wrote the Fishian document.

The archive had received a paper that satisfied every requirement. Abstract, real citations, competent models, code in a public repository, and a disclosure listing every tool used to write it. Dull, thin, and empty where it claimed a contribution. Nothing checkable was missing.

The policy his subcommittee published in March 2026 refuses automated detection, declines to promise a standard that could be written down completely, commits the moderators to judgment made by people using perception and experience, and invites appeals. It says the group felt a need to insist on its humanity in the process.

That is a statement that competent members of a community can recognize the real thing without being able to specify the rule, which is Fish’s position on legal interpretation, literary interpretation, and everything else, arrived at by a man who spent ten years trying to build a machinery of verification that would make membership unnecessary.

The two halves of the argument turn out to be one argument. The reason disclosure cannot solve the classroom problem is the reason detection cannot solve the archive problem. Both proposals assume a place to stand outside the community from which the community’s practices can be certified. The professor announcing his standpoint is still the professor, holding the grade book, inside the room. The archive announcing a disclosure requirement is still the archive, and the rule gets read by the machines it was written to catch.

What Fish’s position does not supply is a way to act. He can say there is no outside and be right and have nothing to offer a man deciding on April 3, 2020, what to tell frightened students about whom to believe. Cohen decided. He said what he thought was true, he flagged the limits of his competence twice, he got the epidemiology broadly right and the vaccine timeline pessimistic, and he stepped over a line Fish thinks a professor should not cross. He has never claimed the line does not exist. His book is an argument about how to cross it in the open.

The student walked into the room at Hopkins and asked whether there was a text in this class. A student in a different room in April 2020 would have been asking a version of the same question with less time to spare. Is there a fact here, or is it just us, and either way, do I go home this weekend.

Cohen’s answer was that there is a chart, that the slope will not break on its own, and that he is telling them where he stands. Fish’s answer is that the chart persuades because they are already the kind of people charts persuade, and that the professor should have taught them what makes a chart persuasive and left the rest for after class.

One of those men had a class in front of him.

Notes

Frame. Stanley Fish, Is There a Text in This Class? The Authority of Interpretive Communities (Harvard, 1980), for the title anecdote and interpretive communities. The standard telling is that a Hopkins colleague was asked the question on the first day, answered with the Norton Anthology, received the clarification about poems and things, and then worked out that the student had taken Fish’s theory course the previous semester. Fish taught at Johns Hopkins from 1974 to 1985 as Kenan Professor of English and Humanities, which dates the story. I have paraphrased rather than quoted.

Save the World on Your Own Time (Oxford, 2008). The three rules, the mission statement about introducing students to bodies of knowledge and equipping them with analytical skills, the argument that academic freedom is freedom to do the academic job, and the concept of academicizing a topic by detaching it from its real-world urgency, are all from that book. The Bush example of academicizing (asking what makes a president good rather than whether this one is) is at around page 27; see the Chronicle discussion at https://www.chronicle.com/blognetwork/tenuredradical/how-to-do-your-job-without-really. Publisher summary at https://www.publishersweekly.com/9780195369021.

Anti-Professionalism,” in Doing What Comes Naturally: Change, Rhetoric, and the Practice of Theory in Literary and Legal Studies (Duke, 1989), is the source for the argument I run against the resignation letter. The claim there is that anti-professionalism is generated by professionalism and depends on it, and that the critic’s standing is conferred by the structure he attacks.

Biographical: born April 19, 1938, Providence; Berkeley, Johns Hopkins, Duke, dean at the University of Illinois at Chicago, then FIU; now Floersheimer Distinguished Visiting Professor of Law at Cardozo.

Frame discipline. Fish only. No Boltanski, no Power, no Becker. The temptation I refused is the obvious one, running interpretive communities over the Goffman dispute and the AI queue as a problem about evidence. The Power essay already lands on that conclusion by another route, and repeating it would give you a second vocabulary for a finished argument. This essay takes the one thing Fish has that nothing else in the file has, which is a published position on the exact question Cohen wrote a book about.

Cohen material. The April 3, 2020 lecture is at his YouTube channel: the disclaimer at 1:14, the four conditions from 3:02, the mask forecast at 6:51, the CDC budget at 7:40, the NSC office at 8:11, the 2019 exercise at 9:02, “total lie” at 9:40, the montage from 10:43, the verdict at 12:46, the market-versus-federal-direction argument at 16:09, the self-correction about outbreak units at 18:11, the lag argument at 22:36, and the instruction at 26:50. The chapter headings on the video, including the one naming what Trump did wrong, are his own and are quotable as his framing. Citizen Scholar (Columbia, January 2025) for the disclosure position. The resignation letter, the community college instructor, and the junior scholar are all in the November 6, 2021 post and its comments. The March 2026 archive policy and the February 2026 post about the submission are at socopen.org. The Bluesky thread is dated July 27, 2026.

The CDC appropriations figures, the elimination of the NSC directorate in the 2018 reorganization, and the 2019 federal pandemic exercise are documentary and were reported before the outbreak. The claim that ventilator production should have been federally directed is a policy argument with a real case against it, and Cohen presents it as settled. “Total lie” is a character verdict. I have kept those three categories separate in the text and have not told the reader what to conclude about the administration.

Two claims that are mine. First, that the classroom problem and the archive problem have the same structure, because both proposed solutions assume a standpoint outside the community from which its practices could be certified. Fish would accept it; he does not say it, because he has never written about preprint moderation. Second, that Cohen’s audits are a limited counterexample to strong Fish, in that a countable artifact travels across a boundary its meaning does not. I give Fish the winning reply and then say the reply is unfalsifiable, which is the honest place to leave it and the sentence a hostile reader of Fish will quote.

What I left out. Fish’s position on faculty bodies voting political resolutions bears on the association material and would have doubled the length. His exchange with David Horowitz over the Academic Bill of Rights is the obvious next move if you want to place him politically, and it would import a fight neither Cohen nor you needs.

Hero System

On December 6, 1973, an editor at Psychology Today telephoned a house in Vancouver. He had read a manuscript that had come across his desk a few weeks earlier and decided within the hour that he wanted to interview the man who wrote it. The man was in the hospital by the time Sam Keen’s got there. He had colon cancer and would be dead in three months, at forty-nine.

The first thing Ernest Becker (1924–1974) said when Keen walked into the room was that he was being caught in extremis, that this was a test of everything he had written about death, and that he had a chance to show how a man dies and what he surrounds it with.

His career had gone badly by the standards of the system he was in. He lost his first academic job at Syracuse after siding with a colleague in an academic freedom fight and never got tenure there. He moved through Berkeley, San Francisco State, and Simon Fraser, always somewhere else, always leaving. Two months after his funeral the book won the Pulitzer Prize.

What he argued in it is simple to state and difficult to hold. Man knows he will die, alone among the animals, and cannot bear it. Culture exists to give him a way of earning the feeling that his life counts for something beyond his body. Becker called the arrangement a hero system: a set of rules specifying what a man must do to be worth more than an animal that rots. Every society issues its own, every man is inside one, and the currency of one does not convert into the currency of another. The Aztec who took captives for the sun and the Quaker who would not lift his hand were both trying to be heroes. Neither could spend the other’s money.

The prize arriving after the funeral is the part of Becker’s biography that reads like an illustration of Becker. He had built a thing that would outlast him, and it did, and he was not there to receive the receipt.

In November 2025 a foundation in Europe invited Philip Cohen to open its awards with a lecture at the European University Institute, which occupies a former abbey in the hills above Florence. The prize was for infrastructure. The money was ten thousand euros, which for a full professor at a state flagship is not money. The archive he founded in 2016, SocArXiv, had by then taken in something like seventeen thousand papers and was accepting more than three thousand a year. The citation named him.

A man flies to a converted monastery in Tuscany to accept a medal for building a website that will keep working after he stops. The Beckerian reading is available in one sentence: Infrastructure outlasts its builder.

Nobody needs a theory of death anxiety to notice that a man in his late fifties has been putting his energy into a thing with no expiration date.

Cohen’s hero system promises that what he said will still be checkable after nobody remembers who said it. His sacred value is verification.

Watch what he does with his own standing. He posts his code. He tells readers his methods are squishy. He invites corrections, to be mailed to his office written on the back of a fifty-dollar bill. He publishes a paper predicting a trend and then returns every year, in public, to check the prediction against new data that could embarrass him. He publishes the rejection letters he receives. He tells the world that his own archive is full of bad work. Every one of those gestures spends down the personal authority that his profession issues as its wage.

He spends it to buy something else. A count of replication packages in a single volume of a journal has no author inside it. Anyone with the volume can redo the count and get the same number, and if the count is wrong the person who made it is beside the point. That is what he is building toward across everything: claims that do not depend on the continued existence, reputation, or good faith of any living man.

Set that against the system he fights. Under the trust regime, a finding is credible because a serious person vouched for it, and the serious person is serious because other serious people vouch for him, and the chain runs back through advisers and departments and prizes to men who are now dead but whose names still function. That system produces knowledge that lives in persons. It also means knowledge dies with persons, or worse, survives them as authority nobody can any longer inspect. Cohen’s objection to it is technical when he states it and theological underneath. He wants a literature that does not require anyone to be trusted, because everyone dies and trust dies with them.

His mother Avis Cohen cut a segment out of a lamprey’s spinal cord and found that it kept firing in the rhythm of swimming with no brain attached. The finding entered engineering. Robots walk better when the pattern lives in the limbs. Her most cited paper is about a quadruped machine, and most of the people building on her work do not know her name.

That is impersonal survival.

Cornell’s system rewarded something else, and by its rules she failed. She ran a lab there for ten years on her own federal grants and never received a tenure-track offer. Maryland made her a full professor in 1990 and she founded a program and won a fellowship and retired emerita, and none of that alters what happened in Ithaca. In the academic hero system, standing is a title conferred by an institution on a person, and a person without the title is a research associate for a decade.

She died on June 6, 2026. Nine days later her son published his account, which included the arithmetic of the grants and the papers she held by 1990, a concession that the earlier decision may have been reasonable, and a refusal of the later one. He named no chairman. He put Suzanne Bianchi beside her and named the category: faculty women who were never assistant professors.

He could not give her the title. He gave her the record.

Now take the word he lives by and hand it to other men.

Transparency, to a scholar in a study house on a Tuesday night, means something almost opposite to what it means in College Park. He is working a page that carries an argument between two rabbis dead nineteen hundred years, and the losing opinion is preserved with the loser’s name on it. His immortality runs through attribution. Ask him for the dataset and he will not understand the request; the tradition is the dataset, and it is a chain of persons.

To a reporter, transparency has a hole in the middle of it that is the point of the whole trade. He shows his readers everything except the one thing that would cost him his standing forever, which is the name of the man who told him. A colleague at the next desk says the editor wants the source. He says the editor can want. In his system the hero is the man who goes to jail rather than say it. Cohen came out of that trade. He worked the police calls at five in the morning and reviewed local bands on a weekly deadline and learned in that building that the sacred act is refusing to reveal. Then he moved into a system where refusing to reveal is the cardinal sin. The same man, the same word, opposite content.

To a surgeon in a morbidity and mortality conference on a Thursday morning, transparency is a sealed room. Inside it he will say out loud that he took the wrong approach and the patient died, and nobody will use it against him, and that is what makes the room work. Outside it he will not say a word, and the reason is not cowardice. A surgeon who has been broken in public develops a hand that hesitates, and a hesitating hand kills people. The chief tells the resident afterward that what happens in that room does not leave it, and the resident, who has read about accountability, thinks the chief is protecting himself, and the chief is protecting the next patient. He may also be protecting himself.

To a woman entering names in a family history center, transparency is a sacrament. She is looking for a great-great-grandmother in a parish register scanned from a village that no longer exists, and the reason the church spent decades filming registers and cut a vault into a granite mountain to hold the film is that the record makes reunion possible, and reunion is the thing that defeats death. Records are salvation infrastructure. Ask her whether the record should be open and she will say yes with more force than any open-science advocate, and mean something no open-science advocate means.

To a case officer, transparency is what you inflict on the other side. His own opacity is his virtue and his obligation. He has names in his head belonging to men who will be killed if the names are written down, and the greatest crime available to him is disclosure. He is inside a hero system where the immortality is the service and the service is invisible, and the men who did the most are the men nobody will ever hear about.

And to a novelist, the demand to show your working is a category mistake. What she is trying to make is the thing only she could have made. Replication is the definition of failure.

Five systems, five sacred meanings, no exchange rate. There are dozens more. Cohen’s usage makes sense only inside a system that has already decided what a man’s life is worth and how he can earn it, and that outside that system the same word buys nothing.

The competing systems that bear on him are the ones in his own discipline.

The ethnographic system runs on presence. What makes the work is that one person went and stayed and saw, for years, at cost, and came back with something no procedure could have produced. Its saint is Erving Goffman (1922–1982). Its currency is the singular observer, which is why the tradition transmits through named masters and their students. In that system, a book is heroic because only its author could have written it.

Cohen went at Alice Goffman’s survey with census arithmetic and asked how 217 homes on one block held 308 men between eighteen and thirty. It is a fair question and he was right to ask it. Inside the system he was asking it of, the request reads as a demand that she prove she was not lying, which is an assault on the form of heroism she was practicing. Her answer, that this was an ethnographic survey with its own sampling and its own definition of who belongs to a home, designed to reach people conventional surveys never find, is what that system says when asked to convert its currency.

The family-restoration system is the other collision. Brad Wilcox and the people around him work inside a hero system where the immortality on offer is children, marriage, lineage, and the continuity of a people across generations, which is the oldest such system there is and the only one most men in history have had access to. Cohen’s demography reads, from inside it, as an attack on the last durable thing available to an ordinary man. And Wilcox’s success sequence reads, from inside Cohen’s, as a promise dressed as a finding, unfalsifiable where it counts. They have been at this for a decade and neither has moved an inch, and the reason is not that either lacks data. Each is defending the currency of the other’s afterlife.

Then in the winter of 2025 something arrived that neither system had a price for.

The archive started receiving papers that satisfied every requirement Cohen’s program had spent ten years installing. Abstract present. Title matching contents. Citations to work. Complex statistical models, apparently competent, with tables and figures. Code in a public repository. And at the end, a disclosure listing every tool used to write the code, run the literature search, advise on the models, and draft the text, with the author’s assurance that he had chosen the question and the variables and verified every number, and an offer to submit to an audit on request.

The paper was dull, unoriginal, thin, and empty where it claimed a contribution. Everything auditable was in order.

This is what an immortality project looks like when it succeeds. Cohen had set out to build a literature that did not depend on any person, and the machines produced exactly that: claims with a perfect trail and nobody behind them. The author had been removed from the claim, which was the goal, and what came out the other end was writing that no one needed.

He turned it down, and then spent months in public working out why. He is not persuaded that using the tools is wrong. He thinks the training may be lawful. He grants that his own archive, handing out identifiers without peer review, is an inviting place for machines to deposit and to harvest. He will not enter a detection arms race he expects to lose. He says a disclosure rule he cannot verify is close to useless, since the chatbots read the rules too. And the policy his committee published in March 2026 refuses to promise a standard that can be written down, commits its moderators to judgment made by people using perception and experience, and states that they felt a need to insist on their humanity in the process.

Becker’s term for the thing a man cannot look at directly is the vital lie, and his claim was that a man discovers what he was defending at the moment it is taken from him. Cohen spent thirty years engineering the person out of the claim, in the belief that persons are the weak point, which they are, because they die. What he found at the end of the trail was a room full of documents in perfect order that no person had meant, and his response was to reach for the one thing his system had never issued a receipt for.

He is fifty-nine in August. He counts the dead for a living.

Sources and notes

Frame. Ernest Becker, The Denial of Death (Free Press, 1973), Pulitzer Prize for General Nonfiction, announced May 1974, two months after his death. Escape from Evil (Free Press, 1975) is the posthumous companion and the place where the argument about heroism producing evil is fullest. Biographical detail from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ernest_Becker: born September 27, 1924 in Springfield, Massachusetts; died March 6, 1974 in Burnaby, British Columbia, aged 49; the lost job at Upstate Medical College in Syracuse over the Szasz academic freedom dispute; the subsequent posts at Berkeley, San Francisco State, and Simon Fraser. The deathbed scene and the December 6, 1973 phone call are from Sam Keen’s foreword to the 1997 Free Press edition, which is readable in the scanned copy at https://ia803107.us.archive.org/11/items/thedenialofdeath/The%20Denial%20of%20Death.pdf. The Keen interview appeared in Psychology Today in April 1974.

Frame discipline. Becker only. Otto Rank stands behind the argument about the artist who submits to a larger design, and I left him out rather than open a second frame.

Cohen material. All linked in the earlier notes.

The Erving Goffman sentence. I say the ethnographic tradition transmits through named masters and that its greatest name belongs to Alice Goffman’s father (Erving Goffman, 1922–1982, ASA president-elect at his death).

Frame discipline. Becker only. Otto Rank stands behind the argument about the artist who submits to a larger design, and I left him out rather than open a second frame.

Cohen material. All linked in the earlier notes.

The Erving Goffman sentence. I say the ethnographic tradition transmits through named masters and that its greatest name belongs to Alice Goffman’s father (Erving Goffman, 1922–1982, ASA president-elect at his death). That is a claim about how the system authenticates, and I wrote it so it makes no claim about how she got her standing.

Invented dialogue. The five archetype vignettes carry the only dialogue in the essay, and every line of it is invented and spoken by an unnamed representative figure. No line of speech in this essay is attributed to a real named person unless it is sourced above.

Archetypes. Talmudic study partner, investigative reporter, surgeon at a morbidity and mortality conference, Latter-day Saints family history worker, intelligence case officer, plus a one-line novelist. None repeat the Rand essay’s set. The granite vault is the Granite Mountain Records Vault in Little Cottonwood Canyon, Utah. The M&M conference’s protected-discussion status varies by state statute and hospital policy, so I described the norm rather than the legal position.

Two claims that are mine. First, that verification is a death-denial technology because an impersonal claim outlives the person who made it, and that Cohen’s program therefore buys durability by spending down authorship. Becker’s immortality projects are almost always ego projects in his telling; the version where a man seeks the survival of the claim at the cost of his own name is an extension, and it needs Rank’s artist to make it fully respectable. Second, that the machine-written submission is the logical completion of that project rather than an accident that befell it.

There is a version of this essay that reads his mother’s distributed-control science as the template for a decentralized archive and treats the son as executing the mother’s picture of the nervous system. It is seductive and it is unfalsifiable, and the biography already notes that he has not drawn the line in print. I used her work here for a different purpose, as an example of impersonal survival, which is a claim about what happened to her findings rather than a claim about what happened in his head.

‘Philip N. Cohen: The End of Men Is Not True’ (Oct. 13, 2012)

Working off the YT transcript and running it through AI.

0:00 Thanks to the organizers; he notes that Hanna Rosin has already left and will have to catch it online.

0:29 Sets up the talk: partly about the book, partly about the same claims circulating outside it, with two general points and a lot of data.

1:03 First point: women are not dominant. He declines to run through the specific errors and distortions, says they are on his blog, and argues instead that the story is wrong at its foundation.

1:41 Why the baseline is worth establishing: the theory of how we supposedly arrived here treats women’s rise as continuous and inevitable, which he calls disempowering.

2:20 The claim that young women out-earn young men, which he says has reached meme status and is false.

2:33 Earnings by age across all full-time workers: close in the late twenties, and no reversal.

2:47 The underlying study compared full-time year-round, never-married, childless, metro-area workers aged 22 to 30.

3:15 His objection: that conditioning set is engineered to find the population with the least measurable labor market inequality.

3:35 Break the same group out by education and men earn more within every level; the pooled group is oddly composed, with many Latino men and many White women.

3:56 The rhetoric of fifty percent, which he distinguishes from a tipping point. A milestone is a round number. A tipping point is where a trend accelerates.

4:20 Managerial and professional occupations are majority female, but the category holds the 89 percent of nurses and 78 percent of elementary and middle school teachers who are women alongside engineering at 12 percent.

4:53 Managers alone are far more male; top executives are 26 percent female, inflated by people running small businesses.

5:07 Degrees. On Rosin’s line that women are beginning to crowd men out of science and engineering, he says beginning to means it has not happened.

5:31 Field composition among 25-to-39-year-olds runs from about 75 percent female in psychology to 20 percent in engineering.

5:56 Wives out-earning husbands sits around 28 percent of married couples, and can be pushed near 40 percent by restricting the base to employed or full-time women.

6:43 The full distribution rather than the fifty percent cutoff, 1970 to 2010. Couples where the wife earns nothing fall from 46 percent to 18.7. Couples where she earns everything rise from 0.6 percent to 2.3.

7:32 Newlyweds in the American Community Survey: 36 percent of college-graduate wives out-earn their husbands in the first year, 44 percent among African American women.

8:19 Rosin’s claim that sexual assault rates have fallen so far that criminologists cannot plot them.

8:38 He grants the decline is large and appears in both police reports and the National Crime Victimization Survey.

9:02 New Jersey has the lowest state rate of reported forcible rape at 11.2 per 100,000, which he says is more than twice the median for European countries.

9:36 Rosin’s reversal, that female power will bring more female violence.

9:54 The only rising series is arrests of female juveniles. Victimization data show female offenders down by about half in twelve years, and intimate partner homicide down sharply, with the steeper fall among male victims.

10:46 Alabama. He pauses on the claim that women dominate Alexander City and Auburn, and says he can say they do not without ever having been there.

10:58 The line the talk turns on: if the facts do not support the generalization, the anecdotes are not illustrations of a trend, they are little stories.

11:11 The first female mayor was elected eight years earlier, is a traditional southern Republican from a political family, is stepping down, and five men are running to replace her.

11:45 One woman on a six-member city council; fourteen of fifteen department heads male.

11:55 Against the trailer-park anecdote: 77 percent of men in their twenties in Alexander City are employed, against 53 percent of the women.

12:12 He interrupts himself to say he is not claiming the men are better, only describing a normal pattern.

12:24 Auburn. Council, mayor, and department heads; the within-couple income distribution close to the national one; women at about 70 percent of men’s earnings; men holding about 70 percent of management.

13:18 The velocity claim, that change is too fast to stop and will carry women past parity into dominance.

13:45 Rosin’s list of firsts she calls unthinkable twenty years earlier.

14:06 All of them had already happened, except an Ivy League president, and that was 1993. Marlene Sanders and Jessica Savitch anchoring; Shirley Chisholm and Pat Schroeder running; Roseanne Barr; Penny Marshall on her fourth feature by 1992; Maggie Lena Walker founding a bank in 1902.

14:29 His point: movement toward equality takes politics, social movements, and policy, and does not arrive on its own.

14:47 Women’s labor force participation flat since the late 1990s.

14:57 The pay gap narrowed sharply in the 1980s and early 1990s and has crawled since.

15:04 College-educated women are doing worse relative to college-educated men than they were twenty years earlier.

15:11 Occupational segregation: no progress in twenty years for women without degrees, modest progress for women with them.

15:23 Women entering management: large gains in the 1970s and 1980s, close to nothing since.

15:34 Conclusion. We should think harder about why we are stalled than about how far we have come.

15:56 What he finds wrong in the narrative is the implication that we can sit and watch women collect their gains.

16:03 Google Books mentions of feminism and feminist, both peaking in the 1990s.

16:12 Close: culture, politics, and policy, rather than waiting for technology to work its magic.

The method is complete at age forty-five. This is October 2012, three years before the Goffman comment, four before the archive, nine before he quits the association, and everything the later career runs on is already here: the receipts parked on the blog so the talk can make an argument, the attack on a conditioning set, the correction of a factual detail nobody bothered to check, the willingness to take apart a book whose politics his audience shares, and the flat prosecutorial delivery.

The best thing in the talk is the point about the conditioning set at 2:47. The statistic requires you to hold constant full-time work, year-round work, never having married, having no children, living in a metro area, and being between 22 and 30. His objection is that the controls are the finding. If the gap disappears only after you remove marriage, children, part-time work, and everywhere that is not a city, then marriage, children, part-time work, and geography are the gap. That is the same move he later runs against the success sequence, and it generalizes past gender to any argument that produces equality by subtraction.

The distinction at 3:56. Fifty percent is a round number in base ten and nothing happens at it. A tipping point is a claim about acceleration and has to be shown. Most trend journalism converts the first into the second without noticing, and the conversion is invisible because the arithmetic looks like evidence.

The line at 10:58 is the one to quote. If the facts do not support the generalization, the anecdotes are not illustrations of a trend. It is the clearest statement I have seen of the quarrel between reported texture and aggregate measurement. Rosin was not claiming that Alexander City has a female-majority council. She was reporting a felt reversal of standing inside particular homes among particular men, and Cohen answers with employment rates and department heads. He is right that the aggregates do not show dominance and she is right that aggregates are not what she went to see. The boast at 10:46, that he can say it never having been there, is the whole epistemology in one clause, and it is the same claim that made the ethnographers furious three years later.

The mayor correction at 11:11 is his strongest hit and the model of what he does better than anyone. The claim that a town got its first female mayor that year was checkable in five minutes, was wrong by eight years, and had survived whatever fact-checking the book received because it sounded like the thing being argued. The 14:06 list is the same weapon aimed at chronology: every item presented as unthinkable twenty years earlier had already happened, some of them long before. Trend writing runs on an assertion of novelty and the assertion is the least examined sentence in the genre.

The stall thesis is the part that has aged best. Convergence in pay, segregation, management, and participation happened in the 1970s and 1980s and mostly stopped, and he said so in 2012 and has been broadly right since. It also carries the politics, and he states the link at 14:29: automatic progress requires no movement, and stalled progress requires one.

Two weak spots he would not tolerate in anyone else.

The New Jersey comparison at 9:02 does not work. Cross-national counts of reported rape are shaped by legal definitions and reporting propensity more than by incidence, which is why Sweden looks like a catastrophe and why the countries with the lowest reported rates are often the worst places to be a woman. He built his career on the principle that you check whether the instrument changed before you compare, and he skipped it here for a debating point against a rhetorical flourish. He had already conceded the substantive claim at 8:38.

The Google Books slide at 16:03 is worse. Frequency of the words feminism and feminist in a corpus of published books is a fact about publishing and about corpus composition, and he uses it as a proxy for the vitality of a political movement, with no adjustment and no discussion of what the corpus contains. It is the move he spent the previous fifteen minutes taking apart. It is also the last slide, which is where a speaker reaches for the thing that feels true.

One detail Tom Wolfe would have led with. This is a law review symposium at Boston University, the format is adversarial by design, the subject of the prosecution left before the prosecution began, and Cohen opens by pointing at the empty chair and joking about it. He is the expert witness in a proceeding with no defendant present, which is a fair description of most of his public career, and the joke suggests he knows it.

‘Philip Cohen addresses National Academies on “Against the Generations”‘ (July 30, 2019)

0:06 Opens by thanking the organizers, notes he is the last speaker before lunch and will try to be brief and lively.

0:30 Says the committee’s remit gave him the chance to make a pitch that has been gnawing at him for four years.

0:57 The complaint: generation talk encourages broad generalization, stereotyping, clickbait, character judgment, and echo-chamber thinking. He will illustrate with family demography and the recession.

1:30 The Pew Research Center’s generation scheme, which he calls the leading purveyor of these memes.

1:43 First objection: these are cohorts rather than generations, the categories are irregular, and the boundaries have no justification. Making the last two spans fifteen years each avoids people sharing a generation with their own children, and families skip generations anyway.

2:13 His own family has no baby boomers; his brother was born in late 1964.

2:32 Once you name them and assign characters, you impose qualities on populations with no basis, and it snowballs into confirmation-bias clickbait that nobody assesses.

3:02 He acknowledges the incentive problem. Abandoning terms that generate millions of clicks would be brave and admirable.

3:24 The 2015 Pew survey that gave people a lineup of generation names and asked which they belonged to. Only 40 percent of Millennials picked Millennial, and respondents could select more than one.

3:53 Uptake was low except among boomers, and the response was not self-reflection. He points out that if racial categories produced this, social science would treat it as a problem for the theory.

4:29 A disclaimer he repeats: he admires Pew, uses their material constantly, including in this talk, and thinks they should get more money. The trouble is an addiction they have to sell.

4:45 Pew’s announcement moving the millennial endpoint back to 1996 and naming Generation Z. On their line that cut points are not an exact science: they are not a science at all, and there is no question they are trying to answer.

5:22 On their claim that the boundaries are not arbitrary: they are completely arbitrary, and there is no agreed formula for the span.

5:42 The baby boom is the only cohort officially designated by the Census Bureau, and it is a demographic event that produced a cohort rather than a generation.

6:06 When Pew shortened the millennial span it generated stories treating the arrival of more Millennials than Gen Xers as news, when the span had simply had more years in it.

6:30 The census work: a birth rate spike in 1946 holding above that level through 1964, the only prolonged rise to a stable high level of fertility in the record, breaking the long-run trend.

7:08 The accident that started everything. The event happened to last roughly the length of an actual generation, which put the culture on a treadmill of naming them. Had the boom run eleven years instead of nineteen, he does not think the conversation would exist.

7:33 He realizes he never checked the clock.

7:45 The celebrity slide. The Silent Generation runs from Noam Chomsky to Debbie Harry. Donald Trump and Keanu Reeves are in the same generation.

8:09 The line between X and Millennial separates Venus and Serena Williams, sisters one year apart. He says the Gen X is all over Venus, you cannot miss it, this is like astrology, and Serena is a pure millennial.

8:43 Age-specific fertility rates from the American Community Survey, 2001 to 2017, by birth cohort, with dots marking where each cohort stood in 2010.

9:13 Women born in the early 1970s hit 2010 in their late thirties with their path already written. Late 1970s cohort, same.

9:37 The early 1980s cohort, the first Millennials, were at peak fertility when 2010 arrived, and fertility declined after.

9:52 The late 1980s cohort saw fertility fall from ages 23 to 24 to 25, which he calls extremely unheard of, then rebound into their early thirties, possibly close to catching up on completed fertility.

10:33 The youngest group hit 2010 as teenagers, and their curve rotated clockwise, falling off faster than earlier cohorts, with signs of a post-recession rebound.

11:09 The point: all three of those lines are Millennials, and collapsing them loses the entire story.

11:16 He notes his five-year groupings are arbitrary too. Use one-year or ten-year groups, or groups chosen for a reason.

11:28 Male employment rates by single year of birth from the Current Population Survey.

11:42 Men born in 1982: about 47 percent employed at eighteen, rising to their mid-twenties, then falling as the recession hit them in their late twenties, which he calls ordinary recession behavior.

12:01 Men born in 1987: a scarring event, with employment rates flat from 21 to 23.

12:18 Men born in 1992: 2010 hit at eighteen, and a twenty-point difference in employment at that age against the earlier cohort. All three are Millennials.

12:44 Marriage. Propensity to marry before thirty, controlling for age and sex.

13:00 The decline between people born in 1945 and 1965 is enormous, and both are baby boomers, so the group does not hold together on this measure.

13:20 The question science should be asking: when do we want to group people, and how.

13:29 First positive suggestion: ask whether the question is a cohort question at all.

13:41 On “kids these days,” a thing you could say at any point in history. General Social Survey data showing the under-35 share identifying as liberal is consistently higher.

14:09 If you are using a cross-section, you are describing right now, and labeling those people Millennials adds only the baggage.

14:26 Second suggestion: if you want cohorts, break them into five or ten year groups sized to your sample and eyeball it first.

14:34 Attitudes toward easier divorce, adjusted for age, sex, and education, by the four standard generations, then by decade of birth.

15:01 The decade version shows what the standard grouping hides. Late Millennials are markedly more pro-divorce than early Millennials, and the silent-to-boomer shift happens earlier than expected.

15:19 Naming advice: describing people as born in the eighties or nineties is fine. Calling them the tennis generation or the butterscotch generation assigns a character with no basis.

15:41 Third suggestion: cohort analysis is important where events at a point in the life course have lasting consequences.

15:56 Examples. Children of the Great Depression as the classic. Digital natives, if you study education.

16:14 The story about his daughter texting to ask what her phone number was, and the other daughter’s ruling that if it can send email it is a phone.

16:38 Post-9/11 schooling for security research; leaving school in a recession for labor economics; and, for politics and culture, the high school students shaped by the Parkland moment.

17:07 The close: none of those experiences supports assembling one thing, calling it a generation, and having it make logical sense. He urges the committee not to use the labels at all.

17:39 First question, from John: is there systematic research showing that generation language promotes stereotyping and bad social outcomes?

18:02 His answer: he knows of none. Most sociologists do not use these as real categories in the research, only in the discussion section when making findings seem relevant. He suggests experimental psychology could test what the labels evoke.

18:39 Second question: if Pew hired you, what would you tell them to do other than stop?

19:00 His answer: do not give up cohort analysis. Use decade cohorts and routinize them; the labels exist, the intervals are regular, and they already carry cultural salience. He is not telling Pew to delete their account after a thousand reports.

19:37 His own practice: a script that breaks age into decades and years into decades as a first pass at trends before looking finer.

20:07 A committee member’s comment: cohort and age questions apply universally across the social sciences in a way most topics do not.

20:58 Third question, from Dana, on the great-and-terrible framing: pushing him toward what is redeeming in generational analysis, and noting that many people think astrology has scientific underpinnings.

21:47 His reply that astrology has no scientific value, followed by the crack about a selected expert audience.

22:01 The substantive answer: cohort analysis and the life course perspective are important. Job changes, health insurance at a given age, school crowding, the racial composition of a childhood neighborhood. He wants to see the shadow of events across lives at the cultural level.

22:40 A concession. The millennial idea was that these people came of age in a new era around 2000, which he calls a powerful way of thinking and an opportunity to apply social science.

23:02 He is not discouraging cohort thinking, he wants to improve it, and he acknowledges an institutional juggernaut built around the concepts.

23:34 A return to the Pew survey: if you live in a world where everyone knows what Millennials are, that may indicate you are not interacting with most people.

24:01 The closing self-assessment: this is not his most important work. Understanding demographic change, how it relates to inequality, and communicating it so people can make smarter decisions is his most important work, and he counts this as part of that.

This is the campaign two years before the open letter, delivered to the body most likely to act on it, and it works. He got Pew’s policy change in 2023 and this is where you can watch him earn it: no accusation of bad faith, praise for the target three separate times, a concrete alternative offered under questioning, and a closing line that ranks his own complaint below his real work.

Compare it with the Rosin talk seven years earlier and the difference is the target’s status. Both talks run on the same two moves. First, take a category and show that the things inside it behave differently, which is the argument at 9:13 through 12:44 and the argument about the 22-to-30 conditioning set in 2012. Second, check a claim that nobody checked because it sounded right, which is the Pew self-identification survey here and the Alexander City mayor there. What changed is that in 2012 he was correcting a journalist and in 2019 he is advising a National Academies committee, and the register adjusts without the argument changing at all.

The strongest passage is 6:30 to 7:33 and it is the part nobody quotes. The baby boom is a real demographic event with a documented spike, a documented plateau, and a break in the long-run trend, and the Census Bureau designated it for that reason. Everything downstream is imitation of a thing that happened once. And then the historical accident: the event lasted about as long as a human generation, which licensed the treadmill. Had it run eleven years, he says, there would be no Generation X, no Millennials, no Z. That is a claim about how a measurement artifact became a cultural ontology, and it is the most original thing in either talk.

The Venus and Serena slide is doing more work than the joke suggests. Sisters born a year apart, raised in the same house by the same parents on the same courts, sorted into different generations by a boundary somebody chose. It is a within-family control. He throws it away as comedy at 8:09, which is a habit of his: the sharpest evidence gets delivered as a laugh line.

He concedes the key empirical question at 18:02 and nobody notices. Asked whether there is research showing generation labels cause stereotyping or harm, he says he knows of none. The talk’s opening claim, at 0:57, is that the labels drive stereotyping and character judgment. Under questioning he admits that is an intuition. It is a reasonable intuition and it may be right, and it is unverified, and this is the man who spends his December afternoons counting whether other people’s claims can be checked. He does the honest thing and answers straight, and the honest answer undercuts his own frame.

The astrology answer at 21:47 is the misfire. The questioner was making a subtle point, that a scheme with no scientific basis can still organize how people understand themselves and each other, which is an argument that generation labels might be socially real even if demographically empty. He hears it as a claim that astrology is scientific, corrects her, gets a laugh from the room, and only reaches the substance after the moment has passed. The correction was directed at something she did not say.

And the concession at 22:40 is the largest one he has ever made in public on this subject. The millennial idea, that a cohort coming of age around 2000 encountered something new, is called a powerful way of thinking and a good opportunity for social science. That is close to the thing he spent seventeen minutes urging them to abandon, and it means his position is narrower than the title. He objects to the naming, the character assignment, and the arbitrary cut points, and not to the underlying thought.

The distinction between a demographic event and a generation, with the eleven-years counterfactual, is portable and nobody has credited him with it. And the decade-cohort script he mentions at 19:37, the thing he runs before looking at any trend, is a small biographical detail that shows the habit underneath the arguments.

Transcript flags. At 4:29 “picking up Hewitt” is picking on Pew. At 4:50 “296” is 1996. At 5:12 “your medicines are talking their story ins” is a mangling, probably epidemiologists and historians. At 8:23 “Generation Next” is Generation X, and “Carrie” should be career or possibly aura. At 13:00 “married by age three” is thirty. At 14:43 “general any ‘el” is Generation X and Millennial. At 15:27 “quartzion” is cohorts. At 19:21 “cultural violence” is cultural salience. At 22:53 “melayu” is Millennials. At 24:27 “dr. otter” and “dr. Capelli” are the remote panelists, and Peter Cappelli is the likely spelling.

‘Philip N. Cohen COVID lecture April 3 2020’

0:00 Opens by greeting his social problems class, says he has been missing them, and notes it has been a month since he first opened the class to discuss the then-emerging epidemic.

0:23 Sets the plan: where we are, how we got here, where we are going, then discussion.

0:48 Records this on the afternoon of April 3, 2020.

1:07 Structure: global trajectory, US trajectory, and what comes next.

1:14 The disclaimer he returns to twice more. He is not an expert on pandemics or global public health. He is a social scientist who can understand what he reads, and a teacher.

1:36 Etymology of pandemic, from the Greek for all and people.

1:44 The World Health Organization declared a pandemic on March 11.

2:11 Coronaviruses affect humans and other species, ranging from common colds to serious disease. The novel virus was found in Wuhan late in 2019; the disease is COVID-19.

3:02 Why this one is bad. No human immunity.

3:18 Highly contagious, and he says twice that we do not know exactly how it spreads.

3:34 Asymptomatic transmission, which defeats the strategy of avoiding people who look sick.

3:58 Relatively high mortality. Most people survive and most cases are mild, and the rate is higher than seasonal flu. He says we do not know the rate, that it depends on how much medical care you get, and that it is maybe around one percent.

4:31 Confirmed cases worldwide, probably reaching a million as of the day before, with 80,000 new cases reported yesterday. Exponential increase.

5:11 The global map. Spread followed travel from China to Europe and the United States, with an Iranian outbreak from a cluster of travelers.

5:42 Countries without rigorous testing are unknowns, so low counts in Kenya or Zambia say nothing about incidence.

5:59 Droplet transmission and the origin of the six-foot rule, which comes from how far droplets travel when you cough.

6:16 Asymptomatic spread, plus strengthening evidence of aerosolized droplets that may linger in air, and cases where no liquid droplets appear to have been exchanged.

6:51 Current recommendations: six feet, hand washing. And a forecast, on April 3, that a cloth mask recommendation is coming to protect others from what you may be expelling before you have symptoms.

7:23 The section on what the Trump administration got wrong before the outbreak. First, a general orientation against effective government, expressed in CDC cuts from just under eight billion in 2018 to just over seven in 2019, with a proposed budget near six and a half.

8:11 The pandemic preparedness office in the National Security Council eliminated in a reorganization, and a Center for Strategic and International Studies report from the previous fall noting it remained unclear who would be in charge in a cross-border biological crisis.

9:02 The 2019 federal pandemic exercise, run on a novel influenza scenario, which found the government unprepared and produced recommendations that were ignored.

9:40 Trump’s claim that nobody could have seen this coming. Cohen calls it a total lie, then adds that Trump did not know because he does not know a lot, while people who paid attention did.

10:05 The happy talk section, and Trump’s position that one or two hundred thousand deaths would count as total victory.

10:43 A montage of Trump clips: he always knew it was a pandemic, it is totally under control, one person from China, fifteen cases going down to close to zero, it will disappear like a miracle.

12:46 His verdict on the clips: none of it was true, and the messaging existed to make Trump feel he was doing a good job, which sent the public a signal that this was not serious.

13:09 Operational failures. Testing first. Without it you cannot count cases.

13:25 The standard first-line response: isolate, contact trace, quarantine contacts.

13:57 The CDC’s first test did not work, and the country did not adopt the World Health Organization test that might have permitted faster testing at scale.

14:13 Community spread arrived before anyone could trace it, with cases of unknown origin.

14:22 Containment failures: no restriction on movement between affected and unaffected areas, or within towns, schools, nursing homes, and malls.

14:46 No uniform system for stay-at-home orders. Most places now have rules or strong guidance, not everywhere, and all of it too slow.

15:19 Supply failures. Personal protective equipment, and the fact that it has to be changed constantly.

15:44 Ventilators, and the shortage of both machines and people to operate them. The federal stockpile was insufficient, some units did not work, and distribution was poor.

16:09 His central policy criticism: too much left to the market and to the producing companies rather than the federal government seizing control of production and distribution.

16:42 The log-scale doubling chart, days since a country’s tenth death against deaths, each gridline a doubling, a straight diagonal meaning exponential growth.

17:22 South Korea at about 37 days sits between 128 and 256 deaths. Spain at 24 days is near 10,000. Italy, France, and recent outbreaks in Brazil and Canada at 13 or 14 days follow the same course.

18:03 The United States slope is steeper than the others, which he calls the disturbing part.

18:11 A qualification that improves the analysis. The country is large enough that it is more like Europe, a set of separate outbreaks rather than one.

18:28 The same chart by state. New York on Spain’s path, Washington the best at 29 days and under 256 deaths, Michigan, New Jersey, and Louisiana rising dangerously.

19:11 What a straight line means, and what bending looks like. Spain and Italy show early curvature if the numbers are accurate, and he notes the fuzziness.

19:36 China is left off because it would break the graph.

19:53 Flattening the curve. The red distribution shows unmitigated spread piling up cases past the health system’s capacity.

20:23 The logic of closing schools, restaurants, and bars: slow the rate so the sick arrive at a hospital that can take them.

20:54 Even without a vaccine, slowing infection reduces total damage.

21:11 Back to the state chart, with an explanation of the variation. Washington’s first outbreak was largely confined to a nursing home, and the state closed and distanced early, producing a shallower slope. California similar. New York and Michigan did too little early and got explosive outbreaks.

22:19 The window argument: most of the country does not have a bad outbreak yet and can still change its slope.

22:36 What happens next. People arriving at hospitals now were infected ten days to two weeks ago, six to eight days to symptoms and another five to seven to hospitalization, so today’s admissions date to roughly when schools closed.

22:59 Spread continues because nothing stops you driving from New York to Missouri.

23:15 His prediction: many thousands of Americans will die and that is inevitable at this point, with no break in the slope visible.

23:35 How bad it gets over months remains open, and mortality is not a fixed biological rate. It depends on diagnosis, hospital resources, and staffing.

24:10 The Javits Center temporary hospital, and his forecast of more converted convention centers.

24:27 When it ends. Absent a vaccine, nobody is immune, so tamping the numbers down may let people out with waves of local outbreaks and repeated shutdowns.

25:00 The exit condition: few enough cases plus testing and tracing capacity, then normal life with distancing and rapid isolation when someone gets sick.

25:30 Global spread means travel restrictions and quarantine requirements will last much longer than domestic measures.

25:54 Vaccines. A best case around eighteen months, then testing for safety and efficacy, then production and distribution of billions of doses.

26:18 No treatment yet; patients fight it with their own immune systems, and treatment research is underway.

26:34 What this means for students, prefaced by another disclaimer: this is not his expertise, he cares about them, and he is not the person to give personal advice.

26:50 Follow real public health advice. Do not listen to the president or the politicians in his orbit. Listen to your governor, local public health officials, and the CDC.

27:14 It is not only about you but about whom you might affect.

27:21 Take care of yourselves mentally and physically, and do not let physical distance become total social distance.

27:37 Helping others, with time or money or online, can be empowering.

27:52 The close. The world will be different, think about who you want to be in it, and humanity has gotten through bad things before.

This is the only recording in my file so far where Cohen is not prosecuting anybody’s arithmetic.

Watch what he does with uncertainty here. Inside twenty-five minutes he says we do not know exactly how it spreads, we do not know the mortality rate, we do not know how many are infected in countries without testing, we do not know how many will die, we do not know how long it takes, the numbers have fuzziness in them, and China would break the graph so he left it out. That is a man narrating the limits of his evidence in real time to nineteen-year-olds. The audits and the Rosin talk and the Pew talk all run on the opposite posture, certainty about a number somebody else got wrong. The pedagogical setting produces the epistemics his critics say he lacks, which suggests the register is a choice about audience rather than a feature of the man.

The disclaimer at 1:14 is the thesis of Citizen Scholar five years before the book. He tells them he is not an epidemiologist, that he is a social scientist who reads well, and that he is a teacher. He is claiming authority to synthesize while disclaiming authority to know, and then he spends twenty minutes doing exactly what he claimed. That is the role boundary the book argues about, drawn in public, at the moment it was hardest to draw, when a professor with a microphone and frightened students could have taken the larger authority for free.

Then he takes a different one. At 9:40 the lecture turns and stays turned. Ignored warnings, a total lie, the montage, the verdict that the messaging existed to make the president feel good about himself, and at 26:50 a direct instruction to his enrolled students not to listen to the president. He would say the roles are separable and the sourcing supports every claim, and the sourcing does. His own book says the trouble starts when academic authority carries a man from one role into another without the audience noticing the crossing. Here he crosses in front of a captive audience holding his grade book, in the same voice he used for the doubling chart. He announces the crossing at 26:43 by saying this is not his expertise, which is the disclosure his method requires and which does nothing about the power differential. Someone should ask him about it.

He was right about the things his training equipped him to judge and less reliable on the rest. The market-versus-federal-direction argument at 16:09 is his own field and is a live policy dispute he states as settled. The eighteen-month vaccine best case at 25:54 was the consensus and turned out pessimistic, and the reason it was wrong sits outside a demographer’s competence. The forecasts he got right are the ones that follow from arithmetic he could do: exponential slopes do not break on their own, hospital admissions lag infection by two weeks, tamping down produces waves rather than an ending, travel restrictions outlast domestic ones, and thousands would die. The one he got right by a day or two is the mask recommendation at 6:51; the CDC issued it that same day.

Two moves.

At 18:11 he corrects his own chart while presenting it. The American slope looks worse than Europe’s until you notice the country is the size of Europe and holds several separate outbreaks, so the aggregate curve is an artifact of the unit. That is the same objection he makes to generation labels and to the success sequence: the category is doing work the data are not. He applies it to his own slide, unprompted, in front of students who would never have caught it.

And 22:36, the lag argument, is the finest teaching in the video. Today’s hospital is a photograph of two weeks ago. Everything you can see is already history and everything you do today shows up in two weeks. That is a demographer’s habit of mind, the same one behind checking his divorce prediction against data that arrive years later, and it is the single most useful thing an ordinary person could have learned in April 2020.

This belongs in the biography as the missing 2020 entry. Every other document has him fighting somebody. This one has him teaching, and the teaching is patient, careful about what it does not know, and warm at the end in a way the blog never is. The essay currently derives his character from the news desk clock and the audit tables. This is the third setting, and it is the one where the students are, which is where most of a professor’s life happens. Two lines at 27:21 and 27:52, about not letting physical distance become social distance and about deciding who you want to be afterward, are the only places in anything I have read by him where he speaks to a person’s wellbeing rather than to the record.

Transcript flags. “philip gon” at 0:00 is Cohen. “COBIT 19” and “Kovach 19” are COVID-19. “pandemics rent” at 8:37 is pandemic event or similar. “first actor” at 21:37 is first outbreak. “organ bed” at 14:56 is garbled, likely congregating. “an S case scenario” at 26:02 is a best case scenario. “how many people really happen in Kenya” at 5:42 is have it. The chapter titles (“WHAT TRUMP DID WRONG: CUT CDC FUNDING”) are his own.

‘Family violence and abuse in COVID context lecture’ (Apr. 6, 2020)

0:00 Announces a short video lecture on family violence and abuse and the implications of the pandemic.

0:18 Context for why now: he has been revising the violence chapter of his textbook, due out in about half a year.

0:45 The headlines he is responding to, that home is not always safe and that lockdowns are associated with rising domestic violence around the world.

0:59 His first move, and the lecture’s governing posture: we do not have the information to draw those conclusions yet, but we know enough to raise questions and think the issues through.

1:15 Historical backdrop. Violent victimization of people aged 12 to 17 by family members, from the National Crime Victimization Survey, falling from about 14 per thousand to just over two.

2:00 Why it declined, prefaced by a warning that attributing violence trends to particular social changes is speculative.

2:29 Three candidate causes. Shelters and hotlines that provide distance from abusive partners.

2:47 Women’s rising education, employment, and the cultural acceptance of independence and single parenthood, which make leaving easier both structurally and in terms of values.

3:10 The decline in marriage and cohabitation, which reduces exposure to the main risk factor, presence of a spouse or partner.

3:28 Lifetime prevalence. Something over a quarter of both men and women report violence in a relationship, and the gender disparity widens sharply for severe physical violence, contact sexual violence, and stalking.

4:18 Defining the sphere. Family violence means caring or intimate relationships, with partners, children, and elders.

4:48 The structural claim. Secrecy and isolation are made possible by how families are built, literally by the walls and figuratively by the sphere of privacy people value highly, which is the same privacy that makes the problem hard to reach.

5:22 The framing he says he always reinforces: this is not about bad apples, it is a structural feature of family life, which does not mean everyone experiences it and does mean we should ask what our institutions do to enable and reproduce it.

6:04 Child abuse and neglect defined as an act or failure to act by a parent or caretaker resulting in or risking physical or emotional harm, sexual abuse, or exploitation.

6:32 The perpetrator chart, overwhelmingly parents and family members.

6:52 Two glosses. Neglect is definitionally a failure of whoever holds responsibility. The high figure for mothers reflects that many children live with their mothers only.

7:12 Risk factors: parental mental health and impulse control, any history of violence including as a victim, violence between adults in the home.

7:49 Poverty, which raises risk partly through material deprivation and partly through whatever produced the poverty.

8:14 Weak support networks, and the importance of having people around who notice and can intervene.

8:38 A clip from a Cleveland television station on advocates’ concerns, including the governor’s worry about children not seen by anyone outside the family, a center CEO reporting steady calls and heightened fear, and a closing line about checking in on each other.

10:52 The pandemic’s implications, opening with a swipe at the genre of first-world-problems content, the boredom and the same shows and the boring food, which does not tell you the story of families where things are going badly.

11:28 Economic shock. Roughly ten million new unemployment claims in recent weeks as of April 6.

11:45 Isolation from support networks, since family and friends are also sheltering. Who checks in, who notices, who helps, where does somebody escape to.

12:16 Services may be unavailable, government and nonprofit alike, for lack of staff and resources.

12:42 Mandatory reporters. Teachers, clergy, and in some states health care providers are the points where the outside world can reach into a family, and those interactions have been cut.

13:08 His caution again. All of this is theoretical; there is no evidence yet, and reason for concern.

13:23 Intimate partner violence against adults, down from about 16 per thousand women in the mid-1990s to about four, roughly a three-quarters reduction, with a decline for men from a much lower base.

14:04 Homicide, which the survey cannot capture because you have to be alive to answer it. In 2018, a little over a thousand women killed by intimate partners against about 360 men, with male homicide concentrated among associates and strangers.

14:47 The counterintuitive prediction. Lockdown may reduce male homicide more than female homicide, because it removes exposure to acquaintances and rivals while increasing time spent with partners.

15:15 The typology. Situational couple violence, arising from specific disputes without a pattern of escalation, triggered by stress and economic shocks, which is why he expects more of it now.

15:50 Coercive controlling violence, formerly called intimate terrorism, a campaign for control and domination with an escalating pattern.

16:12 Why the pandemic worries him more here. Escaping this pattern usually requires outside support, and isolation removes it.

16:36 The specific route: decisions about who goes out and when, and the negotiation of rules for mobility, feed into controlling behavior.

17:05 Slightly less than half of intimate partner violence is ever reported to police.

17:18 Reasons given for not reporting. Fear of reprisal or of getting the offender in trouble is the most common, covering both punishment for reporting and loss of the family’s economic support. Handling it personally is about 20 percent. Third is lack of faith in police.

17:58 Whether this changes under lockdown he calls speculation.

18:14 Rape and sexual assault. About two thirds by acquaintances and intimate partners, about 24 percent by strangers.

18:59 The two directions the pandemic pushes. More isolation with partners raises one risk while less circulation lowers the other, and the net is unknown.

19:24 Interventions, introduced as things there is reason to believe may help or that many people think are good and are trying.

19:41 Rapid assessment checklists for police at the scene, formalizing judgments about severity and escalation and routing victims toward services and escape planning.

20:13 Civil protection orders, with some success.

20:25 Court-mandated psychological treatment, with a mixed record.

20:35 Specialized family violence courts with judges who develop expertise, again mixed.

20:55 Victim services broadly, including escape planning, assessment, and counseling.

21:16 The forward question. Given a quarter century of decline, what does the present crisis imply.

21:36 The modernity argument. First, the construction of childhood as a protected period of innocence recognized by families, institutions, and the state.

22:19 Second, the rise of state power. Outsourcing dispute resolution to formal authority may reduce interpersonal violence, while raising its own questions about surveillance and oppression.

22:53 Third, the Pinker argument that the rise of reason as an ideal reduces violence because you have to justify what you do.

23:19 The momentum claim: childhood exposure predicts adult violence, so a generation raised with less of it may pass less of it on.

23:42 The unsettling. Two months ago he would have named climate change or Trump; now the pandemic raises the question of whether history has a direction at all, and big crises unsettle any narrative they do not fit.

24:16 The close. He has no answer for most of what he raised, and hopes the context and the background statistics will let students work out what is happening.

On April 3 he played a montage of presidential clips, called a public statement a total lie, and told enrolled students not to listen to the president. On April 6, on a subject where the political temperature is comparable and the policy stakes are immediate, there is nothing. The word Trump appears once, at 23:48, inside a subordinate clause listing the kinds of events that unsettle a story about progress. The rest is data, definitions, a typology, and seven separate admissions that he does not know.

The lecture where he editorialized was the one outside his competence. The lecture where he taught was the one inside it. Whatever governs his register, it is not confidence in the material. My guess, and it is a guess, is that the pandemic lecture had a villain available and this one does not, or has one he is unwilling to name in front of undergraduates whose homes he knows nothing about.

The epistemic discipline here is the best in anything of his I have read. He opens with the headline, tells them the headline cannot yet be confirmed, and then spends twenty minutes explaining what would have to be true for it to be right. He flags speculation at 2:19, at 13:08, at 17:58, at 18:59, at 21:30, and at 24:16. That is a professor teaching students how to hold a live question open, in April 2020, when every incentive ran toward certainty.

Two things in it have aged well and one has not.

The measurement point at 12:42 is the one that mattered most and the one nobody outside the field made in public that spring. Teachers, clergy, and clinicians are the layer through which the state sees inside a family, and closing schools removed it. Which means a fall in reported child maltreatment in 2020 would measure the removal of the observers rather than a change in the thing observed. Reports did fall. Anyone reading those numbers without his warning would have drawn the opposite conclusion from the correct one, and the subsequent literature on intimate partner violence has been a mess for the same reason, with calls to police and hospital presentations and hotline volume moving in different directions because each measures a different mixture of incidence and access.

The structural claim at 4:48. The privacy that makes a home a refuge is the same privacy that makes it unreachable, and people value it most when things are going well. That is the argument of his textbook and the subtitle of his essay collection compressed into thirty seconds, and it is the reason he can teach this subject without moralizing: nobody has to be a monster for the structure to produce the outcome.

The prediction at 14:47 is the falsifiable one and it looks wrong. He reasoned from exposure structure: male homicide victims are killed by acquaintances and rivals, so lockdown should cut male homicide more than female homicide. American homicide rose sharply in 2020, by roughly a third, the largest single-year increase on record, and the increase was concentrated in exactly the non-intimate gun homicide his exposure logic predicted would fall. He modeled a pandemic as a reduction in interaction, and 2020 turned out to be a reduction in some interactions and a collapse in others, including in policing and in the institutions that suppress street violence. The exposure model was too clean for the year.

Three weaknesses, stated the way he would state them about somebody else.

The mother figure at 6:32 gets a chart and a single sentence of explanation, that many children live only with their mothers. That is a real explanation and an incomplete one. Exposure time, the poverty of single-parent homes, and neglect definitions that by construction fall on the primary caregiver all belong in the answer. He knows all of this. He is presenting a number that gets used badly and giving it a nine-word gloss, which is close to the thing he spends his blog objecting to.

The interventions section is his weakest four minutes anywhere. Some promise, some success, rather mixed, mixed results, and an introduction that says many people think these are good so they are trying them. No citations, no effect sizes, no discussion of what the evaluations actually found. Set that beside the ferocity he brings to counting whether a journal article shipped its code and the asymmetry is hard to miss. The standard he applies to other people’s claims about marriage promotion is not the standard he applies to his own summary of what works against family violence.

And he leaves the sharpest tension in the field lying on the floor. At 17:18 he reports that the most common reason women give for not calling police is fear of what calling will cost them, either reprisal or the loss of the household’s income, with distrust of police third. At 19:41 he recommends a set of interventions that mostly route through police and courts. Those two slides are four minutes apart and he never puts them together. A student who noticed would have asked the best question of the semester.

This is the textbook being written in public. He says at 0:18 that he was revising the violence chapter, which makes the lecture a draft of the third edition delivered live, and that is a detail for the biography that otherwise treats the textbook as a finished object.

Transcript flags. Every variant of koban, kovat, Cova, köppen, and Coppa is COVID. At 0:28 “should be halved in half year” is should be out in half a year. At 8:16 “as important networks” is and support networks. At 15:26 “vance” is violence. At 18:11 “not mr. speculation” is that is just speculation. At 21:16 “if we had to speak decline” is we have had this steep decline. At 21:57 “a life of that pain” is a life without pain. At 23:33 “West violence” is less violence. At 23:54 “just history really have a direction” is does history really have a direction. At 6:39 “pare” is parents.

‘Health Disparities and the COVID-19 Pandemic (old version)’ (Apr. 20, 2020)

0:00 Introduces himself, the subject, and the plan: define health disparities, connect them to the pandemic, and let students take it further. Gives his contact information and invites students to get in touch.

0:24 The CDC definition he says he likes: preventable differences in the burden of disease, injury, violence, or opportunities to achieve optimal health, experienced by socially disadvantaged populations.

1:06 Examples from the news, including a nursing home death, junk food, the effect of federal policy on opioid deaths, maternal mortality, and preventable cancers in Alabama.

1:57 The framework, the theory of fundamental causes, which he says sounds larger than it is. It concerns the relationship between socioeconomic status and health outcomes, and asks why general inequality stays so persistently attached to inequality in illness and death.

2:24 The improving baseline: water and sewer systems, nutrition, refrigeration and canning, medical advances, and rising education that lets people absorb health information.

3:00 Life expectancy in the United States rising from a little under 50 to almost 79 across about 120 years, with the caveat that the figure assumes nothing changes.

3:36 The theory’s answer. Income and education bring money, knowledge, prestige, power, and beneficial social connections, and the key insight is that as the health system evolves, higher status keeps converting into better outcomes. He calls it a moving target.

4:31 A study of people born in 1960, asking the odds of surviving from 50 to 85 by income quintile. Roughly 77 percent for women and 66 for men in the top fifth, against about 30 percent in the poorest fifth.

5:33 Smoking by education. A steep gradient from graduate degrees at the low end to GED holders at 36 percent, which he attributes to what education teaches and to the circles and resources it brings.

6:28 Infant mortality by race. In 1850, 340 per thousand Black infants and 217 White. By 2017, 11 and 5. Enormous progress for both, with the gap persisting.

7:22 What the theory predicts, and the routes: living conditions, nutrition, health care, occupations, and discrimination running from housing to schooling to the health system.

7:53 A qualification. Persistence so far does not make persistence inevitable, and it does mean nobody should be surprised to keep seeing it.

8:02 The opioid epidemic, and a map showing overdose deaths concentrated in Appalachia, the Upper Midwest, and other places where the industrial economy collapsed.

8:38 The route he describes: lost jobs, fewer opportunities, and opioids introduced through workplace injury, snowballing into mass addiction across prescription drugs, heroin, and fentanyl.

9:11 Background on the pandemic, the coronavirus family, and the Wuhan discovery in late 2019.

9:58 Transmission. Droplets, surfaces, hands to mouth, with two hedges: good evidence of asymptomatic spread and evidence of aerosolized particles that float rather than fall.

11:14 Why this one is bad. Novel, so nobody is immune. Highly contagious. Asymptomatic transmission, which means the infected keep moving instead of lying still, which he notes is much better for containment. Relatively high mortality, rate unknown.

12:03 The counts as he speaks: over 160,000 deaths worldwide, about 40,000 in the United States, which he says has the worst epidemic in the world.

12:26 The inversion. This epidemic began in richer parts of the country, in coastal metros, and spread from there, which is not what the previous discussion would lead you to expect.

12:54 About 80 percent of counties have cases, with a visible pattern of a dark county surrounded by lighter ones as the disease moves from a city to its suburbs.

13:30 Concentrated outbreaks. Nursing homes, where people cannot move away, infection goes unnoticed until late, and residents are the most vulnerable. Several thousand deaths already in New York State facilities.

14:04 Prisons and jails, with the largest outbreak in the country at Marion in Ohio at 1,800 infected, and another at Cook County Jail.

14:37 Factories, with meatpacking singled out. About 800 cases at a Smithfield plant in South Dakota, another at a plant in Greeley, Colorado.

15:20 The sources of disparity. Physical concentration first.

15:31 Exposed workers. Health care staff, and service workers in restaurants, groceries, and delivery, and then the general category of anyone who cannot work from home, which he contrasts with his own position recording a lecture in his studio.

16:21 Severity once infected: asthma and breathing problems, high blood pressure, compromised immunity, and age, which accumulates all of them.

17:03 A clip from Elise Gould of the Economic Policy Institute. The CDC says stay home when sick; 27 percent of private sector workers have no paid sick leave; over 30 million workers; the United States is one of two OECD countries without a federal mandate; taking time off can mean missed bills and calling in sick can mean dismissal; the workers without it are concentrated in restaurants, hotels, transportation, and tourism, with under half of leisure and hospitality workers covered and 30 percent of the bottom tenth of earners.

18:38 His gloss: the law does not require paid sick leave, which puts workers and everyone around them at risk.

18:55 Bureau of Labor Statistics data on who can work at home, by occupation, education, and race. Managers, professionals, sales, and office workers far more than transportation, production, service, and construction. Over half of college graduates against about 5 percent of those without a high school degree. Asians and Whites most able.

19:51 The consequence: the instruction to stay home opens an immediate inequality between who complies and who goes out and takes the risk.

20:16 The Black-White difference in COVID deaths, with the caution that these are very early days for the data.

20:42 Five jurisdictions reporting deaths by race, Washington, Chicago, Louisiana, New York State, and New York City, all showing Black residents dying at higher rates.

21:14 The explanation through the theory. Prior living conditions had already produced worse baseline health, and he notes these are deaths rather than infections, so most of the people counted had an existing condition.

21:38 Education and discrimination in access to jobs with benefits, flexibility, and the option to work from home, all unequally distributed.

21:52 Employer policies, including sick leave.

22:05 The health system, both the care people did or did not get before, since many have no insurance, and the hospital and doctor they reach once infected.

22:42 The close. This is a taste of one disparity, and the pattern shows the kind of thing to look for as the epidemic unfolds.

Thoughts

Three lectures in eighteen days, and the register changes each time.

April 3, on epidemiology, where he twice said he lacked expertise: a montage of presidential clips, the phrase total lie, and an instruction to enrolled students about which officials to believe. April 6, on family violence, squarely his field: no politics at all. April 20, on health disparities, also squarely his field: the most structurally radical content of the three, and not one word of partisan heat.

The lecture argues for federal paid sick leave mandate. Universal health coverage. That racial disparity in employment and benefits is discrimination rather than sorting. Those are contested political positions with serious opposition, and he advances all three inside a framework any medical sociologist would recognize as standard. A student leaves this lecture with a more consequential set of policy commitments than he leaves the April 3 lecture with, and without ever being told what to think about anybody.

Except once. At 17:03 he stops teaching and plays three minutes of advocacy video from the Economic Policy Institute, a labor-aligned think tank, and thanks the presenter afterward. He does not tell students what EPI is or who funds it. That is the same move as the April 3 montage with a fig leaf: a professor who selects an advocacy clip has made the argument, and the fig leaf is that somebody else’s mouth delivered it.

Cohen might say the paid sick leave numbers are correct, checkable, and drawn from BLS, and that this is what distinguishes EPI here from the Institute for Family Studies work he attacks. That defense holds for the statistics. It does not cover the framing, the policy conclusion, or the decision to let an outside organization narrate three minutes of a course. Anybody who thinks he is right about IFS should still want him to say out loud that he applies a different procedure to a think tank whose conclusions he shares.

Now the part that would matter to him more, which is that he undersold his own evidence twice by skipping the measurement work he demands from everyone else.

The infant mortality slide at 6:28 is presented as a gap that persisted. Run the numbers he put on the screen. In 1850, 340 against 217, a ratio of about 1.6. In 2017, 11 against 5, a ratio of about 2.2. The absolute gap collapsed by a factor of thirty and the relative gap widened by about forty percent. That is a stronger result than the one he stated and it is the result his theory predicts, since fundamental causes is a claim about relative advantage surviving absolute improvement. He had the better fact on the slide and told the students the weaker one.

The race and mortality slide at 20:42 has the same problem in the other direction. Those spring 2020 jurisdictional reports were crude counts and shares. The Black population in the United States is younger than the White population, and COVID mortality rose steeply with age, so age-adjusting those figures makes the disparity larger, not smaller. He shows unadjusted numbers to introductory students without saying they are unadjusted. This is the man who spent a decade arguing that a claim arrives with its instrument attached, who three weeks earlier corrected his own slide on live video when he noticed the American outbreak curve was an artifact of treating a continent-sized country as one unit. Here the caveat would have strengthened his case and he skipped it.

There is a defensible explanation, which is that this is twenty-three minutes for an introductory course and compression is the job. It is also the pattern from the family violence lecture, where the interventions section ran on some promise and mixed results with no effect sizes. His rigor is a function of whether he is prosecuting or teaching, and it runs in the direction you would not predict.

Two things here have aged well.

The prediction at 12:26 is his best public call of the pandemic and nobody has credited him with it. He notes that the epidemic inverted the usual gradient by starting in rich coastal metros, and then argues from the theory that the gradient will reassert through exposure, comorbidity, and treatment access. That is what happened. By the later waves the mortality burden had moved down the education and income distribution and stayed there. Set it beside the homicide prediction from April 6, which was wrong, and the difference is instructive: this one applies a well-tested theory to structural position, and that one was a bespoke exposure model built for the occasion. He is reliable when he reasons from the frame and less so when he improvises.

And the outbreak trio at 13:30 is the analytic core of the lecture, delivered so fast that most students would have missed it. Nursing homes, prisons, and meatpacking plants are three institutions with nothing in common except that they hold people in place who cannot leave. He names confinement as a variable, and the mechanism operates identically whether the confinement is medical, penal, or economic. That is a better sentence about the American pandemic than most of what was published that spring.

Two small things for my file.

At 16:08 he interrupts a list of workers who cannot work from home to note that he is delivering the lecture from his own studio. That is one clause, unforced, in front of students who mostly could not have caught it. It is the disclosure ethic operating without an audience to perform for, and it is the best evidence in this file that the ethic is a habit.

And the opioid map at 8:02 is the seed of published research. His 2024 work on marital status and deaths from alcohol, overdose, and suicide grows from exactly this material, and here he is teaching it to undergraduates four years earlier. The initial biography treats his research program and his teaching as separate strands. This is the place they are visibly the same strand.

YT transcript flags. Every instance of köppen, koban, covin, cope at, and Cova is COVID. At 0:00 “Philip Conn” is Cohen. At 5:52 “37% of them smoke” for graduate degrees is 3.7 percent; the gradient is roughly tenfold and the transcript flattens it to nothing, so this one will wreck the sentence if you quote it. At 4:48 “income Phipps” is income fifths. At 6:39 “1853 forty” is 1850, 340. At 6:49 “217 of the white babies” needs the per-thousand restored. At 8:08 “rotavirus epidemic” is coronavirus. At 10:39 “spread among people our age” is probably aerosols, given what follows. At 11:31 “de jure disease” is the disease. At 13:22 “the poor Daria’s first” is the poor areas first. At 19:41 “they say they couldn’t work from home” is could. At 21:22 “were already half conditioned” is have already conditioned. At 21:29 “that Charlie just showed” is that chart. The named facilities are correct: Marion Correctional Institution in Ohio, Cook County Jail, Smithfield in South Dakota, and the Greeley plant in Colorado. Elise Gould of the Economic Policy Institute is correctly identified. The 160,000 global and 40,000 American death figures place the recording on or about April 19 or 20, 2020, which matches the upload date.

‘COVID-19, preprints, and the information ecosystem’ (Jun. 8, 2020)

0:00 Introduces the talk on COVID-19, preprints, and the information ecosystem, gives his contact information, and invites people to get in touch.

0:13 The cartoon he opens with: you judge how bad things are by which specialist appears on the news. A volcanologist means trouble, an archaeologist means relax, and for this crisis a biologist sits close to the volcanologist end.

0:42 The ecosystem model, borrowed from ecology. The foundational layer holds government agencies, news organizations, and scientific publishers.

1:08 The access layer. Devices, subscriptions, paywalls, and language.

1:21 The marketplace layer, where demand is generated: people’s information needs, the production and movement of information, and its use.

2:01 The influencer network, running on individual decisions about whom to trust, both for one’s own needs and for the people relying on you.

2:23 The impact layer, and his summary that the whole thing is large, complicated, and hard to grasp.

2:45 Peer review has not always worked the way we assume.

2:53 Einstein and the Physical Review in 1936. He was offended to learn the editor had sent his paper out for review, the paper turned out to need correction, and he withdrew it rather than authorize anyone else to see it.

3:28 The general case before the mid-twentieth century: editors decided what to publish and consulted experts at their own discretion. Gatekeeping and authority existed; editors held them.

3:51 The origin story he offers. After the Second World War, facing constricted research funding, academics saw that they could lose control of the process to government agencies, and the mystique of anonymous peer review arose from the insistence that only academics could decide what was trustworthy.

4:31 Watson and Crick on the double helix was not peer reviewed. The editor decided to publish it.

4:38 The cycle of scientific work: search and discovery, developing ideas, designing projects, gathering data, analyzing, publishing, and the results returning to the pool.

5:22 A qualification. Nothing published is right forever, things get superseded and added to, and the process expands rather than circling.

5:42 Where journal peer review sits, between analysis and publication.

5:58 Publishers coordinate it using their own status criteria, who the researchers are and where they work, alongside the reviewers’ judgments, and the process is a black box conducted in secret.

6:17 Other evaluation points in the system: awards, grant funding decisions, and hiring.

6:51 Where open science advocates have intervened. Preregistration, which lets designs be reviewed before results exist.

7:23 Sharing materials and methods in repositories.

7:34 Publication beyond journals, including preprints, news media, and social media.

7:50 Two definitions of a preprint. The finished draft sent to a journal before review, and the accepted manuscript before typesetting.

8:25 The main servers. arXiv from math and physics in the 1990s, now over a million papers; bioRxiv and medRxiv; and SocArXiv in the social sciences, which he directs.

9:11 The pandemic explosion. A paper by Fraser and colleagues counts 16,000 COVID papers from January through April, of which 6,000 were preprints.

9:36 The follow-up finding that many were published in journals quickly with few substantive changes, which he reads as evidence they were in decent shape when posted.

9:46 Some were shared tens of thousands of times and shaped the discourse. Some turned out to be wrong, and the controversy raised the question of whether people should be reading and sharing them.

10:08 The medical sensitivity problem, and the caution notice bioRxiv and medRxiv now carry: preliminary reports, not certified, not to be relied on for clinical practice, not to be reported as established.

10:38 How journalists handle them anyway, using their own reliability indicators: who the researchers are, where they work, what outside experts say, their own reading, and newsworthiness against the cost of waiting weeks or months.

11:21 Preprints that became public knowledge. Excess deaths exceeding the official COVID count, indicating undercounting. The estimate that an earlier lockdown would have saved tens of thousands of lives, from medRxiv, on the front pages of the Washington Post and the New York Times.

12:01 A third case, the men-doing-more-housework finding, published by the Council on Contemporary Families, which does its own vetting outside both journals and preprint servers.

12:19 Retractions from the New England Journal of Medicine, The Lancet, and Annals of Internal Medicine, alongside a withdrawn bioRxiv preprint that had claimed a human-made origin for the virus on faulty genetic analysis.

12:49 His summary. Errors appear in preprints and in published papers, different systems of trust and authority are at work, and everything is moving fast.

13:00 The system runs on trust, normally formalized into predetermined authorities, prestigious journals and big universities, so that status, reputation, and legitimacy do the work.

13:27 A constant churn of deciding whom to believe, of which peer review is one part.

13:33 His verdict on the crisis. Preprints succeeded at accelerating research and getting knowledge out, and they taxed the system of trust, making explicit what is usually implicit.

13:54 Transparency as the emerging criterion. Whether researchers share data and code is now one of the ways we decide whether to believe them.

14:12 What a researcher can do. Publicly endorse work and share only what you think is reliable.

14:29 The Plaudit tool, a browser extension that lets anyone with an ORCID endorse a piece of scholarship. He has endorsed the Watson and Crick article, and he endorses a paper on pandemic dog adoptions when sharing it on Twitter. If people already trust him, his endorsement carries something.

15:14 Understand the ecosystem you work in and allocate your labor toward organizations that support open science: post preprints when ready, and decide carefully which journals to edit, review, and write for.

15:53 Closing reading list. The National Academies’ Open Science by Design, a resource for journalists on covering preprints, and his own report on scholarly communication in sociology.

This is the most theoretically interesting thing of his I have read, and he does not seem to notice.

The historical section from 2:45 to 4:38 is an argument that peer review is roughly seventy years old, that it arose from a professional turf defense rather than an epistemic discovery, and that the two most consequential papers he names, Einstein’s 1936 submission on the gravitational wave and the Watson and Crick’s double-helix paper, went through editors, he says, rather than referees. The claim is broadly correct and it is more radical than anything in his blog. Anonymous peer review is a mid-century institution built when academics realized that if they did not control quality certification, somebody with appropriations authority would.

Einstein’s 1936 submission to Physical Review was sent to an anonymous referee, whose criticism led Einstein to withdraw it before a revised version appeared as “On Gravitational Waves” in 1937.

Notice what that does to his own program. If the mystique of peer review was a professional guild move dressed as epistemology, then the transparency criterion he names at 13:54 has to answer the same question about itself. Is checkability a discovery about how knowledge works, or is it the certification standard preferred by the faction that finds it easy to meet? Quantitative researchers with code and data can satisfy it at the cost of a day’s file management. Ethnographers, historians, and theorists cannot satisfy it at any cost. A standard that redistributes authority toward the people who already hold the tools is exactly what his own history predicts would emerge from a crisis in an existing certification regime. He tells that story about the generation before him and does not turn it on himself. That is the essay somebody should write, and he handed over the materials.

The Plaudit passage at 14:29 is the strangest four minutes in this file. Follow what he proposes. Peer review is a black box run by publishers on status criteria. The replacement he demonstrates is a browser extension where he clicks endorse and then says that if you already trust him for other reasons, his tweet might mean something to you.

That is status criteria with the intermediary removed. The anonymous referee at least did not benefit personally from the paper’s reception. A named endorser trades on his reputation, accrues from being seen to endorse, and is embedded in a network of people he will need favors from. He replaced a black box with a visible reputation market and described the visibility as the improvement, which it partly is, and never addressed the thing that makes reputation markets go wrong, which is that they reward endorsing the people who can endorse you back. A man who spent his career pointing out that prestige networks distort what gets believed just proposed prestige networks as the correction.

He also endorsed Watson and Crick with a browser extension in 2020 and offered it as a demonstration. The joke is good. It also quietly concedes that the tool has no way to distinguish an endorsement that costs the endorser something from one that costs nothing.

Two things here are sharper than his usual work.

The Fraser finding at 9:36 is the best empirical defense of preprints anybody made that year. If work posted before review appears in journals shortly after with few substantive changes, then review added little to those papers, and the months of delay bought the reader nothing. That is a testable claim about the value added by an institution, of the kind he demands from everyone else, and it comes with a citation rather than an assertion.

And the 12:19 slide is the honest move. He puts preprint failures next to retractions from the New England Journal of Medicine, The Lancet, and Annals of Internal Medicine, which is the right comparison and the one an advocate would have skipped. The Surgisphere retractions from The Lancet and the NEJM had happened days before this recording, and both journals had cleared the same peer review he was being asked to defend as the safeguard preprints lack.

Two weaknesses.

The ecosystem model from 0:42 to 2:23 does no work. Five layers, no argument, no prediction, and nothing later in the talk uses it. Strike it and the talk loses nothing, which is the test he would apply to somebody else’s framework.

And the accuracy question goes unanswered. He says at 9:46 that some preprints turned out to be wrong and at 12:49 that some published papers did too, and he never tells you the rates. Whether preprints are wrong more often than reviewed papers is answerable, at least roughly, and it is the question anyone watching would want settled. He has the data literacy to know that the presence of errors on both sides is compatible with any ratio between them. This is the counting he does not do when the answer might be inconvenient, and it is the same pattern as the interventions section in the family violence lecture.

For my file, this is where the archive stops being an administrative project and becomes an argument about what certification is. The biography covers SocArXiv through its founding, the prize, and the AI crisis, and the crisis reads as an accident that befell a working institution. This talk shows the position was always there: certification is a historically contingent arrangement that some professionals built to keep control, and preprints tax the trust system by making the implicit explicit. Six years later he wrote a policy conceding that his moderators cannot state the rule and will use human judgment. The taxing of the trust system turned out to have no floor, and he described the direction of travel in June 2020 while assuming it stopped somewhere convenient.

One line to carry forward: at 13:33 he says the crisis made explicit what is usually implicit. That is the whole of his career in eight words.

Transcript flags. Kobe, kovat, COBIT, koban, Cobin, and club in nineteen are all COVID-19. At 8:48 “social kind” and “sai archive” are SocArXiv. At 8:26 “the major print print” is preprint. At 12:09 “bedding” is vetting. At 12:53 “systems of crust” is trust. At 11:52 “a pre current published” is a preprint. At 14:32 “the plaudit tool” is Plaudit, correctly named. “Orchid ID” is ORCID. At 15:44 “review right for” is review and write for. The Fraser paper is Fraser et al. on the preprint literature during the pandemic; the version circulating in mid-2020 was a preprint.

A smoothed transcript: 2:45, on peer review as a historical artifact. “Now, it’s important to realize, when we talk about peer-reviewed science and the way we assume science works, that it has not always been this way. There’s a famous interaction between Albert Einstein and the journal Physical Review, where he was extremely distressed to discover that the editor of the journal had sent his paper to somebody else to review it before deciding to publish it. It turned out that this particular paper was wrong and had to be corrected. But Einstein was offended, incensed: on the basis of this incident, I prefer to take my paper elsewhere. He hadn’t authorized it to be shown to anybody else.

“So that’s 1936. Peer review, and especially anonymous peer review, was completely offensive to Einstein. Of course, he’s Einstein. But it’s the general case that before the middle of the twentieth century, journal editors were the ones who decided what to publish, and they consulted with experts at their own discretion. Which doesn’t mean there was no gatekeeping, and it doesn’t mean there was no authority and no expert review. It was editors who were in charge of it. They decided who would review what, and they were the gatekeepers.

“Then, after World War II, as there was the threat of the constriction of research funding, academics realized that they could lose control of this process if it was handled instead by government agencies, without their direct influence. That’s really when we see the mystique of peer review come up, where academics insisted that only academics could decide what was valuable. That’s when we got this idea of the anonymous peer review system, and especially the idea that this was essential for science to be considered trustworthy.

“There’s a good example. The Watson and Crick paper on the double helix structure of DNA. Not peer reviewed. The editor just decided to publish it.”

5:42, on where review sits and what else does the same work

“The peer review process as we know it in journal publishing happens at that point between the analysis of the data and the publication of the results. That’s when we bring in these expert peers, sometimes anonymous. The effort is usually coordinated by publishers, especially journal publishers, and they’re going by their own status criteria: who are these researchers, are they reputable people, where do they work. And then they’re also consulting their peer reviewers. The process is very black box. We don’t know exactly how it works. It all happens in secret.

“Now, there are other places where evaluation goes on in this system that we don’t think of as peer review in that specific sense. After results are published they can be elevated; they can be given awards. We have grant funding agencies that evaluate research ideas and whether or not to fund them. We have people who decide who’s going to get jobs, and which are going to be the important jobs. So there’s a lot of peer evaluation that goes on in the system besides that moment of publication we focus on.”

7:50, what a preprint is

“There are two main definitions of preprints that are relevant. One is the finished draft of scholarly work, not yet peer reviewed. Think of the version of the work that scientists are sending off to a journal to be reviewed. Another definition is the version after it’s been reviewed and accepted, but before it’s been typeset and published by the journal. People sometimes share that, and that can also be called a preprint. So preprints are essentially before the typeset version that comes from a journal, at some stage of development.”

“The major servers: arXiv, the first big one, out of math and physics, started in the 1990s, now well over a million papers. bioRxiv and then medRxiv in the life sciences and medicine. In social science, SocArXiv, which I direct. And a number of other discipline-specific archives working on similar principles, archiving and disseminating preprints more rapidly and openly than traditional journals.”

9:11, the pandemic volume, and the Fraser finding

“In the current pandemic environment there’s been an explosion of research, and much of it in preprints. This paper by Fraser et al. finds that in the first four months, January through April, of sixteen thousand papers published having to do with COVID-19, six thousand were preprints. So a huge volume of work, pre-peer-review, coming out available to the public.

“They also did some follow-up and found that a lot of these studies are published quite quickly in journals with few substantive changes, indicating the preprints were in pretty good shape when they were posted. Some of these preprints have been shared thousands of times, or tens of thousands of times, and really helped shape the discourse on COVID-19. Some of them have turned out to be wrong, and there’s been controversy with some of them, and that’s part of what’s raised the issue of whether we should be reading preprints and talking about them and sharing them.”

10:08, the warning label, and what journalists do instead

“Because we’re dealing with medicine, and people are very sensitive about it, you’re going to give clinical advice, you can talk about specific medications, doctors might be looking at these. medRxiv and bioRxiv, which are run by the same organization, are putting this caution right on their homepage: preprints are preliminary reports that are not certified, they should not be relied on to guide clinical practice, and they should not be reported as established information.

“But preprints are all over the news. So how is that happening? Journalists and news organizations are using their own indicators of reliability. Who are these researchers, where do they work. They might talk to other experts who are not involved in the research and say, what do you think, is this reasonable, should we write a story about this. They have their own assessment. The science journalists and reporters and editors have their own expertise, and they can read and decide what to trust. And then there’s the newsworthiness. How important is it? Do we need to get this out there right now, instead of waiting weeks or months for it to be published in a journal?”

11:21, preprints that became public knowledge

“Some of the things you’ve probably heard that are now established knowledge in the public sphere around COVID-19 have come from preprints. For example, the estimates that the number of deaths going on in the country far exceeds the number counted by the official statistics, indicating we were undercounting infection-related deaths. Page one of the Washington Post. Page one of the New York Times: if we had done the lockdown sooner, tens of thousands of lives would have been saved. That’s also from a preprint, published on medRxiv. So these things have been tremendously influential, and lots of people know about them.

“Here’s another one. Men are doing more housework, say researchers. This one is not on a preprint server. It’s published by the Council on Contemporary Families, which does its own vetting of unpublished research. They publish it themselves, but not in a journal, and not with a formal peer review process.”

12:19, errors on both sides

“Now, some of these preprints have been wrong. But then again, some of the published articles have been wrong. Here are some retractions from major journals, the New England Journal of Medicine, The Lancet, Annals of Internal Medicine, which turned out to be wrong and had to be retracted after getting a lot of attention. I include here one bioRxiv preprint that was withdrawn after suggesting that the coronavirus was made by humans, because of a faulty analysis of the genetics of the virus.

“So there have been errors in preprints and among published papers, and we have different systems of trust and authority, and the whole thing is moving very rapidly.”

13:00, the passage the essay turns on

“So what do we trust? What do we believe we know? This whole system runs on trust. Normally it’s formalized, and we have authorities that are predetermined to be things we should trust: Nature and other important journals, and big universities, and so on. We use the status and the reputation and the legitimacy of the people who did the study, and the people who published the study, and the people who report on the study. There’s a constant churning process of deciding who we’re going to believe. Peer review is just one part of that.

“This crisis has really shown that preprints have been tremendously successful at accelerating the pace of research and the efficiency of getting that knowledge out there. And it has really taxed the system of trust, and made more explicit part of what’s usually implicit. One of the things that we now look at is transparency. One of the ways that we evaluate whether or not we should believe a piece of research is: are they sharing their data and code and so on. Have they made their process transparent. If they have, that indicates that they’re more trustworthy.”

14:12, the replacement he proposes

“I want to talk a little bit at the end here about what you can do if you are a researcher, who works not just on this but on anything. One thing you can do is take steps to publicly endorse work, and make sure you only share work in your networks that you think is reliable. For example, the Plaudit tool. I really like it. It’s a browser extension you can install, I use Chrome, where if you have an ORCID ID you can endorse any piece of scholarship. You can see here I have endorsed the Watson and Crick article. And also, if I’m going to share a paper on Twitter, here’s a paper I shared about dog adoptions during the pandemic, I’m giving it my endorsement. If you trust me already for other reasons, then my tweet might mean something to you.

“So if you’re a researcher, I just urge you to spend some of your time doing the work of publicly endorsing things that you think are good.

“I also think it’s important for us to try to understand this ecosystem that we work in, and then to make decisions about how we allocate our own labor to support those organizations and institutions that support open science and support our values. To practice open science ourselves. To publish preprints when they’re ready, to help accelerate and transmit knowledge out to other researchers and the public. And to decide who we’re going to edit journals for, review for, write for. To think of ourselves as part of this system, and try to push the system in a positive direction while we do our work.”

Notes on the editing

Removed “sort of,” “you know,” “um,” and repeated false starts. Repaired the speech-recognition damage: Kobe, kovat, COBIT, koban, Cobin, and club in nineteen all became COVID-19; “social kind” and “sai archive” became SocArXiv; “the major print print” became preprints; “bedding” became vetting; “systems of crust” became trust; “a pre current published” became a preprint; “review right for” became review for, write for; “orchid ID” became ORCID. Joined sentences he left hanging. Nothing was added, no order was changed, and where a phrase was ambiguous I kept his looser version rather than improve it.

At 3:11 he delivers Einstein’s line as though quoting: on the basis of this incident, I prefer to take my paper elsewhere. The documented letter of July 27, 1936, reads that on the basis of this incident he prefers to publish the paper elsewhere. His rendering is close and not exact. If you are quoting Cohen, use his words as smoothed above. If you are quoting Einstein, use the letter, which is reproduced in the gravitational-wave histories I sent with the peer review essay. Do not let the two blur, since the whole point of that passage is what counts as a faithful record.

One flag on the Council on Contemporary Families passage at 12:01. He presents CCF as a third model, an organization that vets and publishes outside both journals and preprint servers, without saying whether he has any relationship to it. CCF has published his work and he has been associated with the organization.

What I cut and why. The ecosystem model (0:42 to 2:38) is five labeled layers with no argument attached, and nothing later in the talk uses it. The virus background (9:11 area, in the other lecture’s language) duplicates material he covered better on April 3. The closing reading list is three citations, all recoverable from the slides at https://osf.io/5mue7/. The retraction slide carries numbers that never made it into the audio.

If you want a verbatim passage rather than a smoothed one, the two places where the exact wording is likely to matter are 3:51, the after-World-War-II turf-defense sentence, and 13:33, the taxing of the system of trust.

In the early summer of 1936, Albert Einstein (1879–1955) and his assistant Nathan Rosen (1909–1995) sent a paper to Physical Review arguing that gravitational waves do not exist. The editor, John Torrence Tate (1889–1950), had published Einstein before without sending the work to anybody. This one struck him as suspicious. He mailed it to Howard Percy Robertson (1903–1961), a relativist at Princeton, who read it and sent back ten typed pages explaining that the authors had made a mathematical error.

Tate forwarded the report and asked for a response. Einstein wrote back that he and Rosen had submitted the manuscript for publication and had not authorized anyone to show it to specialists beforehand, that he saw no reason to address the comments of Tate’s anonymous expert, and that he preferred to publish elsewhere. Tate answered that he could not print a paper the author would not let his editorial board see. Einstein took it to the Journal of the Franklin Institute and never submitted to Physical Review again.

What happened next is the part that gets left off.

Rosen went to the Soviet Union. A young Polish physicist named Leopold Infeld (1898–1968) arrived at Princeton to replace him. Robertson, back from a sabbatical in Pasadena and by all accounts sociable, befriended Infeld, got him talking about what Einstein was working on, and expressed doubt. The two of them went through the manuscript together. Infeld took the objection to Einstein. Einstein revised the paper before returning his galleys, reversed its conclusion, changed the title, and thanked Robertson in a footnote for friendly assistance in clarifying the original error. He never learned that Robertson had been the referee.

The correction arrived. It traveled through a man who happened to be in Princeton that year and happened to like talking to graduate students. The institution built to carry it had been refused at the door.

Philip Cohen tells the first half of that story in a lecture he recorded in June 2020 on preprints and the information ecosystem, and he uses it to make a claim that is larger than his listeners probably noticed. He follows it with Watson and Crick on the double helix, which no referee read; the editor decided to publish. Then the general point. Before the middle of the twentieth century, journal editors decided what to publish and consulted experts when they felt like it. Gatekeeping existed. Authority existed. Editors held both. And then, he says, after the Second World War, facing the prospect that research funding decisions might be made by government agencies without academic control, academics insisted that only academics could judge what was true, and the mystique of anonymous peer review was born.

That is an argument that the central credentialing procedure of modern science is a professional turf defense that later acquired an epistemology. He states it in ninety seconds, in a lecture for undergraduates, and moves on.

The history is right in structure and wrong in date, and the correct date makes his case stronger.

Melinda Baldwin, a historian of science who teaches at his own university, published the definitive account in Isis in 2018, “Scientific Autonomy, Public Accountability, and the Rise of ‘Peer Review’ in the Cold War United States.” External referee reports were an optional feature of journal editing and grant making through the nineteenth century and most of the twentieth. The idea that refereeing is a requirement of scientific legitimacy arose in the Cold War United States, and the decisive moment came in the 1970s rather than the 1940s. American science was under sustained congressional attack over how it spent public money. Scientists needed to appear accountable to the people funding them while retaining control of funding decisions. The term peer review, which had been migrating out of grant administration, was pressed into service as the thing that made science credible as such. Nature did not require formal review of everything it published until 1973. The Lancet came later still.

So the sequence is: an existing certification regime comes under external pressure, the profession selects a standard that answers the pressure while keeping the decision rights inside the profession, and the standard is then described as constitutive of knowledge rather than as the settlement it was.

Cohen tells that story about the generation before him. At the end of the same lecture he proposes the successor standard and does not turn the story on it.

The passage runs about twenty seconds. The crisis has taxed the system of trust, he says, and made explicit what is usually implicit, and one of the things we now look at is transparency. Are they sharing their data and code. Have they made their process inspectable.

Ask of that standard the question Baldwin asks of the last one. Who can meet it, at what cost, and who decides whether it has been met.

A quantitative researcher working with public survey data can meet it for the price of a day’s work. That figure comes from Cohen’s own comment section, where a sociologist who had published in a journal with a mandatory policy reported that assembling his first replication package took a full day despite tidy file management, and that most people default to available upon request because collation for a stranger is labor rather than concealment. One day, once, and then the habit is cheap. Every subsequent paper is a matter of directory hygiene.

An ethnographer cannot meet it at any price. The field notes are the instrument, the consent forms usually forbid release, and even redacted material carries the risk of deductive disclosure in a neighborhood where everyone knows who the researcher followed for two years. An archival historian cannot meet it either. The archive is the data, and it sits in boxes in a building, often behind permissions granted to individuals, and citation to box and folder is the most a reader will ever get. An interview researcher who promised confidentiality is barred by the promise. A demographer working inside a Census research data center is barred by federal law. A theorist has nothing to deposit.

That is a standard whose compliance costs run from one day to infinity depending on what kind of evidence a field is built out of, and it arrived in a discipline whose quantitative wing had spent thirty years gaining ground on its qualitative wing.

Political science ran the experiment first and the record is public.

The American Political Science Association wrote data access and research transparency into its ethics guide in 2012. In October 2014, twenty-seven journal editors signed a joint statement committing to require, by January 15, 2016, that cited data be available in a trusted digital repository at the time of publication, with exceptions for restricted material at editorial discretion. The following autumn a petition circulated asking for a delay. It gathered more than seven hundred fifty signatures within days and close to a thousand within a week, including senior figures and sitting editorial board members.

The signatories did not say they wished to be believed without evidence. Their complaint was about discretion. The rules were clear enough for people with datasets and unspecifiable for everyone else, which meant that ten editors could produce ten interpretations, and a scholar planning a project could not know whether a given kind of fieldwork would close off a set of journals. The standard did not tell them what compliance was. It told them who would decide.

The association’s past, current, and future presidents answered with a joint statement supporting implementation, and the ground they chose is the one Baldwin would predict. Their legitimacy as scholars speaking to the public, they wrote, rests partly on maintaining common standards for evaluating evidence-based knowledge claims. External legitimacy, purchased with an internal certification rule, in the middle of a decade when the social sciences were being asked what their findings were worth. That is 1975 with different equipment.

The deadline held at some journals and slipped at others, and the association’s qualitative and multi-method section opened a multi-year deliberation to work out what transparency could mean for research that cannot deposit anything. The deliberation produced sensible documents. The distributional question it was convened to settle has not been settled anywhere.

Now the counter-case.

Showing that a standard has winners does not show that it is false. Peer review’s origins in a guild’s anxiety about congressional appropriations tell you nothing about whether referees catch errors, and Robertson caught a real one. In the same way, the fact that checkability favors people with spreadsheets does not make checkability arbitrary. There is a difference between a claim a stranger can test and a claim he must take on the author’s word, the difference is not a matter of taste, and every discipline that has looked hard at its own literature in the past fifteen years has found things that a stranger’s inspection would have caught earlier.

The second point. If your evidence cannot be inspected, that is a fact about your evidence. It may be an unavoidable fact, forced by ethics and by law, and it still bears on how much weight a reader should place on your conclusion. A discipline that answers the transparency demand by saying its methods are different has said something true and has also said trust me, which is the position everyone occupied before 1970 and which produced a literature nobody can now audit.

And the third point runs against Cohen’s own side. Compliance costs fall hardest on people with the least slack. A day of file management is a day for a tenured professor with course relief. It is a week that does not exist for an adjunct teaching five sections, and the standard has no way to see the difference.

Peer review answered an accountability crisis with a rule that kept the deciding inside the profession. The test of any successor is whether it moves the deciding outward, and this is where Cohen’s program deserves better than the easy debunking, because on its face it does exactly that. A replication package is not an opinion delivered by a credentialed stranger to an editor in confidence. It is a public artifact. Anyone can download it. The authority to check has been handed to whoever wants it. That is a real answer to the guild problem, and nobody else in his discipline proposed one.

Except that the thing that got adopted is not checking.

What his audits count is whether a package exists. He said so in 2020, that he had assessed them at a glance and had not tested anybody’s code, and he has never claimed otherwise. The proportion of quantitative articles in the discipline’s flagship journal arriving with packages went from four of fifteen to twelve of eighteen across five years, and what that number measures is documentation. Nobody has run the code. Nobody has recomputed the tables. The public who received the authority to check has not exercised it and shows no sign of intending to.

Which leaves a standard that certifies compliance with a documentation regime, adjudicated by journal editors and by a professor clicking links on a December afternoon. The outward transfer of authority is real in principle and dormant in practice, and while it sleeps, the rule functions the way Baldwin’s model says these rules function: as a gate, operated by people whose evidence happens to fit through it, carrying the language of universal accessibility.

Then documentation became free to produce.

In the winter of 2025 Cohen’s archive began receiving papers with everything in place. Abstracts, real citations to real work, competent models, code in public repositories, and disclosure statements listing every tool used to generate the analysis and draft the text. One of them he described in detail because it would have been accepted a few years earlier. Dull, unoriginal, thin in its literature review, empty where it claimed a contribution, and immaculate on every checkable dimension.

A standard that certifies the existence of an audit trail becomes worthless at the moment audit trails cost nothing. That is what happens to any proxy once the thing it stood for stops being expensive.

The policy his committee published in March 2026 refuses automated detection, declines to state a rule that could be written down completely, commits the moderators to judgment made by people using perception and experience, and invites appeals. A small group of trusted individuals, embedded in a community, deciding what to publish on criteria they cannot fully specify, sometimes wrong, answerable to nobody but their own standing.

That is John Tate at his desk in 1936.

The narrative Cohen told his students in June 2020 ran from editorial discretion, through a guild’s invention of peer review under political pressure, to transparency as the successor standard. He was describing a sequence he thought he was at the end of. Six years later the third term collapsed and the first term returned, and the whole circuit closed inside a single career.

The counting moved a journal that three years of committee work had failed to move, and a literature with code in it is better than a literature without. What the history says is narrower and harder to shrug off. Every certification standard is a settlement about whom to believe, arrived at by people with something at stake, under pressure from outside, and every one of them gets described afterward as a discovery about the nature of knowledge. He can see this clearly when the subject is the generation that trained his teachers. The materials for seeing it about his own generation are on his own slides.

Robertson’s ten pages never persuaded Einstein of anything. What persuaded him was a man he liked, at his own institution, talking to his assistant over the course of an autumn. Every certification regime since has been an attempt to make that transmission work without depending on who happens to be in Princeton that year. None has managed it. Each has had to decide, in the attempt, whose evidence counts as evidence.

Notes

The Einstein episode. Daniel Kennefick’s research, first published in Physics Today in September 2005 and developed in Traveling at the Speed of Thought (Princeton, 2007), is the source for Robertson’s identification as the referee. The submission was “Do Gravitational Waves Exist?”, sent to Physical Review in June 1936; Tate wrote to Einstein on July 23 with the referee report; Einstein replied on July 27. Verbatim quotation used: “comments of your anonymous expert,” from that letter, which is reproduced in full at https://arxiv.org/pdf/1609.09400 and https://arxiv.org/pdf/1610.08803. Tate’s reply of July 30, that he could not publish a paper the author was unwilling to have shown to the editorial board, is in the same sources. The Infeld and Robertson sequence, the reversal of the conclusion, the retitling to “On Gravitational Waves,” and the acknowledgment thanking Robertson are documented in both arXiv histories and in https://www.science.org/doi/10.1126/science.347.6226.1085. The detail that Tate had published Einstein, Podolsky and Rosen in 1935 without refereeing is from https://www.discovermagazine.com/the-sciences/einstein-vs-physical-review.

The history of peer review. Melinda Baldwin, “Scientific Autonomy, Public Accountability, and the Rise of ‘Peer Review’ in the Cold War United States,” Isis 109, no. 3 (September 2018): 538–558, https://www.journals.uchicago.edu/doi/abs/10.1086/700070, with a copy at https://gwern.net/doc/statistics/peer-review/2018-baldwin.pdf. Her earlier “Credibility, Peer Review, and Nature, 1945–1990,” Notes and Records 69 (2015), and John Burnham’s 1990 JAMA piece on the evolution of editorial peer review, are the standard companions. Nature dated at 1973 and The Lancet later; the term appearing in JAMA in 1970; Colin Norman’s “Peer-Review under Review” in Nature in 1975. She is on the faculty of the University of Maryland’s history department.

DA-RT. The joint statement of twenty-seven political science journal editors, October 2014, with the January 15, 2016 deadline and the restricted-data exception. The APSA ethics guide change dates to 2012 and the initiative to an ad hoc committee formed around 2010. Petition coverage at https://www.insidehighered.com/news/2015/11/16/political-scientists-seek-delay-transparency-standards-publications, with signature counts at https://dialogueondartdotorg.wordpress.com/faqs/ (more than 750 as of November 8, 2015) and https://politicalbehavior.wordpress.com/2015/11/11/statement-on-da-rt-and-the-jets/ (almost 1,000 by November 11; the organizers were Hirschmann, Htun, Mansbridge, Thelen, Wedeen, and Wood). Verbatim quotation used: “common standards for evaluating evidence-based knowledge claims,” from the joint statement of the APSA past, current, and future presidents, November 24, 2015, linked from https://www.dartstatement.org/2014-journal-editors-statement-jets. The Qualitative Transparency Deliberations are at https://qualtd.net/page/about/, and the discretion objection I paraphrase is from a contributor post at https://www.qualtd.net/viewtopic.php?t=67.

Cohen material. The June 2020 lecture, “COVID-19, preprints, and the information ecosystem,” slides at https://osf.io/5mue7/, for the Einstein and Watson-Crick examples, the postwar turf-defense account at 3:51, and the transparency criterion at 13:54. The 2020 audit with the glance caveat, the December 2025 audit with the counts, and the commenter’s day of file management are all linked in my earlier notes. The AI submission and the March 2026 policy are at socopen.org.

The concession structure, which is the essay’s exposed flank. Three counter-arguments run before the payoff: that genealogy is not refutation, that a field’s inability to share is a real fact about its evidence rather than an exemption, and that compliance costs fall hardest on the least resourced. A hostile reader will say the concessions are placed to be survived. The honest answer is that the first one is decisive and the essay says so, and that the argument turns on the narrower claim about who adjudicates rather than on the claim that transparency is arbitrary. If you want the essay less exposed, strengthen the second concession, since it is the one most likely to be true.

The claim that is mine. That what got adopted is documentation rather than checking, that the public who received the authority to inspect has not used it, and that the standard therefore operates as a gate while carrying the rhetoric of universal access. Cohen concedes the first part of that (he has never claimed to run the code) and would dispute the conclusion. The strongest reply available to him is that a dormant right to check disciplines behavior even when unexercised. I have not found anyone who has tested it.

The audit measures a regime whose effects do not depend on the regime being used. Tax compliance runs far ahead of the audit rate. Agencies write differently under freedom of information statutes whose requests mostly never come. A firm’s filings are shaped by a short-seller who never appears. If that holds for replication packages, then counting deposits is counting something real, and my complaint about dormancy is a complaint about the wrong variable.

The trouble with the reply is that deterrence is doing four different jobs in it, and they have different requirements and different failure conditions.

The first is a forcing function that needs no inspection at all. To assemble a package you have to run the pipeline from raw data to published table in one pass, and that pass finds errors whether or not anybody else ever looks. Cohen’s commenter described this without naming it: a full day of work for a first package, despite tidy file management. Much of what takes a day is discovering that your own directory does not do what you thought it did. This version of the reply is the strongest, because it operates at a zero inspection rate, and it is the one Cohen’s audits are aimed at, since what they count is whether the package was built.

The second is deterrence proper, which needs a nonzero perceived chance of being caught, and which targets choices made before any file exists: the outlier you would have dropped, the specification you settled on after seeing which one worked.

The third is conditional inspection, and it is the strongest structural point in Cohen’s favor. Nobody checks at random. People check when a finding is surprising, contested, or load-bearing for something. So the unconditional rate at which packages get downloaded badly understates the discipline, because the probability of inspection is high exactly where a wrong result would do damage and near zero where it would not. Michael LaCour’s fabricated study was exposed because David Broockman obtained the data and found that it matched an existing survey too closely. The right was dormant across the whole literature and got exercised at the one point that mattered.

The fourth is norm signaling, which does not require inspection either, and which is probably how most compliance with most rules works.

Now the evidence, which exists, and which separates these cleanly.

In March 2015 the American Journal of Political Science adopted third-party verification. Every accepted quantitative manuscript goes to the Odum Institute at Chapel Hill, where staff run the code and compare the output to the tables in the paper before the article is published. Authors know this. They know it with certainty, they know it will happen within weeks, and they know publication waits on it.

By February 1, 2018, Odum had processed 149 manuscripts and completed 127. Of those 127, eight reproduced all the analyses on the first attempt. Six percent. The mean number of resubmissions was about 1.8 and the maximum was five. A later account gives a pass rate around ten percent, and the process adds fifty to sixty-five days to publication.

That number kills the forcing-function version of the reply. These are authors operating under near-certain inspection by a named institute on a known timetable, which is the most favorable condition the argument could ask for, and ninety-four percent of them handed over packages that did not run. Whatever anticipatory self-auditing the deposit requirement induces, it does not survive contact with a stranger’s machine. If it fails under certainty, it is not doing much under dormancy.

The economics numbers point the same way from a different angle. When Kingi, Vilhuber, Herbert, and Stanchi went through 303 papers in American Economic Journal: Applied Economics, ninety-eight of them, about a third, relied on confidential or proprietary data and could not be reproduced by an outsider at all. Of the eligible attempts, roughly forty-three percent fully reproduced the analysis and another forty-two percent partly did. That corpus was published under a data availability policy the American Economic Association had held since 2005. Fifteen years of a deposit requirement, and under half of the checkable papers checked out.

So the deposit is a weak proxy for the thing Cohen cares about, and the gap is measurable, and it has been measured, and the measurement was not done by him.

What the AJPS record also shows, and this is the part that cuts against me, is that the requirement does enormous work anyway. The errors got found. They got fixed before publication rather than after, without a retraction, without a correction notice, without anybody’s reputation entering the transaction. That is close to the ideal case for research correction and it is invisible in every count of retractions, including Cohen’s count of one this century.

But look at what produced it. Not the right to check. Somebody checking. Funded staff, fifty to sixty-five days per article, a five-hundred-thousand-dollar Sloan grant in 2018 to automate part of the workload. The improvement came from labor, and the labor is the thing that does not happen when a package sits in a repository with a right attached to it.

Two things survive for the deterrence reply, and I want to state them because they are not weak.

The AJPS numbers refute the forcing function and say nothing about deterrence proper. A package that fails to run is evidence about file hygiene. It is not evidence about whether the author dropped an inconvenient case, and it could not be, because those decisions leave no residue in the deposited files. The archived script documents the path taken, never the search. Whatever restraint the possibility of inspection exerts on specification choices is not something a verification failure rate can measure, in either direction.

And the conditional-inspection point stands untouched. A regime under which most packages are never opened and the consequential ones reliably are is a good regime, possibly better than random auditing, and its performance cannot be assessed from the average.

What would settle it is three studies, none of them expensive.

Compare AJPS packages deposited before March 2015 with packages deposited after, re-run today by a third party. If the post-policy packages verify at higher rates years later, the regime changed author behavior durably. If the improvement disappears once you account for the Odum round-trips, then verification worked and the requirement by itself did nothing. Somebody proposed this in 2019 and I cannot find that it was completed.

Compare journals that require deposit without verification against journals that verify. Sociology, political science, and economics now sit on opposite sides of that line, and the comparison is available.

And look at the download logs. Dataverse and openICPSR know how often each package has been retrieved and by whom. The dormancy rate is not a matter for speculation. It is sitting in server logs at institutions that would hand it over to a researcher who asked.

Which brings the whole thing back around on Cohen. He counts a proxy. The relationship between his proxy and the outcome he cares about is measurable. It has been measured in two neighboring disciplines and never in his own. And the answer his own standard would demand is one sociology journal paying somebody to run the code, which costs money and two months per article, and which nobody in sociology has proposed.

As of February 2018, three years into the policy, the journal reported that it had accepted no manuscripts with qualitative analyses since the policy took effect. There are other possible explanations, including submission mix and editorial preference, and it is a single journal. It is also the cleanest available datum on the distributional question, and it points where the petitioners said it would.

Sources

AJPS verification figures from the journal’s own policy document, “The American Journal of Political Science Replication and Verification Policy,” dated February 27, 2018: https://ajps.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/ajps-replic-and-verif-policy-2-27-18.pdf. Source for the March 26, 2015 announcement, the 149 processed and 127 completed manuscripts, the eight first-attempt successes, the mean of 1.8 resubmissions and maximum of five, and the sentence about no qualitative manuscripts having been accepted. The roughly ten percent pass rate and the division of labor between Odum and the Qualitative Data Repository at Syracuse are at https://wholetale.readthedocs.io/en/stable/project/cases/political-science.html, which also notes the 2018 Sloan grant of five hundred thousand dollars. The fifty to sixty-five day publication delay is from a conference report at https://www.csescienceeditor.org/article/science-editor-symposium-reproducibility-reporting-guidelines/. The workflow case study is Thu-Mai Christian et al., “Operationalizing the Replication Standard,” International Journal of Digital Curation 13, no. 1 (2018), https://ijdc.net/article/view/555.

Economics figures from Kingi, Vilhuber, Herbert, and Stanchi, “The Reproducibility of Economics Research: A Case Study,” working paper at https://sylverieherbert.github.io/files/Replication_aejae.pdf, published as Herbert, Kingi, Stanchi, and Vilhuber, “Reproduce to Validate,” Canadian Journal of Economics 57, no. 3 (2024): 961–988. The eligible-attempt percentages in the working paper text are ambiguously worded and should be checked against the published version before you print them. The AEA’s data availability policy dates to 2005, and prepublication verification under the Data Editor began in 2019: https://aeadataeditor.github.io/.

The LaCour case is the standard reference for consequential inspection of an available dataset. Broockman, Kalla, and Aronow’s May 2015 report is the primary document.

The proposed pre- and post-policy comparison at AJPS is described at https://wholetale.org/internship_projects/2019-analyzing-ajps.html. I could not find a published result and would not assume there is none without a proper search.

I have not checked whether anybody has published dormancy rates from Dataverse or openICPSR logs. If nobody has, that is a small original paper sitting unclaimed, and it is the direct empirical answer to the question you asked. It is also the sort of thing Cohen could do in an afternoon and has not.

‘Families, Inequality, and Sociology in Pandemic Times’ (Aug. 1, 2020)

0:04 Opens with the discipline’s premise: sociology looks for where macro and micro meet, where biography meets history, and much of that happens in families. Families are where social structure gets internalized into personality early in life.

0:24 The example that carries the talk. People marry when they have confidence in the future, and many have children when they feel able to shape their own destiny. If people are being laid off and housing, health care, and education are out of reach, they will not make long-term commitments.

1:07 The Gini index and half a century of rising American inequality.

1:19 Runaway wealth at the top. He grants that Bezos doubling his fortune does not affect him personally, and argues the aggregate effect corrupts other parts of the economy, since a few firms set wages and conditions for millions.

1:46 The formulation: the richest people make the rules for themselves and everyone else works around it. We want Gates to solve malaria because he has more money than many governments, which would be good, and it is unfortunate that this is where we ended up.

2:04 The weak social floor. How far people are allowed to fall, and the toll even on those whose necessities are currently met, since losing them easily wears on health, anxiety, and fear for children.

2:25 The parenting consequence. Do you let your children be whoever they want, or do you fear they will land on the wrong side of the gap.

2:43 Self-efficacy again, the sense of controlling your own destiny, which he says modern society prizes and which shapes every decision and relationship when absent.

2:55 The decline in marriage. When women’s earnings and education accelerated from the 1970s, some feared feminism would end the family, which he says now seems quaint.

3:16 The arithmetic under the fear. In the 1950s more than 80 percent of Americans married before 25, so marriage was near universal and there was nowhere for the rate to go but down once opting out became possible.

3:38 What nobody anticipated: richer women marrying more. He attributes it partly to better economic prospects among their available partners, and to men increasingly judging partners by earnings.

3:54 Why poorer people and African Americans marry less. He calls it an unbalanced gamble, a long-term commitment in a universe offering no reason to think long-term decisions will be reciprocated by reality.

4:09 Middle-class anxiety, driven by college costs and fear that children will end up broke, which he says contaminates opportunity with fear and produces cynicism, materialism, and a duty to keep children on track that limits their range.

4:31 The other side. People look for a realm they can control, and families are part of that. The haven in a heartless world, which he attributes to an old book. Emotional connections over material principles, pulling together, trusting each other. That is the ideal and some get near it.

4:57 How it is achieved lower down: extended family, especially among immigrants, fictive kin, informal care networks, people watching each other’s children.

5:24 The correction he stops to make. He does not want race collapsed into class. Take two college graduates with mid-level incomes, one White and one Black. Because of history and context the Black graduate is likelier to have poor relatives and friends, so people come knocking for help, and likelier to be less secure and to face racism from work relationships to policing to exclusion in public. Track only class and you miss it.

6:06 Impression management, part of the human condition, and heightened on social media.

6:12 The connection back. When 80 percent married before 25 you did not have to justify the arrangement. More choices mean justifying them to others and to yourself, which feeds the presentation of lifestyle.

6:35 His refusal to call it all bad. The humble brag about the messy office, the real brag about the cooking or the clothes, and the point that presenting a controllable image gives people some real control.

6:53 The Zoom green screen as the pandemic case: creating the visual context for relationships that exist only online.

7:05 A shallow cynical dimension and a positive one, since making your own image can be empowering.

7:13 Teenage anxiety. Adolescents may know rationally and cannot fully grasp that everyone is presenting a positive image, so they conclude they are the only sad one when everyone is posting one happy minute from yesterday.

7:31 The unanswerable question: how much is people having fun and how much is producing the image of fun.

7:38 Large shocks push things further in the direction they were already going, or that is an illusion and a confirmation bias, and everywhere he looks he sees inequality growing.

7:51 Education. Children with computers, devices, wi-fi, and parents pulling away from the rest.

7:58 Home. Some are trapped and getting more family time, which is basically good even when tiresome, and some are trapped in an abusive hellscape.

8:13 The measurement problem, stated as sharply as he has ever put it. Many tools for measuring family violence are activated only when people leave home, so tracking is limited.

8:29 School as the eight-hour daily respite from home, and how much that matters for children.

8:42 The magnification argument. Those with enough rooms for everyone to work and their own computers are riding it out, and the existing advantage is grossly magnified.

8:56 The saving that comes from not traveling, not buying coffee, and not eating out, being readied for a tutor or a private pod teacher next year.

9:13 Permanent cuts. Workplaces doing without certain workers may never restore them, and an office without a receptionist, or without an office, takes down building staff, parking attendants, and coffee shop workers.

9:38 A one-line aside on the advice to try something new, and that it is not voluntary.

9:42 Long-term medical effects, including possible lifetime consequences of infection in cases that look mild now, which given disparities in infection rates becomes future health inequality.

10:02 Fertility. No data yet, and certainly many are postponing children in a country where birth rates were already falling. Some delay becomes births forgone through breakups, restarting, and conception difficulty at older ages, with ripples like fewer kindergarteners in six years.

10:35 Postponed and cancelled weddings, and the open question of how many are temporary.

10:41 Children not going to camp, not traveling, not making friends or seeing new things, who will be different adults.

10:50 Single people, and whether they are meeting anyone.

10:56 Some of what is happening is the things that are not happening, and that absence will have effects nobody can predict.

11:03 The millions infected or bereaved, and how prolonged risk might change personalities or culture permanently.

11:16 The close. If the political system can function at all, he expects the crisis to produce universal health care, child care, and paid family leave, and says those are for a different talk.

Five recordings across four months and this is the one where the theory shows. The other four were a professor explaining things he had checked. This one is a man saying what he thinks families are, and the position turns out to be more conservative than his reputation allows and more radical than his critics would grant.

Start with what he says at 0:24 and repeats at 2:43 and again at 3:54. People marry when they are confident about the future. People have children when they believe they can shape their own destiny. Poor people do not marry because the gamble is unbalanced, a long-term commitment made in a universe that gives no reason to expect long-term decisions to be honored.

That is a claim that marriage requires conditions, and that the conditions have been withdrawn from most of the people being lectured about it. Hand that argument to a reader who thinks family breakdown is the central American problem and he will find that Cohen agrees with him about what has been lost and disagrees about the address to send the complaint to. The disagreement with Wilcox is about whether you can produce confidence in the future by exhorting people who have no reason for it. This talk is the clearest statement of his side of that argument I have seen from him, and it contains no accusation against anybody.

The haven in a heartless world, at 4:31, is quoted from Christopher Lasch’s 1977 book, and Cohen names it only as an old book. It is a strange citation to leave anonymous, since Lasch’s argument was that the haven had been hollowed out by the therapeutic professions and the market, and Cohen is using the phrase as an ideal that some families reach. Whether he is endorsing Lasch, correcting him, or reaching for a familiar phrase is impossible to tell from the recording, and it is the one place where a reader would want a footnote.

Two passages carry the analysis.

At 5:24 he stops the flow to say he will not collapse race into class, and gives the argument about two college graduates with the same income, one of whom fields requests for help from poor relatives and is exposed to racism from the workplace to the police. That is the wealth-versus-income point and the kin-network point, delivered in ninety seconds without a chart, and it is the single most portable thing in the talk. It also answers, in advance, the objection that his structural story is a class story wearing a racial costume.

At 8:13 he names the thing that broke the data. Many measures of family violence activate only when people leave home. Teachers, clinicians, and clerks are the observers, and the lockdown removed them, so the numbers that came out of 2020 measure the observers as much as the violence. He said the same thing in April and it is sharper here. Anyone reading the pandemic literature on family violence without that sentence in hand will draw the wrong conclusion from a falling number.

And 10:56 is the line of the talk. Some of what is happening is the things that are not happening. That is a demographer’s habit turned into a sentence a general reader can carry: absences have consequences, births forgone, friendships never made, meetings that did not occur, and none of it registers in any count of events.

Now the weaknesses.

The confirmation-bias moment at 7:38 is admirable and unfinished. He says large shocks push things further in the direction they were already going, then says that might be an illusion, then says everywhere he looks he sees inequality growing, then proceeds for three minutes on the assumption that it is growing. Naming the bias and then not acting on it is worse than not naming it, because the acknowledgment buys credibility that the subsequent argument does not earn. On the substance he was partly right and partly wrong, which is what you would expect: pandemic-era learning loss and childcare disruption fell hardest on poorer children, and household income at the bottom rose sharply through the transfer programs, and wage compression at the low end over the following two years ran against the story he was telling. A man who spends his Decembers counting other people’s evidence made a directional forecast here on the strength of what he could see from his window, which he says at 8:35, and never went back to it in public that I can find.

The Bezos passage at 1:19 concedes and then abandons. He grants that one man’s wealth doubling does not affect him, then says the aggregate corrupts the economy, and the connective tissue is one sentence about a few firms dictating wages. That is the weakest link in a chain the whole talk hangs from, and he would demolish it in anyone else’s argument. The concentration story about employers is empirically serious, monopsony research is real, and it has nothing to do with the personal fortunes he opens with.

And the ending is a wish presented as a forecast. There is every reason to believe, he says, that the crisis will produce universal health care, child care, and paid family leave. In August 2020 that was a hope with a political condition attached, and he attaches the condition and then discards it in the same breath. None of the three arrived. The one that came closest, the expanded child tax credit, ran for six months and lapsed. It is the only sentence in five recordings where he says something will happen because he wants it to, and he closes on it.

For my file, this is the piece the biography most needed and did not have. Everything else in the record shows him checking somebody. This shows him theorizing, and the theory is coherent: structure enters the person through the family by way of confidence about the future, inequality operates by removing that confidence, and the removal shows up as decisions not made rather than as visible damage. That is a thesis, it is the same one underneath the divorce paper and the marriage-market work and the pronatalism arguments, and he has never stated it this clearly in print as far as I can see.

Two smaller things. The view count is the highest of the five, at nearly five thousand, and it is the least data-dense of them, which is either a fact about audiences or a fact about him. And the description, a short talk about what is on my mind as a family and inequality sociologist today, is the only one of the five that promises opinion rather than instruction, which suggests he knew the difference.

Transcript flags. At 1:09 “genie index” is Gini. At 4:42 “an old book” is Christopher Lasch, Haven in a Heartless World: The Family Besieged (1977), and you should name it if you quote the passage. At 8:02 “some people are trapped at home are but” is garbled. At 9:38 the Ivanka Trump reference is to the “Find Something New” campaign launched in July 2020, which dates the recording. At 11:24 “true universal health care” may be real universal health care. The talk appears to be scripted or read from notes rather than delivered live, given the absence of the verbal stumbles that fill his classroom recordings.

‘Joanna Pepin interviews Philip Cohen’ (Aug. 23, 2020)

0:00 Joanna Pepin introduces herself as being at the University at Buffalo and introduces Cohen and the textbook.

0:25 First question: what led him to become a family sociologist.

0:33 His answer, that inequality questions kept routing him back to families.

“I was interested in inequality, and a lot of the inequality questions I was thinking about kept leading me back to families, especially things having to do with the intersections of race, class, and gender. If you ask why women do more housework and child care, part of that is because they’re single parents, and that’s a family question. Why are more parents single now than they used to be? Who decides who’s married, and why are people married, and what are the consequences of that for health and well-being and income? I just kept coming back to family topics.”

1:20 The policy version of the same point.

“What is the government going to do? Is it going to give people money if they’re poor? Is that going to be based on their family structure? Is it going to penalize people for their family choices? Is it going to let people get married if they’re gay? All these things that have to do with people’s well-being and social inequality go through family. So that’s how I got led into it.”

1:52 Pepin notes the textbook’s life course approach and asks for the biggest transformation of American families.

2:06 His answer: two changes that arrived together over a couple of centuries, fewer children and women working outside the home. Fewer children means less care work at home, partly because women had other opportunities and partly the reverse, since women doing other things had fewer children.

2:41 Why he calls it foundational.

“Having fewer children changes the relationship between parents and children. It means we’re investing more in each child than we used to, so kids spend more years in school with more resources. It also means our relationships are longer. People are living longer, so you have fewer children and now you have a seventy- or eighty-year relationship with your children, and there’s only one or two of them, instead of having a forty-year relationship with eight or ten kids. It’s a whole different relationship.”

3:27 Pepin asks about a common misperception he finds himself correcting.

3:40 The decline narrative first, with a hedge.

“There’s a common sense that families are going down the drain in general, that in the good old days things used to be better. Some things used to be better for some people, some things used to be worse for some people. It’s hard to generalize that way.”

3:58 Then divorce, which is the substantive answer.

“Divorce is more common than it used to be a long time ago, like a hundred years ago or fifty years ago. But in the last ten or twenty years, divorce is actually becoming less common. That’s surprising to people, and it clues us into some important changes. People are getting married later, people are getting married after they have more education, there’s more selectivity in marriage. Some people are choosing not to get married, or they don’t have anybody they want to marry.”

4:39 What the decline is made of, stated without comfort.

“You have fewer people getting married just because that’s what you do, fewer people getting married because they’re stuck with somebody, fewer people stuck in marriages because they can’t support themselves on their own and so they can’t leave an abusive marriage. When you put them together, the fewer marriages and the marrying later have turned into a decline in divorce, even though divorce is more available than it used to be, which is great, and it’s happening less. But partly because marriage is available to fewer people. So it’s a mixed bag.”

5:31 Pepin asks what he has had to update for the third edition.

5:48 Same-sex marriage, and the measurement problem underneath it.

“In the second edition, same-sex marriage was just coming out, and we didn’t really have a lot of good data about what was going on with it. That’s improved. I worked really hard to try to get better information. It’s still pretty hard. A lot of states don’t record the gender of the people getting married, which seems odd, but they just have spouse one and spouse two on their marriage certificates. So the data is still blotchy. But we’re starting to learn more, and in a lot of ways we’re learning that same-sex married couples look pretty much the same as different-sex married couples.”

6:42 The faster-moving revision.

“At the same time, the rapid change that’s happening is on sex and gender and language and culture and attitudes. Transgender identities, non-binary identities. The language had to get revamped even though the last version of the book was only a couple of years ago. I used to have a whole section on androgyny, and now I don’t even talk about androgyny anymore. Now we have non-binary identities.”

7:24 Pepin asks him to speculate on the pandemic’s impact, noting that data collection is hard right now.

7:43 His framing principle, delivered as an aside.

“Things that are happening now will tend to continue happening. That’s just a way that society works. So working at home is going to be more common now forever.”

8:11 The disrupted side. Cancelled weddings, postponed childbearing, and the observation that postponement becomes permanent for some people, so the drop in marriage and childbearing will probably be large this year and next.

8:42 Inequality, prefaced by self-awareness.

“In terms of the subjects I pay most attention to, I think inequality is going to be exacerbated. I sound a little like a broken record on inequality, because I think everything’s related to inequality.”

8:56 The question underneath his whole program, stated more plainly here than anywhere else in the recordings.

“I’m interested in the things that we don’t see about families, like who gets to have a family. We talk a lot as if everybody’s in a family, but not everybody’s in a family, and some people aren’t in families because they don’t have access to the resources or the people. When gay marriage was illegal, it was, okay, there’s a bunch of people who can’t have the kind of family they want. But now we have people who are stuck with their families that they don’t want to be stuck with. We have trans young people who are living with families that don’t accept them. We have people living in abusive situations.”

9:39 School at home, and the magnification argument: children whose parents have education, resources, spare rooms, and computers against children whose parents have none of that.

9:57 The summary.

“All the gaps and inequalities we have, whether class and race or between happy and abusive, I just feel like the gaps are opening up right now, and it’s going to get more unequal before we get out of this.”

10:32 The close, on what follows for the discipline: a lot of work to do, not only to study these things but to fix them, and a hope that a semester of teaching and learning will turn up ways to address some of them.

Thoughts

Eleven minutes, a friendly interviewer who is his own former doctoral student, and no adversary anywhere in the frame. It is the softest recording in the file and it contains the two clearest statements of his position that exist on tape.

The first is at 4:39. He is asked about a misperception and gives the divorce decline, which is his best-known finding, and then does something almost nobody does with their own famous result: he itemizes what the good news is made of. Fewer marriages entered out of default. Fewer people trapped with someone. Fewer people unable to leave an abusive marriage because they cannot support themselves. And then marriage available to fewer people, which is the part that does not fit the story, and he says it in the same breath and calls the whole thing a mixed bag. A researcher protecting a headline finding leaves that last clause out. He puts it in, to a sympathetic interviewer, with no one pressing him.

The second is at 8:56, and it is the sentence I would build any essay on him around. Who gets to have a family. He has spent a career being read as the sociologist who says the traditional family is not in decline, and what he says here is that his real subject is the people outside the frame entirely: not counted in the marriage rate, not counted in the divorce rate, absent from the data because the thing they would have been counted for never happened. That is the same insight as some of what is happening is the things that are not happening, from three weeks earlier, and it is the same insight as the marriage-market work with the interviewer sitting across from him. The pattern of his mind is to ask what the denominator excludes.

And notice how he uses same-sex marriage in that passage. He reaches for it as the historical example of people barred from the family they wanted, and then pivots to people trapped in families they cannot leave, including trans teenagers living with parents who do not accept them and people in abusive homes. The two cases are structurally identical in his account: the constraint runs on access to resources and to other people, and it operates whether it locks you out or locks you in.

Three small things.

The androgyny detail at 7:02 is the best single piece of evidence in the file for how a textbook works as an artifact. He had a whole section on androgyny in an edition published two years earlier, and by 2020 the concept had been superseded in his own book by non-binary identity. That is a discipline’s vocabulary turning over inside one author’s revision cycle, reported without defensiveness and without celebration. Whatever a reader thinks about the substance, the mechanic is the same one that produced his complaint about generation labels: the category changes, and the trend line moves with it, and somebody has to decide whether the world moved or the instrument did.

The marriage certificate detail at 6:07 is a measurement anecdote he throws away. States record spouse one and spouse two rather than sex, so the administrative record of who married whom is unusable for the question everyone wants answered. He calls the data blotchy and moves on. That is the same category as the mandatory reporters vanishing from the family violence data and the observers vanishing from the child maltreatment counts. His most durable contribution may be that he keeps noticing when the instrument, rather than the world, produced the number.

And at 7:43 he states a forecasting rule so casually that it sounds like nothing: things happening now tend to keep happening. He then applies it to remote work, where it held, and in the same minute applies the opposite reasoning to weddings and births, where he expects the disruption to produce permanent losses through postponement. Both turned out roughly right, and the two claims run on different logics that he never reconciles. It is the closest thing he has to a stated method for talking about the future, and it is four seconds long.

Two more things.

He is a broken record on inequality and says so at 8:47, and the self-awareness does not change the fact. Asked what the pandemic will do to families, he answers that inequality will grow, which was the answer he gave to a different question three weeks earlier and the answer he gives at every level of the analysis from Bezos to the spare bedroom. A frame that explains everything explains less than it appears to, and his own joke is the acknowledgment that no correction follows.

And the interview format flatters him. Pepin was his doctoral student, published with him on the marriage-market work, and asks five questions with no follow-up. Every recording in this file has him talking to people who either agree with him or have no standing to push. There is no tape anywhere of Cohen being interrogated by someone who disagrees, which is a gap in the record on a man whose reputation rests on interrogating others.

For my file, this is the interview to mine for direct quotation, because it is the only one where he speaks in his own voice about what he is trying to do rather than explaining a chart. The biography currently derives his position from his writing. Three of these passages, the origin story at 0:33, the mixed bag at 4:39, and who gets to have a family at 8:56, would let him state it himself, and quoted speech does something in a profile that paraphrase of published work cannot.

Transcript flags. At 0:03 “university of buffalo” is the University at Buffalo, which is how the institution styles itself. At 0:11 the textbook title is garbled as “diversity in equality and social change” and is The Family: Diversity, Inequality, and Social Change. At 7:28 kovid is COVID. At 8:18 and 8:23 “that we’re gonna” is “that were going to,” which reverses the meaning of both sentences and matters: people who were going to get married and were going to have children. At 10:32 “upgrade news” is garbled beyond recovery and appears to be Pepin’s transitional remark; leave it out. The third edition he describes working on published in 2021, and the fourth in 2024, so this catches him mid-revision on the third.

‘COVID-19 Pandemic Overview’ (Aug. 25, 2020)

0:00 Opens the lecture, and lays out the plan: history and terms, the global situation, where the United States fits, the American failure, the overlapping crises, and the future.

0:37 Pandemic from the Greek for all people, meaning the worldwide spread of a new disease. The World Health Organization declared this one on March 11, 2020. The American epidemic is part of the global pandemic.

1:14 Precedents. The 1918 influenza pandemic, which he notes probably did not come from Spain, infected about a third of the world and killed around 50 million people including more than half a million Americans, against a much smaller world population. The 1957 and 1968 influenza pandemics killed about a million each. SARS in 2003 killed about 800 and was extremely frightening before it was controlled. H1N1 in 2009 killed about 200,000.

2:53 The virus. Discovered in 2019, probably from a bat to a person, possibly through another species, in or near Wuhan. SARS-CoV-2 causes COVID-19.

3:38 Why it is bad, in four parts.

“It’s a novel disease, which means we are not immune to it. As far as we know, nobody was immune when this started. And it’s very highly contagious, so it spreads very easily between people. All they have to do is interact or be close to each other, and if they’re not taking any precautions the virus transmits and nobody is immune. To make matters worse, it transmits asymptomatically. There are people who show no signs that they are sick who can transmit it, so it’s hard to avoid people who are transmitting the disease. It transmits through aerosols, which are tiny airborne particles you can get just from breathing, so you don’t have to spit or cough or sneeze on somebody to transmit the virus.”

4:27 Mortality. Seasonal influenza kills somewhere between 0.3 and 0.7 of every thousand infected. He puts COVID at roughly ten times that, perhaps six to ten per thousand, with the rate uncertain, and notes the seriously ill who survive.

5:12 The counts in late August. The world above 20 million confirmed cases and approaching 25 million, with more infections than confirmed cases. The United States above five million. Global deaths in the hundreds of thousands and American deaths approaching 200,000, which he calls about a quarter of the global total.

6:09 The world distribution. Started in China, spread to Europe, then the United States, which now has the most confirmed cases. India approaching three million, Brazil above three million, Russia approaching a million, South Africa at half a million.

6:58 Comparison with peer countries, defined as those above thirty thousand dollars of annual income and five million population. The United States has more cases per thousand than any of them by a wide margin, around 17, with Israel next and then Singapore. On deaths per million, five large rich countries were then higher: Sweden, Italy, Spain, the United Kingdom, and Belgium. He immediately says the cumulative comparison is misleading without the trajectory.

7:59 The trajectory chart, and the central finding of the lecture.

“In late April, when we had our peak, there were those five countries with higher peaks than us, including much higher, like Italy and Spain, many more deaths at that time per person in their populations. We all started to decline after that. But the key thing is that those countries had a faster decline and a more continuous decline. By June our daily deaths had stopped declining, and actually started rising again in July and August, which is virtually unique among the rich countries. Now we’re at about ten times or more deaths per day, relative to our population, than the other rich countries of the world.”

9:39 Racial and ethnic disparities. Black Americans with the highest death rate at 85 per hundred thousand, White, Asian and Pacific Islander Americans the lowest, Hispanic and American Indian populations between. The causes he lists: discrimination, inequitable access to good health care, work in front-line and essential occupations involving contact with the public, inequalities in income, education, and wealth, and housing quality and crowding.

11:02 CDC funding, cut from above seven and a half billion two years earlier by about a billion for the 2020 budget.

11:35 The National Security Council pandemic office, closed, and the warning from the Center for Strategic and International Studies that it was unclear who would be in charge at the White House in the event of a pandemic. He adds that this turned out to be true.

12:04 The ignored exercise. His administration ran a functional scenario gaming out a global pandemic originating in China, which produced recommendations that went unused, against the president’s claim in March that nobody could have foreseen it.

12:44 Published warnings. Ed Yong’s 2018 piece asking whether America was ready, on underfunded public health programs and stretched hospitals. Biden in the fall of 2019 saying the country was not prepared.

13:19 His summary of the foreknowledge question.

“This was not that much of a surprise. The details are always a surprise, but the fact that this was inevitable at some point, and that we were not prepared, was known.”

13:25 The messaging failure, framed as motive: the president more concerned with how it made him look than with dealing with the epidemic.

13:53 A montage of presidential clips running roughly ninety seconds, longer than the version he used in April. Totally under control. One person from China. It goes away in April with the heat. Eleven or twelve cases and many of them in the shade. Fifteen going down to close to zero. It will disappear like a miracle.

15:08 The compounding failures. Not enough testing from the beginning, so nobody knew who was infected. Without that, no contact tracing. Without containment, spread, with nothing stopping travel from New York to New Orleans for Mardi Gras. Numbers too large for tracing to work. Slow and weak policy once the federal government caught up, with no strong lockdown and no internal travel restrictions. Mismanagement of equipment and staff when New York was overwhelmed, so more people died than needed to.

16:53 Institutional outbreaks in nursing homes, prisons, and factories, largely unchecked at first, which then seeded the surrounding communities, which he notes are largely low income and minority.

17:17 The cultural failures: happy talk, mixed messages, a cynical attitude toward science and expertise from the top, conspiracy theories, and what he calls useless hero talk.

“This sort of useless hero talk. Oh, we’re warriors, we’re tough, we’re strong. That’s not how you fight a virus. Basically you fight a virus by acting weak and staying home, and we didn’t do that.”

17:56 The Italy case study, which is the analytical heart of the lecture. A steeper and higher spike than the American one, arriving about a month earlier, followed by a much steeper decline, so that by late August the United States had more than ten times Italy’s ongoing death rate while Italy prepared to reopen schools.

19:01 The Italian sequence, step by step. Two deaths at the start of February. First, a few northern towns locked down with checkpoints and barricades, which failed because the virus had already left. By early March, the whole northern region. Within about a week, all schools and sporting events nationwide. By the second week of March, a national lockdown.

19:50 What that lockdown contained, and the comparison he draws.

“Their lockdown was much stronger than anything we had in this country. You could not leave the house unless you were going to the doctor, to get necessary supplies, or to do an essential job, and the police would stop you and you had to explain what you were doing. We had nothing like that in this country. You could not travel between regions of the country. By and large you couldn’t go from one state to another. We never had that restriction.”

20:17 All non-essential workplaces closed, including factories, for five or six weeks. Then phased reopening as cases fell ahead of the death curve: travel within regions, some factories, most businesses with distancing and masks, then pools and gyms in late May, then theaters by June 15.

21:26 The endpoint he wants students to see.

“Now they have a low enough number of cases that they can do testing and tracing, isolate people who get infected, and contain the epidemic. We never reached that level of containment in this country. We never had that level of closure, and we never had a small enough number of cases that we could jump on them, isolate them, and stop outbreaks as they occur. So our epidemic is relatively uncontrolled still at this point. It’s only controlled to the extent that people are wearing masks and staying home as much as possible.”

22:05 Why the failure. Beyond the presidential decisions, a partisan attitude toward the science.

22:23 Four survey questions he says have correct answers, with party gaps. That social distancing slows the spread, agreed by 76 percent of liberal Democrats and 47 percent of conservative Republicans. That the virus spreads more easily than most other infectious diseases, 78 against 58. That there is not enough testing, 82 against 31.

23:20 His diagnosis.

“Science can answer these questions, but because of the way our politics corrupts our science, or our science fails to penetrate into our political bubbles, we are impaired from being able to do smart things.”

23:36 Misinformation. The claim that the pandemic was engineered for profit, the 5G theory, the claim that masks harm health, and fake cures, including a hydroxychloroquine post the president shared. He notes how hard this makes it for anyone who is not a full-time debunker.

24:42 Racism and xenophobia. White Americans treating it as a disease of non-White people, the same way people in Texas and Arizona treated it as a New York problem. Presidential language about the China virus, vandalism against Asian businesses, attacks on Asian people, and a clip of a rally crowd cheering the phrase kung flu.

25:47 The southern border, where he notes an inversion.

“At this point it’s probably better for Mexicans than for Americans to have the border closed.”

26:05 A clip of the president claiming that public health authority at the southern border prevented a catastrophe, followed by his correction that the American side, and the Rio Grande Valley in particular, has been extremely hard hit.

26:44 The economic crisis. Non-farm employment rising from about 130 million in the early 2000s, dropping in 2008, recovering past 150 million, then falling by 20 million in a single month in April.

27:56 Food lines in Queens set beside New York City lines from 1931.

28:10 Education. Online math participation dropped about 20 percent in higher-income zip codes in March and more than 60 percent in low-income ones, and the richer areas recovered by May while the poorer ones never did. Estimates of about seven months of lost learning on average without in-class instruction, more for Black and Hispanic students and much more for low-income students.

29:28 The other side of the choice, which he refuses to resolve. Hospitalization rates five to eight times higher for Black and Hispanic children than White children. And the exposure of the household: 4 percent of White seniors live with a school-aged child against 11 percent of Black seniors and 13 to 19 percent in other groups.

30:35 His conclusion on schools: there are no good choices.

30:42 Family violence, and the measurement problem he has now stated three times across the recordings.

“We don’t have great data on this, because the way we collect data on this is from people leaving their houses and doing things like going to work and going to school and going to the doctor, and a lot of that has not been happening. One study found that there were fewer visits to the emergency room with injuries related to domestic violence, but the injuries that were showing up were more serious. So it looks like a lot of people are having abuse happen in their homes but are not making it to the emergency room unless their injuries are very serious.”

31:21 The gender impact. Women with school-aged children were the group most likely to leave the labor force between February and April, with some evidence of men taking on more of the domestic work when home.

32:12 The mental health section: fear, isolation, separation from friends and from services, and despair at the accumulation of bad news.

32:44 A pause to address the students directly, which is the only moment of its kind in any of these recordings.

“I just want to pause to say here, if you are anxious and depressed, if you are thinking about suicide, you are obviously not alone. A lot of people are, and a lot of people are not talking about it. There are the numbers there for you to call and seek help at any time, and you should not feel like you’re the only one, or that you are burdening anybody by asking for that help. So please do.”

33:08 Survey figures on young adults reporting serious thoughts of suicide, rising through the 2010s and then a much higher figure in a June 2020 survey of adults under 25. He says he was astounded by it.

33:52 The worst-case arithmetic, flagged as speculation. About 177,000 deaths and 5.7 million confirmed cases, a case fatality rate near three percent, an infection fatality rate perhaps ten times lower if actual infections run to 50 million. Herd immunity possibly around 70 percent, which for 330 million people would mean roughly 230 million infected and perhaps 700,000 deaths, unless treatment improves or a vaccine slows transmission.

35:58 When it ends. Waves for months and hopefully not years. Tracing only works once numbers are low, since nobody can call a hundred thousand contacts a day. Limited world travel for an unknown period. Vaccines under test with unknown efficacy and safety, unlikely to affect students personally inside eighteen months, which he calls speculation. And a caveat on his own arithmetic: herd immunity is theory, and it may not arrive at 70 percent.

37:39 The advice. Follow real public health advice from state and local government rather than every fad, and then a clause: your sociology professor is probably a good source too.

38:03 Stay home if you can, granting that it is boring, frustrating, and lonely, and may be impossible to pull off.

38:27 Take care of yourself, since nobody alive has experienced this. Watch your friends, neighbors, and relatives, work out what they need, and provide it.

38:45 If distressed, find ways to help others, online, with money, through volunteering or activism, which gives a sense of purpose.

39:16 The close. The world, politics, society, and science will be different, career plans may have to change radically, and it is a time to think big about what should be done afterward.

This is the longest and most political of the recordings so far, and it is the opening lecture of a required introductory course. Not a guest talk, not an elective seminar, not a video for people who sought him out. The first thing a nineteen-year-old sees in Social Problems, fall semester, includes ninety seconds of presidential clips, a rally crowd chanting a racial epithet, a partisan knowledge slide, and at 37:57 the instruction that their sociology professor is a good source of pandemic advice.

Every factual claim in it is sourced and checkable. The clips are real, the CDC appropriations are real, the exercise happened, the Yong article exists. The question this recording raises is is that a man who wrote a book about the boundary between the scholar’s role and the citizen’s role crossed it in the first week of a course, in front of students who cannot leave, and the crossing came packaged with a recommendation that they treat him as an authority.

His defense is that there was no neutral version of that lecture in August 2020, and a professor who withheld the trajectory chart to appear balanced would have failed at the only job Fish thinks he has. That defense covers the charts. It does not cover the montage, the rally clip, or the clause at 37:57.

Now the strongest thing in the lecture, which is not the politics.

The Italy sequence from 17:56 to 21:26 is the best twenty minutes of teaching in this entire file. It is a counterfactual done properly. Same disease, worse start, higher peak, earlier arrival, and a better position five months later. Then the specific timeline of what Italy did, escalating from a few towns to a region to a national shutdown, with the detail that police stopped people and required an explanation. Then the reopening sequence, with the observation that cases were falling faster than deaths because deaths lag. A student comes out of that able to answer the question that dominated American argument all year, which is whether the outcome was fixed by circumstance. Cohen shows it was not, and he shows it with a case rather than an assertion.

The line at 17:43 is the one to keep. You fight a virus by acting weak and staying home. That is a sociologist noticing that a culture’s heroic register was the wrong tool, and it says in one sentence what a great deal of pandemic commentary took paragraphs to miss.

Three failures of his own standard.

The partisan knowledge slide at 22:23 does the thing he attacks in other people. He introduces four items as questions that have correct answers, and one of them is whether there is enough testing. He calls it uncontrovertibly true, just a true fact. Sufficiency is a judgment about a threshold, resource allocation, and what testing is for. There were serious people arguing at the time about testing strategy, targeting, and turnaround. He may be right about the policy and he has converted a policy position into a factual item and scored a partisan gap on it, which is the precise operation he objects to when the Institute for Family Studies presents a family ideal as an empirical conclusion. The other three items are closer to factual, and the causal story he attaches at 22:29, that Republicans believe their political leaders instead of the science, is an assertion about why the correlation exists rather than a finding.

The suicide comparison at 33:08 is a measurement error of the kind he built his reputation on catching. The earlier figures he cites are twelve-month prevalence. The June 2020 figure is thirty-day prevalence, from an online panel with a low response rate. A thirty-day number that exceeds a prior twelve-month number is partly an artifact of the windows, and any comparison of the two overstates the change by an unknown amount. He says he was astounded, and part of what astounded him was the instrument. The underlying concern was real, the direction was probably right, and the number as presented does not support the size of the jump.

To his credit, the passage at 32:44 is the most careful thing he does in any of these recordings. He stops the lecture, speaks to the students directly, tells them they are not alone, that many people are not talking about it, that seeking help is not a burden, and points them to the numbers on the slide. That is right, and it is the only moment across six hours of tape where he steps out of the analytic role to address a person rather than a cohort.

The worst-case arithmetic at 33:52 is his most honest passage and his least accurate forecast. He shows every step, labels it pure speculation, states the herd immunity assumption, and then at 37:13 comes back and says the assumption itself is unknown and may fail. American deaths passed his worst case of 700,000 in the autumn of 2021 and have since gone well beyond it. His worst case was optimistic, and the reason is the assumption he flagged: immunity at 70 percent did not stop transmission once variants and waning protection arrived. A forecast that fails on the premise its author identified as the weak point is a better performance than most, and it is still a failure.

For my file, two things.

This lecture and the April 3 one are the same lecture five months apart, which makes them the only place in the record where you can check him against himself on a short horizon. In April he said thousands would die, that nothing would break the slope, that waves and repeated shutdowns were coming, and that travel restrictions would outlast domestic ones. By August, 177,000 dead, the slope unbroken, waves arriving, and he repeats the same forecast with more evidence behind it. The stable predictions are the ones that come from arithmetic. The unstable ones come from assumptions about biology he had no standing to make and said so.

And the family violence measurement point now appears in three separate recordings across five months, in April, in June, and here. He said it before the data came in, he kept saying it, and it is the thing about the pandemic he was most reliably right about and least credited for.

Transcript flags. At 5:49 the world death figure reads as over 80,000, which is wrong by a factor of ten and should be over 800,000; check the slide before quoting. Kobit, covet, corvette, cobin, and chronovirus are all COVID or coronavirus. At 3:10 “somebody ate a bad or a bad bit somebody” is bat. At 3:28 “the viruses stars” is SARS-CoV-2. At 24:17 “a bad high druxy chloroquine” is hydroxychloroquine. At 13:03 “even joe biden running for president last fall” places that quote in fall 2019. At 14:35 “we’re a bridge” is garbled. At 33:36 “26 of adults under age 25” should be checked against the slide, since the underlying survey reported 25.5 percent for ages 18 to 24. Slides are at https://osf.io/9vw2a/ and will settle the death figure, the disparity rates, and the suicide chart.

‘Introduction to Social Problems’ (Aug. 29, 2020)

0:00 Lays out the lecture: what sociology and social problems are, the main theoretical perspectives, and the research methods.

0:24 Sociology as the science of society, the study of individuals, groups, and the social structures that emerge from their interaction, with attention to the role of those structures in creating problems and solutions.

1:00 A social problem defined as a condition or pattern of behavior with negative consequences for individuals, for the social world of families, education, and the economy, or for the physical world of housing and environment.

1:27 Gallup’s most-important-problem question in August 2020, where coronavirus dominates, followed by government and the economy, with everything that would normally rank high pushed down.

2:14 The objective and subjective duality.

“Objectively, does the particular condition exist? Do we have a pandemic? Yes, we have a pandemic, we have a virus which is spreading, which has killed a lot of people around the world. So that’s objective reality. But do we think it’s a problem, and how do we shape or define that problem in our collective minds? Do we think the problem is the pandemic? Do we think the problem is the way the government is dealing with it? Do we think the problem is the government telling us what to do? What is the problem?”

3:10 Social constructionism, with the illustration he uses to mark its limit.

“Social constructionism is the view that social problems only become problems when they’re perceived to be problems. If a meteor hit us and we were all obliterated, that wouldn’t really be a social problem. That would be the end of all problems. It’s called constructionism because it’s acknowledging that social reality is the meaning we attach to it. There is a reality out there beyond our consciousness, but in terms of society, what matters is how we construct it.”

4:06 The back and forth is iterative. Some problems emerge fast, like a pandemic, and some persist a long time, like racial inequality, and the defining, blaming, and fighting over solutions goes on continuously.

4:45 Stages of the process, with the caveat that they are categories for thinking rather than a sequence, and that some problems do not move through them in order.

5:09 Stage one, claims making. Somebody has to come forward and say this is a problem. With a pandemic there may be no single actor, but the disparities and consequences require someone to stand up.

5:53 Stage two, getting weight behind the claim, especially from government agencies willing to accept the definition and take on the role.

6:23 Stage three, negotiation and power struggle over whether the response is adequate, effective, and moving in the right direction.

7:01 Stage four, when invested groups conclude the established system will not produce the results they want and have to work outside it or change it radically. He notes that not every social problem reaches this.

7:43 Why courses on social problems focus on protest: it is the most explicit version of the process, where people gather and literally state what they think the problem is.

8:03 A photograph he took at the Women’s March the day after the 2017 inauguration, and the observation that people bring signs, friends, and relatives.

9:04 What protest does beyond making claims.

“In this process of making claims and having protests, people are also building identities around their definition of problems, and who else thinks it’s a problem, and who defines it the same way we do. The formation of a social group comes out of that process of making the demand that something be considered a problem.”

9:23 A photograph he took at the March for Life, where teenagers from religious schools came from around the country, and the same analysis applied.

“It’s not just people saying, hey, we think you should stop women from having abortions. It’s this process of we are all in this together, we all believe this, we reinforce it. I’m looking at my friend, my friend is really into it, I’m really into it, we’re really into it together. And it’s building solidarity and identity.”

10:12 C. Wright Mills and The Sociological Imagination, and the link between personal experience and the social world, described as the intersection of biography and history.

11:00 Personal troubles against public issues.

“If I’m hungry right now, that’s a personal trouble. I’m hungry, maybe I just need to go in the other room and have some food, or maybe I don’t have enough food. But it’s still one person who doesn’t have enough food. The point at which it becomes a public issue is when it affects a lot of people and we start to acknowledge that.”

11:29 The illustrations: cars lined up for free food in San Antonio, and bags of food at a drive in Des Moines.

12:07 Theory defined as a set of assumptions or propositions used to explain, predict, or understand, stated explicitly and systematically.

13:37 Why the theories were already in place.

“We may even be able to make predictions. We’ve seen pandemics before, we understand that they’re likely to take a certain course. If we could already in January, February say some intelligent things about what was likely to happen, it’s because we had experience and we already had theories about how pandemics work.”

14:04 Macro and micro as a continuum. Macro asks why this happens in one society rather than another, or now rather than in the past. Micro asks why an individual gets in line at a food drive.

15:05 Functionalism, traced to Durkheim, and the body metaphor: organs with distinct functions maintaining a balance, and institutions like family, politics, and religion working in some harmony to meet social needs.

16:18 Change as the problem, from that perspective, producing anomie.

“When society changes rapidly, when the social order changes rapidly, it disrupts that balance, and we end up not knowing what the rules are, what the norms are, how we should behave, how our institutions should work together, where individuals fit into the changing social order. This produces a state that Durkheim described as anomie, or normlessness.”

18:04 The functionalist question: where did the problem come from, and is it serving some function, the way a fever serves the body against an infection.

18:41 Merton, and the argument that crime may help mark the boundary between good and bad behavior, and poverty may motivate people to avoid destitution. He calls the poverty version cold-hearted and grants there is a logic to it.

19:29 “There’s a potentially faulty logic to this, which is that if you see something happen in society you assume there must be a good reason for it. Every society seems to have poverty and inequality, so it must be good, right? Like human beings have lungs, everybody’s got lungs, let’s see why we have lungs. You can see the potential logical problem in this metaphor is you tend to define things as good and then try to rationalize them after the fact, working from the assumption that they are good. So this tends to be politically a conservative theory, because it tends to be describing the status quo as somehow good, and it’s suspicious of rapid change.”

20:12 Conflict theory as the opposite, with a teaching disclosure: when we teach sociology we build up this opposition because it is easier to learn that way.

20:31 Society defined by conflict rather than order, held together through power and coercion, with social problems emerging from conflict between groups.

21:53 The attitude toward change reverses. Conflict theories are positive about social change, especially where the tension can be harnessed, and especially if the less powerful side wins.

22:33 Marx introduced with a qualification.

“Karl Marx was not an academic sociologist. He was a writer and philosopher, and really a political activist in the nineteenth century. He wanted to change society in what he saw as a progressive direction. But his framing, and the way he identified how society works, is really the basis for what we’re now simplifying into conflict theory.”

23:01 Workers who own nothing but their labor and owners who own capital, the proletariat and the bourgeoisie, brought together non-consensually and unequally.

23:56 Alienation, set beside anomie as a parallel condition arriving by a different route: workers do not control the process because the owner makes the rules, and do not own the product.

24:46 The contemporary illustration: iPhone factory workers in China who cannot afford iPhones, do not set how the factory runs, and produce for people in other societies.

25:24 Where the two theories part on the same fact.

“When the subordinate group, the weaker group, gets an awareness of their position, that is when they are ready to make change. This is what concerns or frightens functionalists, and what excites Marx and the conflict theorists.”

26:10 Feminist perspectives, introduced with a caveat that they are not all conflict theories, though they lean that way because of the focus on inequality between the genders.

27:14 Patriarchy defined as a male-dominated society or subsystem, family, workplace, or school, with the term originating in the family and extended outward.

27:55 Intersectional feminism, its origin in the position of Black women, and its extension to class and sexuality. Patricia Hill Collins, who he notes retired from his own department, on Black feminist thought. Angela Davis, from activism into academia. Audre Lorde, writer, activist, and poet.

30:00 An aside on the migration of the term.

“One of the interesting things about this is that for something that kind of came from academia, intersectional feminism has really emerged into politics in the last few years in a really interesting way, where you see people actually holding up signs at rallies that say intersectional feminism. Which if you’re old like me strikes you as a big change in the world.”

30:33 Interactionism as the third of the big three, a micro-level theory about how people create and maintain social reality through language, words, and symbols.

31:34 George Herbert Mead, and society as organized and patterned interaction among individuals, so that society is real at the macro level and built from interaction at the micro level.

32:12 The self as both mental and social.

“You can’t have a self if you never interact with anybody else. Our ability to see others in relation to ourselves is reflective. Once we have social interactions and they shape our identity and our personality, we know that when we act a certain way, when we say or do something, we can use our imaginations to predict how people will react, or to understand how they react when we’re seeing their reaction. So this reflective ability is what really creates the self.”

34:07 The summary table in speech: functionalists on order held together by institutions, conflict and feminist theories on tension and coercion and the engines of change, interactionists on definition, anticipation, and labeling.

35:20 The line that governs the whole lecture.

“The key thing is that most people are not one or another of these theories. We use different kinds of ways of thinking to ask different kinds of questions.”

36:33 Research methods. Survey research first, as probably the most common, with the tradeoff stated in one breath: you can ask many people efficiently and get answers to questions like whether older people support Trump more than younger people, and it is not a rich question and will not tell you about their hopes and dreams.

37:23 Secondary data analysis, and his own practice.

“Most sociologists are not actually doing those surveys. We’re using the surveys that other people have done. This is what we call existing data analysis or secondary data analysis. Someone has done a survey, or we’ll pool all of our resources, through the government, and say let’s do a big survey, and then we’ll all analyze it. I do a lot of research using surveys. I don’t conduct a lot of surveys. I conduct a few, but mostly I’m getting the data that someone else has collected and analyzing it.”

38:02 Experiments, less common in sociology because of ethics and construction difficulty, and not necessarily reflective of the world, and useful for specific questions about response and learning under different conditions.

38:55 Qualitative research: in-depth interviews, observation, participation. And its cost.

“Qualitative research is much more time intensive, in the sense that you’re spending a lot of time studying a relatively small number of people, and there’s a lot of interpretation that has to go into making these results meaningful.”

39:47 Historical and comparative methods, comparing countries or one country across time, on questions like why some societies became rich, what causes civil wars, and what happens when democracy breaks down.

Twenty-four thousand views, twenty-five times the audience of anything else in this file, and it is the recording with the least of him in it. Somebody’s syllabus is assigning it. The largest audience Cohen has ever reached with a lecture that I have seen so far came from doing the ordinary work of his job well, and it dwarfs the reach of the fights.

The lecture is also the answer to a question the rest of the file raises. Two days earlier he opened Social Problems with presidential clips and a rally chanting a slur. This is the next lecture in the same course, and there is no politics in it at all. When he teaches conservative theory he teaches it, and when he criticizes it he criticizes the logic rather than the politics.

That passage at 19:29 is the best thing in the lecture. He gives functionalism its strongest form, the fever fighting the infection, then Merton on crime, then poverty, which he calls cold-hearted while granting the logic. Then he takes it apart on the ground it stands on: the body metaphor licenses you to assume that whatever exists has a purpose, and then you reason backwards to the purpose from the assumption. Everybody has lungs, let us find out why we have lungs, therefore every society has poverty, let us find out why poverty is good. He identifies the conservatism of the theory as a consequence of the metaphor rather than as a partisan property, which is the honest version of the criticism.

And then he does something that his blog almost never does. He gives conflict theory the identical treatment structurally, notes at 20:22 that the opposition between the two is a teaching device rather than a fact about the field, and closes at 35:20 by telling students that nobody holds one of these positions and that they are question-generating instruments. A man who is often accused of prosecuting from a fixed position spends forty minutes teaching that theoretical positions are tools you pick up and put down.

Three things carry beyond the classroom.

The construction passage at 2:14 is the most useful thing in the lecture for a general reader. The pandemic exists. What the problem is remains open: the virus, the government’s handling, or the government telling people what to do. Anyone who lived through 2020 watched that fight and mostly did not have the vocabulary for it, and he hands it over in ninety seconds without indicating which answer he prefers. Set that beside the previous lecture, where he had made his own answer unmistakable, and you have the two halves of the citizen scholar problem in a single week of one course.

The March for Life passage at 9:23 is the one that would surprise readers who know him only as a combatant. He photographed the march, and he analyzes the teenagers from religious schools with the identical apparatus he applies to the Women’s March, and the analysis is respectful. The solidarity is real, the identity work is real, and the mechanism is the same on both sides. He does not editorialize. For your purposes that passage answers the charge that he cannot handle a movement he disagrees with as a sociological object rather than a target.

And at 37:23 he tells his students something about himself that the rest of the record only implies. He does not collect data. He analyzes what other people collected. That sentence explains an enormous amount: why measurement is his obsession, why he audits instruments rather than gathering fresh evidence, why his reflex when a number moves is to ask whether the survey changed, and why his disputes with ethnographers run the way they do. A researcher who lives entirely inside other people’s instruments will be exquisitely sensitive to what those instruments do and unmoved by the claim that presence in the field is its own warrant. His method and his quarrels have the same source, and he states it in one aside while explaining research designs to freshmen.

Two weaknesses, both small.

The qualitative passage at 38:55 is thin next to the survey passage. Interviews, observation, participation, time intensive, lots of interpretation required. It is accurate and it does not convey why anyone would do it or what it can reach that a survey cannot. The survey section gets its tradeoff stated with real specificity. The qualitative section gets a cost with no corresponding account of the benefit, and a student would come away unsure why that method exists.

And intersectionality gets nine minutes of names and a promise to return, which is fine for an intro lecture, and it is the one section where he tells students to go look people up rather than explaining the concept. He names Collins, Davis, and Lorde and never states what the concept claims, beyond that different inequalities interact. Given how contested the term is in public argument, a definition would have served students better than a reading list.

Transcript flags. At 15:24 “email durkheim” is Émile Durkheim (1858–1917). At 17:14 and 25:14 “enemy” is anomie. At 18:46 Robert Merton (1910–2003) is credited with “dysfunctionalism,” and the term he actually coined is dysfunction, alongside manifest and latent functions; check the slide, since the concept of latent function is what the crime and poverty examples illustrate, and the poverty argument is usually credited to Herbert Gans (1927–2023) in his 1971 essay on the uses of poverty. At 19:50 “let’s see why we have loves” is lungs. At 22:37 Karl Marx (1818–1883) is dated correctly in the chapter title. At 23:03 “the economic director of capitalism” is probably the economic structure. At 31:35 George Herbert Mead (1863–1931). C. Wright Mills (1916–1962) at 10:19, The Sociological Imagination published 1959. Patricia Hill Collins (b. 1948), Angela Davis (b. 1944), Audre Lorde (1934–1992). At 5:12 “emergency claims making” is emergence and claims making, two stages run together.

Posted in Sociology | Comments Off on Sociologist Philip N. Cohen

Herb K – Recovery Teacher

Atlanta, the first days of July 2015. Around fifty-seven thousand members of Alcoholics Anonymous filled the convention halls and the stadium for the fellowship’s eightieth anniversary. Herbert Kaighan (b. c. 1940) was there with his family, celebrating two things at once: his seventy-fifth birthday and his thirty-first year without a drink. It was his first International Convention. He spent part of it counting.

Over three days he tallied more than two hundred and twenty topic meetings. Then he sorted them. By his count, about thirty percent touched the book Alcoholics Anonymous, the Twelve Steps, spiritual awakening, or the daily practice of Steps Ten, Eleven, and Twelve. The rest were about something else. Fourteen months later, on September 13, 2016, he published the arithmetic in an open letter to AA’s General Service Office leadership and Board of Trustees under a single question: when did AA meetings become the AA program?

The letter is a claim he has been making for four decades. Meetings gave him fellowship and kept him from drinking. They did not change him. The change came from a precise personal application of twelve written instructions, and he thinks the fellowship that owns those instructions has drifted away from teaching them. He named the slogans he considers dangerous, the ones about putting the plug in the jug and making meetings, and wrote that they may function as death sentences. He noted that the Big Book mentions meetings twice. He proposed that the 2020 convention in Detroit be built around the renewal of AA’s first legacy.

He was seventy-six years old, unpaid, with no office and no standing in the service structure, writing to a board about a book.

The man who wrote that letter had spent thirty years in rooms where nothing worked. He entered a Claretian seminary and stayed seven years, preparing for the priesthood, and left before ordination. He pursued graduate study in psychology for about four years and went through therapy for longer. He tried the self-improvement movements available to an educated Southern Californian in the 1970s and early 1980s. He learned the vocabularies. He acquired the religious one, then the psychological one, then the therapeutic one. His conduct held steady. In the open letter he described the whole stretch in five words: “a seeker but not a finder.”
retreat

Alongside it he built a career in human resources consulting, work he has described as forty years and elsewhere as forty-one, advising large insurance brokerages, retiring in November 2006. The corporate trade left a mark on everything he later built. He thinks about spiritual change the way a consultant thinks about competency: assignments, sequence, worksheets, definitions, review, accountability, a binder.

Mary Catherine Flanagan (1941–2018) came to California from Chicago in 1962 and took a human resources job at Blue Cross/Blue Shield. Part of her work was welcoming new employees. One of the new hires was Herbert Kaighan. They married in April 1966 and had three children: Christina, then Kymberly in 1970, then Michael in 1972. Mary kept the home and volunteered through the parish schools, St. John Fisher through the 1980s, later Bishop Montgomery High School. When the children left, she started giving time to the Daughters of Mary and Joseph Retreat Center on Crest Road in Rancho Palos Verdes, above the ocean, and rose to become its first lay director. She held that post until she retired in 2006, the same year her husband left consulting. Her family remembered that she ended phone calls by telling people “to have as much fun as possible.” She was also an alcoholic.

Her treatment, in 1984, is what put Herb in a treatment center. He went to support her. Several weeks in, the staff asked him to stop drinking while she was in the program. He agreed, and the next day, February 21, 1984, became his sobriety date. Then they asked him to write out his history with alcohol, honestly.

The writing took about an hour. On the page a thirty-year pattern assembled itself, beginning with his first drink at twelve: he drank everything available, blacked out, passed out, and woke in his own vomit. What unsettled him was not the presence of a drinking problem. It was that the evidence had been in plain sight for three decades and he had never seen it. His mind had been sorting experience the entire time, keeping the picture of himself intact. He has described this since as a closed system, and it became the center of his teaching.

In April he went to his first AA meeting and introduced himself as Herb, exploring whether he was an alcoholic. After several meetings he dropped the qualifier. The elders told him to get a sponsor. The sponsor told him to call daily, attend daily, and be of service. He did all of it for four years and stayed sober, and by his own account remained restless, irritable, and discontented, in trouble at work and at home, a man without internal governing principles.

That gap is the load he has been carrying ever since. In his reading of Step One, the wreckage a drinker leaves behind is the first half. Jobs, money, health, and marriages can improve once the drinking stops. The second half concerns the man’s inability to regulate his own thinking, release a grievance, tolerate an outcome he did not choose, or stop managing other people’s conduct and opinions. The alcohol can be gone while the bondage of self stays.

In 1988 he heard a man at a meeting describe being changed by working the Twelve Steps as the book gives them. He asked the man for help. Over roughly a year they went through reading, prayer, writing, disclosure, inventory, and amends. By the end of Step Nine, Kaighan says, he had been radically changed in how he thought, felt, and behaved, and he insists on the grammar: the thing was done to him, not by him. His part had been willingness. His career problems resolved. His marriage healed. He calls this an authentic spiritual awakening and he draws the definition from Appendix II of the book, which distinguishes the sudden spiritual experience from the slower educational variety. No vision, no voice, no conversion drama. The evidence sits in changed behavior.

Then he did the entire Step process four more times over fifteen years with four different guides. Each guide asked different questions. One took him through what alcohol had done to his body, another through the failures of his will, another through his inherited ideas about God. He describes the Steps as a spiral rather than a checklist. A man comes back to the same paragraph with less capacity for self-deception and finds material he could not see the first time.

This explains the shape of what he built. Anyone can watch it work. The 2026 workshop meets on Zoom, Tuesdays, four to five thirty in the afternoon Pacific time, starting January 6. Registration is free. The suggested donation is five dollars a week for technology, administration, and materials. A volunteer named Nan handles the mailing list. Participants are asked to bring an unmarked Fourth Edition of the Big Book, a binder, paper, and a pen, to pray daily, read weekly, listen to the recorded commentary for each Step, write weekly, and show up to discuss.

The assignments run to thirty-three over twelve months, and they read like a training manual written by a man who does not trust vague introspection. Assignment One asks the participant to compose and pray a Set Aside Prayer: a request that everything he thinks he knows about himself, his unmanageability, the Steps, and God be set aside so he can have an open mind and a new experience of all four. It is prayed every morning and again before touching any assignment. Assignment Two gives four questions to hold while reading the front matter, with the instruction not to answer them but to ask them, and then, after the reading is done, to write one sentence to one page on each. Then the dictionary work begins. Look up anonymous. Look up recovered. Later, allergy, phenomenon, craving, addiction, reprieve, malady, concede, willfulness, solipsism, bedevilment. Write the definitions out. Highlight while reading, always, whether or not the instruction says to.

Step One breaks into three weeks of worksheets: body, mind, will. Step Two asks the participant to write what he believes about God, with the qualifier that the question is not what he knows, feels, wants, or has been told. Then he rereads the chapter “We Agnostics” in a second color, marking only what he resists, and a third time in another color, marking only what he can accept, and from that second list he chooses attributes he needs a higher power to have, and writes out a concept. Step Three asks him to identify a relationship, Architect, Healer, Teacher, Coach, and to compose his own prayer modeled on the one in the book.

Step Four is an audit. Column one is a list of resentments, with resentment defined as anger still felt in the present moment rather than remembered. Column two lists causes, lettered a, b, c, one per incident. In the middle of these instructions Kaighan drops an aside about his own list: “I had A-Z for my father.” Column three is a printed worksheet, three at a time. Column four asks the five questions from page sixty-seven and adds others, and the instruction attached to it draws the line he draws everywhere: this is not self-blame, it is taking responsibility for your own anger, and your reaction is the problem. For deep resentments he tells the participant to write a prayer for their removal and pray it every morning, one prayer per person, suggesting he do it on his knees, and to keep at it until he knows in his body that the resentment is gone. Eight resentments, eight prayers. He warns that the first one may take many months.
Amazon

The fear inventory begins with an uncensored dump, then a walk through life in brackets, grammar school, each year of high school, each year after. Then the participant takes one fear onto its own page and asks why he has it, and asks again of the answer, and again, pushing past comfort until he hits a wall or the answers start circling. The sex inventory runs from earliest memory forward and ends by turning the ninth question, what should we have done instead, into a list of principles the man is willing to live up to, with a note attached: no one here is the arbiter of anyone else’s sexual conduct, and the book has no opinion. Step Eight moves onto three-by-five cards, one per person or institution, carrying the harm, the act, the damage done, and the proportional repair. Every card gets reviewed with a guide before the amend is made, and if the guide has no experience with that kind of amend, the participant finds someone who does.

The 2026 supporting document runs seventy-one pages of graphics, commentary, prayers, and worksheets, and includes material from the DSM on personality disorder. The bibliography is where the traditionalism cracks open. Thomas Keating (1923–2018) is there, and Thomas Merton, and Thich Nhat Hanh, Shunryu Suzuki, Ken Wilber, Teilhard de Chardin, Gurdjieff, Byron Katie, Viktor Frankl, William James (1842–1910), Judith Herman’s Trauma and Recovery, Gregory Boyle, Richard Rohr, and four books by the psychologist Allen Berger. One entry carries a ranking in Kaighan’s own hand: Frederic Luskin’s Forgive for Good is second in importance in his development, behind the Big Book.

So the man who tells AA to return to one text has assembled a reading list drawn from Cistercian contemplatives, Zen teachers, integral theory, and trauma psychiatry. His fidelity attaches to a sequence of actions, not to a sealed canon. Anything that helps a man complete the actions is admissible. The Steps are the process; the rest is equipment.

Two collaborations organize his later work. With Berger, a clinical psychologist sober since July 1971 who came into recovery through a program for Marines returning from Vietnam, he teaches emotional sobriety. Berger supplies the language of dependency, self-esteem, differentiation, and the true self. Kaighan supplies Step Ten as the daily instrument and the distinction between not drinking and not needing the world to arrange itself around you. For a Berlin group they built a thirty-six month rotation: Kaighan on a Step one month, Berger on the same Step the next, both together in the third, twelve Steps deep. With Luskin, director of the Stanford Forgiveness Projects, he teaches forgiveness as a process rather than an event, defined by what it excludes: it does not require condoning, forgetting, tolerating, staying, or reconciling. Kaighan wrote the foreword to Luskin and Lyndon Harris’s The Forgive for Good Recovery Workbook, published by New Harbinger in April 2025, which brings a research-based secular method into the same room as Step Four.

His own books are self-consciously unliterary. Twelve-Step Guide to Using The Alcoholics Anonymous Big Book came out from Capizon Publishing in 2004, a hundred and forty-four oversized pages built around assignment focus and intent. His description of it on a recovery bookseller’s page is flat: “It is a book of instructions.” No commentary, no editorializing, no personal experience. Twelve Steps to Spiritual Awakening: Enlightenment for Everyone followed from the same press in 2010 at three hundred and fifty pages, extending the claim past alcoholism to anyone trapped in illusion, fear, resentment, and the need to control. Hazelden published Practicing the Here and Now in 2017, two hundred pages on Step Eleven and what he calls intentional consciousness. A revised edition of the 2010 book was listed for pre-order through Mascot Books in the summer of 2026. In his author note he sets out the mission in a sentence: “To help others get on a spiritual path and stay on it.”

The contemplative line is more specific than the books suggest. He began a daily meditation practice from the Step Eleven instructions in 1989. In 1990, by his account, Thomas Keating initiated him into centering prayer, and he has practiced it every day since and led a centering prayer group at the Mary & Joseph Retreat Center for decades. That is the same center his wife directed. She died at home on March 27, 2018, after almost fifty-two years of marriage. He kept teaching in her building.

The credentials accumulated in institutions that rarely share a table. He completed a three-year program for certification as a spiritual director, which he dates to 1989 and one of his profiles dates to 1990. He taught a full-semester course in Twelve-Step spirituality to fourth-year theologians at St. John’s Seminary in Camarillo, ran workshops through Loyola Marymount’s Los Angeles Center for Spirituality, and taught in the Los Angeles County Department of Mental Health’s clergy academy. He served as outreach coordinator for the Thelma McMillen Center at Torrance Memorial Medical Center and gave spiritual counseling at an intensive outpatient program in Culver City. Catholic formation, twelve-step fellowship, clinical treatment, and county mental health each got a piece of him.

What he did that others in the Big Book revival did not do is publish the apparatus and give it away. HerbK.com holds the recorded workshops, the assignment manual, the seventy-one page document, the participation agreement, the Spanish translations, the Berlin talks, and fifty-two recordings from a previous year-long cycle. The site carries the standard disclaimer that it is neither endorsed nor approved by Alcoholics Anonymous World Services. The monthly Step Guide meeting, last Tuesday of the month, runs as a train-the-trainer group, recorded and posted for other time zones, with a recorded series called “Becoming a Lantern.” The rules there are thin by design. Participants should have finished the Step work or be finishing Step Nine. The list is confidential and is not a referral service. “We do not take roll”, the page says, and regular attendance is not required. The lantern gives light. It does not own the road.

By 2024 he was posting that his energy, stamina, and resilience had decreased, and asking the international twelve-step community to pick up the baton and run their own workshops. He did not retire. He narrowed. In 2025, he remarried. In 2026, in his mid-eighties, he was still running the Tuesday workshop, the Step Guide meeting, the centering prayer group, emotional sobriety sessions with Berger, and forgiveness sessions with Luskin, including a three-day retreat in June on the Palos Verdes bluffs.

A 2015 newspaper interview has him retiring in 1996 from consulting to insurance brokerages; his own biography says November 2006. He describes forty years in human resources in one place and forty-one in another. His certification as a spiritual director is dated 1989 by him and 1990 by a profile written about him. The workshops are dated to twenty years in one statement and twenty-seven in another. His birth date appears nowhere; it has to be inferred from a line about his seventy-fifth birthday falling in the summer of 2015. He named the man who guided him through the Steps in 1988 nowhere I can find. There is no controlled outcome data on any of it. The evidence for his method consists of his own testimony, four decades of workshop practice, and the accounts of participants.

His claim that the Steps as written are the only program of recovery will read as too narrow to anyone whose sobriety was assembled from medication, therapy, community, religion, mutual aid, and some Step work. His complaint about meetings lands hardest on the people who need meetings most, since the room is where a man first hears his own story in someone else’s mouth, and Kaighan himself got four sober years out of exactly that before he ever opened the book properly. And a twelve-month curriculum with dictionary assignments, weekly writing, printed worksheets, and a year of homework selects for people who can do a year of homework. The population that can meet his commitment is not the population in the worst trouble.

Set against that is the thing he identified, which travels well past alcoholism and past America. Practices that begin as preparation turn into substitutes for the work they were meant to prepare. Attendance stands in for inventory. Identification stands in for surrender. Discussion stands in for repair. Spiritual language stands in for spiritual change. Years of good standing become evidence that no further examination is required. Any institution that trains people can be audited on this, and most fail the audit, and the failure is comfortable for everyone inside it. Kaighan ran the audit on his own fellowship at seventy-six with a legal pad and a program of meetings, and published the number.

The convention he wanted redirected never met. Detroit 2020 was canceled in the pandemic. Its theme had been set as “Love and Tolerance Is Our Code,” not the one he proposed. When the fellowship next gathered, in Vancouver in July 2025 for its ninetieth anniversary, the theme was “90 Years – Language of the Heart.” His letter changed nothing at the top.

What he built instead sits on a website, free, in three languages, with a binder’s worth of worksheets, a monthly call for the people who guide other people, and a standing instruction to set aside everything you think you know before you begin.

Posted in Addiction | Comments Off on Herb K – Recovery Teacher

Live Questions in Philosophy

Philosophy has three prestige systems that overlap. Core analytic work in metaphysics, epistemology, language, mind, and logic still buys the most standing inside elite departments. Interdisciplinary work on artificial intelligence, sentience, democracy, and scientific practice draws the funding and the outside attention. Public-facing philosophy buys visibility that converts into book sales. A career can sit high in one system and low in another. Most confusion about who counts comes from mixing the three.

The first live question runs through artificial intelligence, and two questions travel together under that heading. One asks whether a large language model understands anything, holds concepts, acts for reasons, or acquires interests that make it a subject rather than an instrument. The other asks who decides what these systems optimize for, whose claims register in alignment, and whether private firms are becoming governing authorities without any democratic warrant. David Chalmers (b. 1966) frames the first question better than anyone, and has done so for thirty years. His talent is to identify a possibility before the field knows whether to take it seriously, which he did with the hard problem, then with virtual reality, and now with machine consciousness. The NYU Center for Mind, Brain, and Consciousness, which he directs with Ned Block, moved model sentience and machine moral status from the fringe into mainstream philosophy of mind. The literature has since arrived at something like a structural stalemate, where several positions remain defensible.

Seth Lazar at the Australian National University is the most productive answer-builder on the political side. He treats these systems as infrastructure that allocates authority and governs conduct, and his work on algorithmic cities and automatic authorities has reached policy audiences, including a United Nations development report. His MINT Lab joins normative philosophy to computing and institutional design. Raphaël Millière at Oxford is the rising star, with the American Philosophical Association’s AI2050 early-career prize in 2025 and a permanent Oxford post the same year.

The laboratories now hire philosophers. Anthropic runs a model welfare program, Google DeepMind has begun applying scientific theories of consciousness to its own systems, and Meta lists AI wellbeing among its concerns. NYU has hosted sessions on the findings of those corporate welfare assessments. Philosophy has acquired a wealthy patron for the first time since the Cold War funding of logic and decision theory, and the patron has preferences. “Could the model suffer?” and “How should it be aligned?” both flatter the buyer. “Who owns it?”, “Whose labor trained it?”, and “Should this system exist?” do not. Carmody Grey declined a collaboration with Anthropic on close to those grounds, arguing that the industry’s interest in the humanities risks converting critique into branding. One can disagree with her judgment and still see that she named the incentive correctly. This is agenda control rather than censorship, and agenda control has always been the more effective of the two.

The second question concerns where sentience begins. It now covers human infants, cognitively impaired adults, mammals, fish, insects, cephalopods, and artificial systems. Jonathan Birch at the London School of Economics has become the leading answerer. The Edge of Sentience offers a framework for decision under uncertainty instead of promising a theory of consciousness first. His earlier work helped put octopuses, crabs, and lobsters inside British animal-sentience law. LSE launched the Jeremy Coller Centre for Animal Sentience in 2025 with four million pounds and Birch as director, which shows how a department well below Oxford in general standing can become the institutional center of one question. Birch is the cleanest case in the discipline of a man gaining status by answering. He built an evidentiary framework, connected it to legislation, and then built an institution around it.

The third question belongs to social epistemology. The old question asked what knowledge is. The live one asks how intelligent people, each responding to evidence, end up in opposed worlds, and what happens when scores and rankings begin to reshape the values they were meant to record. C. Thi Nguyen at Utah is the outstanding framer here. He finds a phenomenon, gives it a name that sticks, and shows that it connects ordinary life to agency, technology, and politics. Echo chambers, games, value capture, and scoring systems all now circulate as vocabulary that other people use. Games: Agency as Art won the APA book prize, and The Score has extended his reach beyond the profession. Kevin Dorst at MIT is the rising answerer, using formal models and experiments to show how ambiguity and reasonable differences in priors can produce polarization inside rational cognition. He took tenure in 2024 and MIT’s Levitan Prize in 2026. Cailin O’Connor at UC Irvine builds the models that give the literature cumulative structure. Utah’s departmental rank stays modest, which tells you how far an individual reputation can outrun the standing of a department.

The fourth question moved political philosophy away from ideal institutions and toward domination inside actual ones. When do employers exercise private government? What does political equality require once wealth buys influence? What forms of protest, punishment, policing, and border enforcement remain legitimate under unjust conditions? Elizabeth Anderson (b. 1959) at Michigan is the rare figure who both asks a question that changes the object under discussion and supplies enough theory to make it answerable. Amia Srinivasan (b. 1984) holds the Chichele chair at Oxford and has a gift for exposing assumptions the regular participants in a debate have stopped noticing. Tommie Shelby at Harvard is the strongest systematic answerer, taking ghettos, racial solidarity, punishment, and abolition, reconstructing the best version of the position he opposes, and following the argument. Niko Kolodny at Berkeley works the purely analytic side of equality and authority. Daniel Wodak is the man to watch, since his argument that political equality means equal coauthorship of law reopened a question established egalitarian theory had treated as settled. The leading cluster is NYU, Oxford, Berkeley, and Michigan together.

Philosophy of science supplies the fifth question, about what models explain, when values enter science properly, and why disciplines become conservative. Jenann Ismael at Johns Hopkins asks how temporally situated agents fit into the world physics describes, and she has moved from specialist standing to something larger, with a Guggenheim in 2024 and selection as the 2027 Romanell Lecturer. David Wallace at Pittsburgh sits at the answering pole with his defense of the Everett interpretation, a position committed enough to be wrong. Pittsburgh and Irvine remain the institutional leaders.

The sixth question, grounding and metaphysical dependence, remains alive and has stopped expanding. Kit Fine (b. 1946) is still the supreme framework-builder, with Jonathan Schaffer, Karen Bennett, Ted Sider, and Shamik Dasgupta developing rival accounts. The strongest recent work distinguishes types of explanation or applies the tools to social entities such as money, race, and law. NYU and Rutgers remain its highest-status homes. Metaphysics keeps producing internal prestige and has less external momentum than it did a decade ago.

Population ethics forms the seventh. Derek Parfit (1942–2017) still sets the agenda posthumously, and Hilary Greaves, Johann Frick, and John Broome have produced the serious attempts at answers. This area is moving down institutionally while remaining hard intellectually. Oxford’s Global Priorities Institute closed at the end of July 2025. Longtermism now attracts adversarial scrutiny, which helps the philosophy and hurts anyone whose standing depended on presenting one contested framework as the natural output of impartial reasoning.

The eighth question concerns the discipline. Should philosophy stay organized around the European canon and twentieth-century analytic categories? What follows from treating Chinese, Indian, African, Islamic, and Indigenous philosophy as sources of argument? Sally Haslanger made social structure and ideology respectable inside core analytic work. Edouard Machery helped establish experimental methods. Specialty recognition has grown faster than departmental power, and the prestige hierarchy still rewards familiar analytic strengths.

On the question of who gains from asking rather than answering, philosophy pays differently from the sciences, because its product is partly the question. The highest-yield move is coining a portable phrase. The hard problem, epistemic injustice from Miranda Fricker (b. 1966), racial liberalism from Charles Mills (1951–2021), private government, value capture, the edge of sentience: each name travels into law, medicine, computer science, and journalism, and carries its author’s standing along with it. The currency of hiring stays technical, so the durable careers found a research program that others must then work inside. Chalmers, Fine, Anderson, and Haslanger all did that. Nguyen and Srinivasan are doing it now.

Among departments, Johns Hopkins is the clearest riser, from thirty-first in the previous Philosophical Gourmet Report to a tie for sixteenth, with Ismael, Hanna Pickard, Ian Phillips, and Yitzhak Melamed giving it an identity instead of a collection of stars. Texas at Austin made the largest jump near the top, from seventeenth to a tie for eighth. Berkeley has climbed from fourteenth in 2011 to a tie for sixth. Edinburgh has gone from twelfth in Britain to third. Columbia fell from twelfth to twenty-first. Pittsburgh dropped from fourth to eighth overall while its philosophy of science stayed first tier. Harvard slipped from a tie for seventh to a tie for tenth. Departments are small, so a handful of hires and retirements move them a long way, and these numbers measure reputation inside existing faculty networks rather than intellectual quality. NYU remains the most prestigious department in the ordinary sense. Oxford is the institution best placed to set the interdisciplinary agenda, since its Institute for Ethics in AI runs a continuing program on automated government, content moderation, power-seeking systems, and the distribution of technological power.

The hardest closure of questions now comes from governing boards and legislatures. Texas A&M’s regents restricted teaching on race, gender, and sexuality, and Martin Peterson was directed to remove selections from Plato’s Symposium from a course on contemporary moral issues. He resigned a tenured chair and moved to Southern Methodist University. Texas Senate Bill 37 has the University of Houston reviewing roughly forty percent of its core curriculum. Wyoming is dropping its philosophy major for students entering in 2027. Dundee plans to end philosophy as a named degree, Hertfordshire is eliminating it, Monmouth College is closing its major, Ohio legislation ended the major at Toledo, and Georgetown has suspended doctoral admissions. British humanities faculties have shed close to four thousand posts. A MacArthur-funded project now exists to count the shrinkage.

Inside the discipline, sex and gender remains the clearest case of soft closure, and both sides have built literatures, which turns it into a philosophical dispute about the ethics of inquiry. Talia Mae Bettcher argues that there may be ethical limits on which questions particular philosophers ought to raise. Her opponents argue that classifying a disputed position as activism permits professional sanction without answering the argument. No elite department announces that it closes questions. The work gets done by referees, hiring networks, conference invitations, and shared assumptions about which positions are respectable, all of which make some questions expensive to ask.

Rankings close questions too. The Gourmet Report measures reputation inside existing networks. It has no way to register a department that has identified an important question the established field failed to notice. Once hiring committees consult the measure, the measure starts shaping the activity it claimed to describe. Nguyen built his reputation on that pattern. His own profession supplies as good an instance as any he has published.

Jürgen Habermas (1929–2026) died on March 14, 2026, at ninety-six. He held a kind of authority that came from a public rather than from a department, and nobody inherits it.

The discipline is moving from isolated puzzles toward systems. The rising work asks how minds, machines, markets, scientific communities, and measurement regimes create the conditions under which men act, know, dominate, and suffer. Analytic technique remains the price of entry. The status goes to those who carry the technique into a domain where something is at stake, and who name what they find there in words other people can use.

Posted in Philosophy | Comments Off on Live Questions in Philosophy

The List Problem

American economic nationalism has found its economist in Friedrich List (1789-1846), and the choice makes sense. List denied that the existing international division of labor was natural or permanent. He separated a nation’s present wealth from its productive powers, meaning its skills, its technical knowledge, its transport, its schools, its firms, and its capacity to make things it had never made before. A country could trade consumption today for capability tomorrow. A country that accepted free trade while its industries remained immature might never acquire the machinery, the trained workers, the suppliers, the engineers, or the commercial institutions needed to compete with an established leader. It might instead settle into permanent supply of raw materials to a manufacturing rival and call the arrangement efficient.

That argument is serious, and the profession has spent two centuries either ignoring it or rediscovering it under other names. The infant-industry case, learning by doing, agglomeration, path dependence, and most of the recent literature on industrial policy are List translated into the language of models.

The trouble with the American use of List is not that he was wrong. The trouble is that his own scheme assigns the United States to a different chapter.

The National System of Political Economy (1841) is built on a sequence of stages. A nation passes from hunting to pasturage to agriculture, then into manufacturing, then into manufacturing and commerce together. List attaches protection to one passage in that sequence, the transition into manufacturing, and he attaches it under conditions. The duties should be moderate. They should be temporary. They should cover industries with a plausible prospect of standing on their own. They should not extend to agriculture. They suit a country with sufficient territory, population, and coastline to support a full industrial system, and they are useless to a country that has no such prospect. Protection carried too long, List wrote, produces indolence in the firms it shelters.

Then he describes the nation that has reached the top of the sequence. That nation, he says, has an interest in free trade, and it preaches free trade to its rivals for that reason. His model of the case was England. England had climbed behind Navigation Acts and prohibitions and colonial monopoly, arrived at supremacy, and then announced that supremacy was the reward of open competition. List’s charge against Britain was hypocrisy, and Ha-Joon Chang (b. 1963) revived the charge under a better title in Kicking Away the Ladder (2002). But the charge only works because List agreed with the British about what a leading manufacturing nation should do. He expected Germany to arrive at the same place and adopt the same policy.

The United States now occupies the position List assigned to England. It is a mature, high-wage economy at or near the technological frontier in semiconductors, software, aerospace, biotechnology, pharmaceuticals, finance, advanced energy, and scientific research. It issues the currency that made up roughly 57 percent of official foreign exchange reserves in early 2026. It has lost sectors, not a civilization. Its problem is selective industrial erosion inside an advanced economy, not national industrial infancy.

Citing List to protect the leader inverts his stage theory. That does not make protection wrong in 2026. It means the movement is invoking an authority who prescribed something else for its situation, and it has not noticed.

The second difficulty concerns what List wanted protected and how.

His unit of analysis was productive power. He counted engineers, schools, apprenticeships, roads, canals, patents, banks, and firms that could design as well as assemble. He would not have recognized the bilateral goods balance as an object of policy. A deficit tells you nothing about whether a country can build a machine tool, train a die maker, or bring a new chemical process from a laboratory to a plant. The movement has substituted an accounting figure for the thing List cared about, and the substitution is convenient, because the figure moves with a tariff schedule and productive power does not.

His practical career points the same way. From 1819 List served as the organizer of the German commercial association, and his first campaign was the abolition of the internal tariffs that divided the German states from each other. He wanted the Zollverein, which arrived in 1834. He promoted the national railway network and helped bring the Leipzig-Dresden line into existence. He wrote about technical education and public credit. The external duty was one instrument among several, and the several were the expensive ones, requiring a state capable of building things and teaching people.

So the first act of nineteenth-century German economic nationalism enlarged a market. A general duty against forty-six countries contracts one.

The American precedent runs on the same asymmetry. Alexander Hamilton (1755-1804) submitted the Report on Manufactures in December 1791 and argued that bounties, meaning direct subsidies tied to output, were superior to prohibitions and preferable to high duties. Congress declined the bounties and kept the tariff. The American System took the cheap half in 1792 and takes the cheap half now.

The uncomfortable comparison is not nineteenth-century Germany. It is Edwardian Britain.

Joseph Chamberlain (1836-1914) launched the tariff reform campaign at Birmingham on May 15, 1903. His premise was that Britain’s early industrial lead was gone, that Germany and the United States had built larger industrial systems behind protective walls and continental markets, and that British free trade had stopped being a neutral doctrine. It exposed British manufacturers to foreign protection while enriching the shippers, insurers, bankers, and holders of overseas assets who lived off an open system. His remedy was duties on foreign goods and preference for goods from the Empire, a protected commercial bloc large enough to sustain British production, fund social provision, and answer the continental rivals.

Read Chamberlain’s speeches next to American Compass and the resemblance is close enough to be awkward. Cheap imports conceal the destruction of capacity. Free trade has become an ideology serving finance. Industrial weakness threatens military power. National cohesion requires national production. A protected bloc can replace dependence on competitors.

The campaign split his own party. Arthur Balfour (1848-1930) tried to hold both wings and held neither. The Unionist free traders defected. And the argument was lost at the grocery counter, on the price of bread, where the free traders campaigned with a big loaf and a little loaf and asked which one the voter preferred. The 1906 election destroyed the Conservative and Unionist position in the Commons. Chamberlain suffered a stroke in July of that year and never returned to active politics.

The sequel is the part American nationalists should sit with. Britain did eventually get protection. The Import Duties Act of 1932 imposed a general tariff, and the Ottawa agreements of August 1932 delivered imperial preference. Britain’s relative industrial decline continued.

Tariffs were not the cause of that decline, and free trade was not the cause either. Britain faced rivals with larger home markets, carried the costs of empire and two wars, returned to gold at an overvalued parity, and held early leads in industries where the early lead had left aging plant and settled methods. The instructive diagnosis comes from Alfred Chandler (1918-2007). Scale and Scope (1990) traces British underperformance to what he called personal capitalism: family firms that declined to invest in the managerial hierarchies, the distribution networks, and the in-house research that American and German competitors built. British firms stayed small, stayed owned by families, and stayed out of the three-pronged investment that made a first mover durable. Add the technical education deficit that British commissions documented for fifty years and did little about.

No tariff schedule supplies a managerial hierarchy. No duty trains a chemist. Chamberlain proposed to change the price of imports in a country whose deficiency lay in how its firms were owned, organized, and staffed. Aaron Friedberg’s The Weary Titan (1988) shows how hard British officials found it to see their own position accurately, which is the more general warning. A nation in relative decline reaches for the instrument it can operate rather than the one that addresses its condition.

The second comparison is import substitution.

Import substitution began from a real problem and a competent argument. Raúl Prebisch (1901-1986) and the economists at the Economic Commission for Latin America, founded in 1948, held that countries specialized in primary exports faced deteriorating terms of trade, unstable prices, chronic foreign exchange constraints, and technological dependence. Hans Singer (1910-2006) reached similar conclusions. Domestic industry was the route out. Judged against passive specialization in minerals and agriculture, the policy accomplished a great deal. Brazil, Mexico, and Argentina built factories, technical cadres, urban employment, infrastructure, and domestic firms that would not otherwise exist.

The failure came later and had a precise shape. Albert Hirschman (1915-2012) described it in 1968 in his essay on the political economy of import-substituting industrialization. The process ran backward. It began at the last stage of production, final assembly of consumer goods, using imported machinery, imported components, and imported technology. It skipped the learning. The entrepreneur who assembled radios behind a tariff wall never acquired the capability to design a radio or build the machines that made one. Substituting the final good left the demand for foreign exchange intact, because the inputs still came from abroad. The easy substitutions ran out. What remained were the hard ones, requiring capital, scale, and technical depth that the sheltered market had given nobody a reason to develop.

Then the politics closed around it. Anne Krueger (b. 1934) named the rent seeking in 1974 and Jagdish Bhagwati (b. 1934) generalized it. Tariff structures became negotiated rather than designed. Firms learned that a good relationship with the ministry paid better than a productivity gain. The infants aged without maturing. Capacity was visible, so capacity got mistaken for competitiveness. A government could point at factories and payrolls, and neither established that the protected sector could survive competition or earn the foreign exchange to pay for its own imported inputs.

The debt crisis of the 1980s had many causes and it would be careless to hang it on industrial protection. The durable lesson is narrower: a country can build industrial capacity while failing to build productivity growth or export competitiveness, and it can go a long time without finding out.

Here the American position produces an unexpected danger. The United States faces no comparable payments constraint. It borrows in its own currency and the world wants its assets. Argentina learned within a decade that its protected industries could not earn the exchange to buy their own machinery. The United States can finance an uncompetitive industry for thirty years out of an enormous domestic market, federal borrowing, protected procurement, and foreign demand for Treasuries. The privilege the movement wants to preserve is the same privilege that would hide the failure from view. America may escape the crisis and reproduce the underlying productivity failure in a slower and more politically durable form.

The standard answer to both comparisons is East Asia, and the answer has force. Japan, South Korea, and Taiwan protected industries, directed credit, promoted investment, and coordinated technological development. Chalmers Johnson (1931-2010) described the apparatus in MITI and the Japanese Miracle (1982). Robert Wade (b. 1944) documented Taiwan in Governing the Market (1990). Industrial policy worked.

Alice Amsden (1943-2012) identified the feature that made it work. In Asia’s Next Giant (1989) she described Korean support as reciprocal. Firms received cheap credit, protection, foreign exchange, and licenses, and in exchange they accepted performance standards that the state monitored and enforced: output targets, investment commitments, technological upgrading, and above all exports. The export requirement supplied a test the domestic market could not. A company can persuade its own ministry that it is strategically vital. Persuading a foreign purchaser to buy an inferior product at a higher price is harder.

The recent quantitative work supports a qualified version of the story. Nathaniel Lane’s study of Korea’s Heavy and Chemical Industry drive finds that targeted sectors expanded, developed new comparative advantage, raised productivity, and held the gains after the temporary support ended. Plant-level work by Minho Kim, Munseob Lee, and Yongseok Shin finds that the same program worsened the allocation of resources among firms inside the targeted industries. A real achievement, purchased at a cost.

Which puts the institutional question where it belongs. Protection is easy to start. Discipline is hard to sustain.

The American state has formidable promotional capacity. It funds basic research, builds infrastructure, guarantees loans, writes tax credits, and creates markets through procurement. Defense, aerospace, computing, biomedicine, and energy all carry its fingerprints. Its terminating capacity is another question. Congress represents districts and states, not a national production function. Once a subsidized plant exists, its continuation becomes a local interest with two senators attached. Once an industry is designated vital to national security, withdrawal of support becomes an argument about patriotism. Concentrated firms lobby better than diffuse consumers. A politician gains from announcing an investment and loses from closing a failed one nine years later.

The CHIPS program shows that conditions can be attached. It carried milestones, reporting requirements, restrictions on expansion in countries of concern, and clawback provisions. It also shows the limits of the technique. A national security condition is verifiable, because you can determine whether a company built prohibited capacity in China. A commercial performance condition requires someone to decide whether an American plant has become productive enough, innovative enough, or cheap enough to justify continued support, and to say no. Nobody has yet had to say no. The conversion of unpaid Intel grants into a federal equity stake in 2025 moved in the opposite direction, toward ownership, which is a relationship that makes exit harder rather than easier.

This is the core of the List problem. The case for protection rests on the state eventually exposing the protected firm to judgment. The politics of protection give both the firm and the state reasons to postpone the judgment forever.

The third complication is automation, and it separates two promises the movement makes together.

The first promise is restored industrial capacity. The second is restored industrial employment. A modern plant can deliver the first while disappointing the second, and the incentive runs that way by design. A firm that brings production into a high-wage country has every reason to substitute capital, software, and robotics for labor.

The CHIPS numbers are the available evidence. Against roughly $53 billion in authorized support, Bilge Erten, Joseph Stiglitz, and Eric Verhoogen estimate about 15,000 to 16,000 direct jobs in semiconductor production and equipment, and 28,000 to 35,000 indirect jobs in upstream industries and construction, with measurable wage gains in the affected counties. Those are real jobs, skilled and well paid. Beside the scale of public money and private capital, and beside the promise of restoring the industrial Midwest, they are small.

Which does not mean the program failed. Semiconductor fabrication is capital deep and always will be. Its justification is that advanced chips sit underneath military systems, communications, artificial intelligence, transport, and most of the modern economy, and that a country without domestic capacity holds a hostage relationship with Taiwan and South Korea. The honest defense is insurance. The dishonest defense is employment.

The contradiction is unavoidable. A program built to maximize productivity and competitiveness automates and hires few. A program built to maximize headcount preserves labor-intensive, low-productivity firms that will need protection permanently. The movement has not chosen, because choosing costs it either its economics or its voters.

And a factory is not a social order. Restoring steel, machine tools, ships, pharmaceuticals, or semiconductors does not restore affordable housing, stable families, local commerce, technical schools, solvent municipalities, or a household supported on one industrial wage. Those outcomes came from a settlement that included unions, regional banks, regulated utilities, restricted foreign competition, employer benefits, a young population, and a different balance between capital and labor. Industrial policy can contribute to regional reconstruction. It cannot substitute for it. The men who voted for reindustrialization heard a promise about their towns, and the policy addresses their supply chains.

Underneath all of this sits an arithmetic problem the movement discusses only in the abstract.

Reserve currency status draws foreign capital into American assets. Those inflows are the accounting counterpart of the current account deficit. Matthew Klein and Michael Pettis set the argument out in Trade Wars Are Class Wars (2020): the imbalance originates in savings and investment decisions, many of them made abroad, and the trade balance adjusts to accommodate the capital account. On that account a tariff redirects trade among foreign suppliers without touching the underlying relationship.

So the program as stated wants incompatible things. It wants the productive structure of an industrial nation, the consumption possibilities of a free-trading nation, and the financial privileges of a reserve-currency hegemon. Reducing imports while preserving unrestricted capital inflows, dollar supremacy, elevated asset prices, cheap consumer goods, and the global organization of American corporations describes a set of goals that do not fit together.

The test is available and simple. Pettis’s diagnosis implies capital-account measures: taxes on inbound portfolio flows, tolerance of a weaker dollar with higher long rates, and a willingness to give up some part of the reserve privilege. American Compass has adopted the diagnosis. Watch whether anyone in the movement proposes the medicine. Watch whether any elected nationalist tells the holders of dollar assets what reindustrialization would cost them. Until then Pettis is decoration, and the industrial program is being sold as an addition to the American order rather than a subtraction from it.

List gave a rising nation permission to protect its infant industries for a period, moderately, selectively, and on the way to something else. He gave the leading manufacturing nation a different instruction. And the parts of his program that required a competent state, the customs union that enlarged the market, the railways, the technical schools, the public credit, are the parts the movement has left on the shelf.

A policy he might recognize looks unlike a general duty. It would enlarge markets among trusted countries rather than tax them, because no advanced economy reproduces every mineral, chemical, component, machine tool, and subsystem inside its borders, and the relevant production unit is a bloc. It would spend on apprenticeship, technical education, and engineering capacity, which is where Britain lost and Germany won. It would attach performance standards to support and an export test where competitiveness is claimed, and it would say openly that capacity purchased for military reasons is defense procurement rather than economics. It would protect industries without protecting every incumbent inside them, and it would fund new entrants against the firms that already have the lobbyists. It would name, in advance, which privileges of the current order the country is prepared to trade away.

None of that is impossible. All of it is harder than a tariff, which is why the tariff is what exists.

The nationalists are right about the things that made them necessary. Industrial structure has consequences that consumer prices do not capture. National power cannot be reduced to the cost of a television. Markets that cross jurisdictions are shaped by states, currencies, security arrangements, and political choices, and the discipline that treated the global allocation of production as presumptively efficient was making an assumption rather than a finding.

What they have not done is explain why the United States escapes what happened to Britain, to Argentina, and to every protected sector that aged without maturing. They have not shown how a duty at the border overcomes the financial incentives created by the dollar. They have not shown which official will one day tell a subsidized firm in a swing state that its support is ending. They have not shown how an automated plant restores a town. And they have not decided what they will sacrifice.

List climbed those questions before he answered the tariff question. His American admirers have taken the answer and skipped the climb.

Posted in Economics | Comments Off on The List Problem

Fred Luskin: Forgive for Good

I can’t think of a book that has helped me more over the past decade than Fred Luskin’s Forgive for Good.

I also can’t think of a book I’ve recommended more.

I can’t think of a book that is likely to be useful to the average man.

Frederic Michael Luskin (b. 1954) came to national attention in a lounge at Encina Hall in late January 2001 when eighteen people from Belfast finished a week of instruction under his direction.

The room filled with Northern Irish accents as the group came out of its final session. People headed for the deck to smoke and talk. Luskin stood among them, tall and thin, shaggy, running late, dressed in sweats and sneakers, his hard New York consonants carrying over the brogues. He was forty-six. A visiting reporter thought he could pass for a graduate student fifteen years younger.

Patricia Magee lived in Belfast. In 1992 her brother Martin was beaten to death by loyalists. The men who killed him went to prison and then came out under a prisoner release tied to the peace agreement. They lived near her family. She saw them on the street. For ten years she had not spoken about Martin outside her home, and she had never spoken about him at all without weeping.

Her new friend Florence Watts walked up. Watts was Protestant. The Irish Republican Army had killed her husband twenty years earlier. Magee touched her hand and said the two of them had each told their story that Sunday without crying, for the first time.

The man who had taught them the technique had learned it because he was not invited to a wedding.

Luskin was born in New York City on May 5, 1954, to Phillip Luskin, an accountant, and Barbara Luskin, a homemaker. He took a B.A. from SUNY Binghamton in 1976 and an M.S. from San José State in 1987. In between he co-owned a vegetarian restaurant. Then came the school psychology years, which read like a map of Bay Area and Long Island districts hiring on short contracts: San Benito High School in Hollister, Northport, Millbrae, Hollister again, San Mateo-Foster City, Woodside. He picked up a certificate in educational administration from Hofstra in 1993 and taught integral health studies as an adjunct at the California Institute of Integral Studies in 1995 and 1996. This is the resume of a competent man in his late thirties with no institutional standing and no research career.

The rupture came around 1990. A close friend, the man who had stood as Luskin’s best man, cut him off. The friend married and did not invite him. Luskin spent years turning the slight over, telling the story again, unable to accept that the friendship had ended. He had read in Eastern religion for years and began applying meditation and visualization to his own case. When he entered Stanford’s School of Education in 1996 for a doctorate in counseling and health psychology, he built the dissertation out of what he had done to himself.

He was forty-two, starting a Ph.D., in a program run by a man whose own career had begun with a death.

Carl Edwin Thoresen (1933-2020) was born in San Francisco to a Norwegian immigrant father who cooked for the Army. His father died of a heart attack when Thoresen was nineteen. Thoresen rowed at Cal, took a history degree, and spent five years teaching physical education in San Jose middle schools before a chance meeting with a counseling scholar redirected him. He came back to Stanford in 1967 and stayed on the education faculty thirty-one years.

Beginning in 1973 he worked with the cardiologist Meyer Friedman on the Recurrent Coronary Prevention Project, which followed 1,013 heart attack survivors for four and a half years to see whether Type A behavior could be modified. Thoresen designed and ran the psychological treatment. Recurrence dropped to 13 percent from 21 percent or higher, and after the first year the counseled group also died less often.

Anger entered American clinical science as a cardiac risk factor. By the time Luskin arrived, a Stanford professor had already spent twenty-five years proving that you could change how a man handled provocation and thereby change whether he had a second heart attack. Forgiveness training is Type A intervention with the vocabulary swapped. Luskin’s contribution was to notice that the swap could be made and to build the curriculum.

The money arrived at the same moment. During the late 1990s, with the Soviet collapse, Mandela’s election, and the Northern Irish ceasefire fresh, the John Templeton Foundation issued a call for proposals on forgiveness. Twenty grants followed, then a nonprofit called A Campaign for Forgiveness Research funded eight more, and the total reached nearly $10 million. The count of published studies went from 58 in 1997 to more than 1,100 by 2005. The initial tranche was roughly $3 million to about twenty teams in 1998, the same year Martin Seligman launched positive psychology from the presidency of the American Psychological Association.

Everett Worthington of Virginia Commonwealth
ran the Campaign and told a reporter in 2001 that perhaps fifty studies existed and that the field’s time had come. A field of fifty studies with ten million dollars behind it will produce eleven hundred studies. Whether it produces eleven hundred findings is a separate question, and the honest answer in 2026 is that nobody has settled it.

Luskin’s pilot used fifty-five Stanford students and reported a 15 percent average drop in self-assessed anger. On the strength of it, Thoresen won the Templeton grant in 1999 and became principal investigator of the Stanford Forgiveness Project, with Luskin as project director. They recruited 259 adults who described themselves as upset about an incident and unable to forgive.

Two facts about that recruitment.

The first is that they could not find men. Enrollment ran heavily female until Thoresen changed the advertising language from forgiveness to grudge and grudge management. Then the men came. Thoresen’s reading was that forgiveness sounded feminine and a grudge sounded like a job. A single noun substitution altered the sex ratio of a Stanford clinical trial. Anyone who designs public health messaging should keep that in a drawer.

The second is the exclusion criteria on the pilot. Students whose injury involved violence or physical or sexual abuse were kept out. Everyone admitted had to answer yes to a screening question asking whether they could at least imagine learning to feel differently about the matter they brought. The method was therefore validated on people who had already conceded the premise. That does not make the results false. It does mean the population most often invoked in praise of forgiveness research is the population the early research excluded.

A person suffers, in Luskin’s account, when he insists that another person obey a rule he has no power to enforce. The friend must invite him. The wife must understand. The father must apologize. The employer must recognize what he is worth. Luskin calls these unenforceable rules and teaches people to convert them into preferences, wishes, and goals. The demand may be just. Justice does not confer jurisdiction.

He taught it with a cactus. When a woman in a workshop described her frustration with a difficult partner, Luskin told her some people are like cacti, sharp by nature, and that throwing yourself against a cactus and getting jabbed is not the cactus’s doing. “It’s just standing there being a cactus.”

The second idea is the grievance story. A grievance story begins as an account of what happened and hardens into a rehearsed and slanted performance with a villain at the center. Luskin’s line was that these stories fix attention on the other person and what he will not do, and that this hands him power he should not have. Repeating the story raises blood pressure, dumps cholesterol into the blood, shortens the breath, and triggers the fight-or-flight response to an injury seven years old. So he taught breathing, attention on the area around the heart, gratitude for available goods, and a rewritten account in which the teller wanted something reasonable, did not get it, and remains capable of getting it elsewhere.

He charged $255 for six two-hour sessions. He also taught at Esalen in Big Sur. His students included Phyllis Mayberg, an administrative associate in Stanford’s genetics department, who had tried other counseling after her marriage failed and disliked being told her anger was acceptable, and Maryam Hellar, a real estate agent in Los Altos who had spent thousands on therapy for memories of an abusive father and first husband in Iran, and who said the class taught her that the forgiveness in question was of herself and the situation. Mayberg’s compliment was that he lacked the social worker voice. He kept the sessions from turning into crying, refused the neutral therapist’s posture, and used his own botched handling of his own friendship as the running example.

Northern Ireland was not his idea. Byron Bland, a Presbyterian minister and associate director of the Stanford Center on Conflict and Negotiation, had followed the conflict for a decade. He framed the shift after the 1997 ceasefire as a move from how to reach a deal to how to build relationships that could hold one. He heard about Luskin’s work in 1999 and phoned him. The project was called HOPE, for Healing Our Past Experiences.

HOPE 1 brought five women whose sons had been killed to Stanford in 2000. Their scores on depression, anger, optimism, perceived stress, and the pain of the loss improved, including sleep, and they kept meeting in Ireland afterward and helped recruit the next group.

HOPE 2 ran in February 2001 with seventeen people, nine Catholic and eight Protestant, all of whom had a parent, child, spouse, or sibling murdered. Over seven days of group training, self-rated hurt fell from 6.5 to 4.1 on a ten-point scale. Depression scores fell about 20 percent. Somatic stress symptoms fell about 35 percent. Reported physical vitality rose. All four of those changes reached significance at the conventional threshold.

Trait anger moved from 19.9 to 17.8. Perceived stress fell about 14 percent at p under 0.08. On Rye’s forgiveness scale, fifteen participants rose and two came out less forgiving than they went in.

There was no control group, no randomization, and seventeen subjects, measured immediately after a week of intensive attention at a rich American university, a long way from Belfast. Luskin and Bland posted the numbers with the asterisks and the two reversals intact. That is more than most people do with their pilot data, and the design supports about as much weight as a pilot design ever supports.

The most useful thing anybody said that week was said by Bland, at the table, on the last day. He drew three elements. The death of a loved one in the middle. The community on one side. The family on the other. Because the community holds that it owns the death as much as the family does, it does not honor the family’s wish to heal, and it keeps hatred and revenge in service of its own politics. Brendan Bradley, who had lost five relatives, said people will tell you they understand and they do not. Heads went down around the room.

Bland’s own reading of the change was that the participants’ stories had shifted from victim to survivor. Pearl Marshall, whose son the IRA murdered in 1989, said she had stopped seeing the killers as Catholics and now saw them as IRA. Pat Campbell, whose son Philip was shot in 1991 as he stood at his vending cart in Belfast, said she was forgiving herself for having let his killers ruin her life, and that grief looked identical on either side of the divide. Magee had asked, before agreeing to come, whether the forgiveness could take place entirely inside her own head, since she would never in a million years stand in front of the men who killed Martin and absolve them. She was told yes. That was the goal. She came.

Forgiveness, in Luskin’s definition, is an internal change in a person’s relation to an injury. Reconciliation is a separate act requiring a second party. Excuse is a third thing. Legal and moral accountability is a fourth. Keeping them apart is what let a Catholic woman in Belfast accept help from a Jewish psychologist in California without betraying her brother.

The peer-reviewed record is thinner than the publicity. The main trial appeared in 2006 in the Journal of Clinical Psychology under Alex Harris’s name, with Luskin, Sonya Norman, Sam Standard, Jennifer Bruning, Stephanie Evans, and Thoresen. The six-week program cut negative thoughts and feelings about the target offense two to three times more than the control condition and produced larger gains in positive feeling toward the offender. Effects on stress, anger, hurt, forgiveness-likelihood, and optimism held at four months. The sample was mostly White and college-educated. The other core paper, with Karni Ginzburg and Thoresen, ran in 2005 in the Humboldt Journal of Social Relations, a venue that carries a fraction of the citation weight of the claim it published. A hypertension result with David Tibbits and others appeared in 2006 in the Journal of Pastoral Care and Counseling.

In the 2014 meta-analysis by Nathaniel Wade, William Hoyt, Everett Worthington, and colleagues, Luskin’s model is filed as an alternative to the two dominant protocols, Robert Enright’s process model and Worthington’s REACH, and grouped with other approaches too sparsely studied to analyze on their own. Templeton’s own retrospective names Enright’s and Worthington’s programs as the two with the strongest research support and puts everything else in a second tier with positive but limited evidence. Luskin sold more books than either of them.

The corporate work is where the claims outrun the design. In a project run with volunteers from four American Express Financial Services market groups, 120 participants completed one of eight pilots measuring the effect of emotional competence and forgiveness training on sales and quality of life. The training, called Maximizing Your Talent, opened with a one-day workshop, defined emotional competence in the morning, taught forgiveness and stress reduction in the afternoon, and continued through individual development plans and follow-up sessions. Luskin, Rick Aberman, and Anthony DeLorenzo reported in 2005 that the trained advisers averaged 24 percent more in gross sales than a matched control. The report sits with the Consortium for Research on Emotional Intelligence in Organizations rather than in a journal. The participants volunteered. The outcome measure was revenue in a bull market. The number gets cited in consulting decks two decades later as though it were a coefficient.

Luskin now teaches mindfulness and positive psychology to executives through Stanford’s Graduate School of Business executive education program and coaches several Stanford athletic teams. He has worked as a research associate in preventive cardiology and a lecturer in wellness education at the medical school, and as a senior consultant in wellness at Vaden Health Center. Forgive for Good and Forgive for Love have together sold more than 225,000 copies. In 2025 New Harbinger published The Forgive for Good Recovery Workbook with Lyndon Harris and Herb Kaighan, applying the nine steps to addiction. Harris is a former Episcopal priest who ran a service mission for the responders at the World Trade Center site for more than eight months and whose life came apart afterward.

So a technique developed on a wounded friendship, tested on Stanford undergraduates who were screened for openness, extended to seventeen bereaved people from Belfast without a control group, and sold to financial advisers as a revenue lever, is now offered as a road map out of opioid and alcohol dependence. Each step is defensible. The chain is longer than the evidence under it.

The objections are older than the research. In 2002 the psychologist Sharon Lamb and the philosopher Jeffrie Murphy (1940-2020) published Before Forgiving, arguing that psychotherapy had adopted forgiveness as a strategy without examining it, and asking when a therapist should decline to recommend it and when the recommendation does harm. Their position is that forgiving a wrongdoer who has shown no remorse damages the victim’s self-respect and can reinforce the victimization. Murphy‘s Getting Even makes the affirmative case that anger, resentment, and the wish for revenge deserve more standing in moral and legal life than they are given, and that forgiveness should be granted more selectively. He also wrote the foreword to Thomas Brudholm‘s Resentment’s Virtue, on Jean Améry, which examines the assumption that a victim who forgives is a moral model and a victim who refuses is a patient.

James McNulty reported in 2011 that spouses who tended to express forgiveness had partners who reported more psychological and physical aggression. Over four years of marriage, aggression stayed flat for the more forgiving and declined for the less forgiving. His later work with Michelle Russell found the effect turns on the offender’s agreeableness: forgiveness reduced reoffending among agreeable partners and increased it among disagreeable ones, who read the forgiveness as permission. Enright and Richard Fitzgibbons answer that McNulty’s items measure excusing and letting go rather than forgiveness, and that people scoring high on his scale may be the ones doing the most condoning, which is what leaves them exposed. The dispute is about measurement.

Luskin answers that an unenforceable rule is dropped as a demand. Nothing in the nine steps requires the injured person to remain in the room, drop a lawsuit, or tell the offender anything. His formulation of the goal is “being resilient when things don’t go the way you want.”

The weak point in that answer is causal. The training works by lowering the physiological cost of an unchanged situation. Lowering the cost of tolerating something lowers the pressure to leave it. Whether the net effect on any given person is freedom or entrapment depends on facts the training does not measure, and the corporate application, which teaches emotional regulation to employees inside institutions the employees do not control, does not measure them either. A method that reduces the somatic cost of grievance is, in a workplace, indistinguishable from a method that reduces the rate of complaint.

In March 2026 he gave interviews on a new study of dispositional forgivingness alongside Richard Cowden of Harvard’s Human Flourishing Program, whose findings come out of the Global Flourishing Study, a two-wave analysis across twenty-two countries published in Nature. The field he entered when it had fifty studies now runs on samples of hundreds of thousands. His own contribution remains a six-week class and a nine-step list.

In the 2025 workbook he describes what his own injury gave him: empathy for people who are hurt, and “a bullshit detector that hears how people choose to stay stuck in victim mode.”

A man who could not stop telling one story about one wedding built a method for hearing when other people cannot stop telling theirs, and he built it from a cardiologist’s finding that rage shortens lives. What he took from religion was the obligation. What he left behind was the confession, the repentance, and the second party. A skill can be taught to seventeen people from Belfast in a week. It can also be assigned by an employer, priced at $255, and required as a condition of getting along. Both follow from the same translation, and the second is the reason the first traveled.

Sources

Core narrative scene (Encina Hall, workshop scenes, Magee, Watts, Campbell, Marshall, Bradley, Mayberg, Hellar, the cactus, the grievance story, $255 fee, Esalen, the vegetarian restaurant, the friend and the wedding, Bland’s diagram, HOPE origins): Joan O’C. Hamilton, “Peace Work,” Stanford Magazine, May/June 2001

Birth date, parents, marriages, children: Contemporary Authors entry via Encyclopedia.com · Degrees and the school-psychologist employment sequence: Prabook

Thoresen: Wikipedia (dates) · Stanford GSE obituary · Mercury News obituary · Recurrent Coronary Prevention Project with Meyer Friedman

Templeton funding and the growth of the field · Worthington’s 2024 response to positive-psychology critiques, with the 1998 figures

Pilot study design and exclusion criteria

HOPE 2 full results table · HOPE 1 · Sierra Leone project (18-page PDF, unexamined here)

Randomized trial: Harris, Luskin, Norman, Standard, Bruning, Evans, Thoresen, Journal of Clinical Psychology 62(6), 2006 · sample composition and four-month follow-up as summarized by Greater Good in Action · Luskin, Ginzburg, Thoresen 2005, Humboldt Journal of Social Relations 29: 163-184 · Tibbits, Ellis, Piramelli, Luskin, Lukman, hypertension, Journal of Pastoral Care and Counseling 60, 2006

Placement in the meta-analytic literature: Wade, Hoyt, Kidwell, Worthington, Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 82(1), 2014 · Lundahl, Taylor, Stevenson, Roberts 2008 · Akhtar and Barlow 2018

American Express / Ameriprise study: Luskin, Aberman, DeLorenzo 2005, Consortium for Research on Emotional Intelligence in Organizations · design summary · the 24 percent figure as it circulates

Critiques: Lamb and Murphy, Before Forgiving (Oxford, 2002) · Murphy, Getting Even · Murphy foreword to Brudholm’s Resentment’s Virtue · McNulty 2011 · McNulty and Russell 2016 · Enright and Fitzgibbons reply

Present positions, sales figures, 2025 workbook, Lyndon Harris: Greater Good · Fred Luskin · The Forgive for Good Recovery Workbook · the “bullshit detector” line is from the workbook’s introduction, reproduced at Dokumen.pub

March 2026 interview alongside Richard Cowden, Global Flourishing Study

The Hero and the Cuff

In February 2001 seventeen people from Belfast sat in a room at Stanford and answered a question on a printed form. On a scale of one to ten, how much does it hurt right now.

The average answer was 6.5. Seven days later the same seventeen people answered the same question and the average was 4.1. Nine of them were Catholic and eight were Protestant. Every one of them had a parent, a child, a spouse, or a sibling who had been murdered.

Ernest Becker (1924-1974) would have wanted to know what happened to the missing 2.4.

Becker’s argument is that a man carries two intolerable pieces of knowledge. He will die, and he suspects he does not count. The first he can do nothing about. The second he can, and the doing of it is what Becker called a hero system: a scheme of cosmic significance that assigns a man a role, tells him what counts as a good performance, and promises that the performance outlasts the body. Every culture supplies one. Most men take the one they are handed. The system is experienced as reality.

A grievance is a hero system. It is cheap, it is portable, and it needs no congregation. It supplies a protagonist, an antagonist, a wrong that demands correction, and a future in which the correction arrives. It confers standing. The man who has been wronged is owed, and to be owed is to exist in someone else’s ledger. That is not nothing. For a great many people it is the only entry they have.

Luskin found this out. His best man married and did not invite him. He told the story of the slight for years. He knew the friendship was finished and he kept litigating it anyway, which is the behavior of a man who needs the case more than the verdict.

What he built out of that is a curriculum for taking the case away.

His own definition of forgiveness in Forgive for Good ends with the injured man learning to “become a hero instead of a victim in the story you tell.” He used the word. He understood that he was in the business of role reassignment. What he did not say, and may never have thought through, is that a role is issued by a system, that there are many systems, and that the one he was issuing from had a very short list of things it could count.

His method presents as removal. This is the part worth slowing down on.

You hold an unenforceable rule. The friend must invite you. The husband must understand. The father must apologize. Luskin’s teaching is that the rule is not a rule at all, because you have no jurisdiction, and that what you took for a moral fact is a wish with a badge on. Take the badge off. You are left with a preference. Nothing has been added. An illusion has been withdrawn, and what remains is the situation as it stands.

Then you hold a grievance story. It began as an account and hardened into a performance with a villain at the center, embellished, rehearsed, and slanted. Strip the embellishment. Nothing added. An accuracy restored.

Then your body reacts to a nine-year-old betrayal as though a man were coming through the door. Breathe. Attention to the region of the heart. The alarm was false. Nothing added. A false alarm silenced.

Three subtractions and out. This is the most persuasive thing about the system and the least examined.

Look at what got installed while the removals were happening. A self whose feelings are its own property and its own responsibility. A body understood as an asset with a maintenance schedule and a depreciation curve. A lifespan understood as the thing worth protecting, such that anything shortening it is thereby suspect. An offender with no standing, no debt, and no obligation to appear. And, holding all of it up, a universe with no bailiff.

An unenforceable rule is unenforceable only where no court sits. Tell a man his demand cannot be enforced and you have told him something about the furniture of the cosmos, and he will either agree with you or he will not, and if he does not, then your first subtraction was an amputation.

Take the word forgiveness and put it in six rooms.

In Luskin’s room it is private, unilateral, free of charge, and complete without the offender’s knowledge. When Patricia Magee asked before flying to California whether the forgiveness could happen only inside her own head, since she would not stand in front of Martin’s killers in a million years, she was told yes, and that this was the goal, and she came. The transaction has one party. It costs the murderer nothing and he need never learn it occurred. It is measurable on the Rye scale before and after.

Now the second room. In a Galilee village, a killing sets a process in motion. The clans appoint representatives who sign an authorization binding them to whatever the mediating committee decides. The committee negotiates a truce. The offending family offers a first payment, accepted in front of the community, and after that it is a disgrace for the bereaved family to take vengeance. The committee investigates and rules, and the ruling includes a sum to redeem the blood of the dead. It ends in a ceremony in the village square. One mediator’s account of why anyone consents: in Arab culture nothing stands higher than forgiveness, and the man who had the power to refuse and chose otherwise has reached the height of honor.

Put a jaha mediator in the Encina Hall lounge. He listens to the seven days of curriculum. He asks one question.

Who came to the door.

Nobody came, he is told. The offenders were released in a prisoner exchange and live down the street.

Then what has been given up, he says, and to whom, and what did the giving buy her.

In his system forgiveness is a public act that raises the forgiver’s rank, extracted from the offender’s kin at a price, witnessed, and irreversible because reversing it would shame two hundred people. In Luskin’s system it is a private adjustment that raises nothing, costs the offender nothing, and can be undone next Tuesday when she sees them on the street. Both men use the English word forgiveness. They are not describing the same object. They are barely describing the same species of act.

The third room. Maimonides (1138-1204) holds that Yom Kippur does not touch a sin against another man until the offender has made restitution and appeased the one he wronged. The offender must ask, and if refused must return with three of his friends, and again, and a third time, and if the wronged man still refuses, then the offender may go, and the sin now rests on the man who would not forgive.

Read the order of operations. Forgiveness is a response. It has a trigger and the trigger is the offender’s approach. A man who forgives before being asked has not fulfilled the law; he has skipped a step that was not his to skip, and he has denied the offender the appeasement that the offender’s own atonement required. The grievance is held in trust. It is released on presentation.

And there is a status clause. Maimonides also holds that a Torah scholar insulted in public may not forgive his honor, and is punished if he does, because the insult is not to him but to the Torah he carries. He should bear the grudge like a snake until the offender comes to him.

So within one hero system, one law, one author, the same act is obligatory for one man and forbidden for another, and the difference is rank. A grievance can be personal property, or it can be an office you hold. Luskin’s method has no way to represent the second case. It has no field for rank. It asks what the grievance is costing you, and the man holding an office answers that the cost is irrelevant, because the grievance is not his.

The fourth room. A Catholic priest hears the confession, assigns the penance, and pronounces the absolution. Three parties, a formula, a matter, a minister. The penitent’s peace of mind is a fruit of the sacrament and not the sacrament. Ask him what he makes of nine steps that produce peace without a confessor and he will say that peace is available by many routes, some of them grace and some of them technique, and that a man may be calm and unabsolved.

The fifth room. Pashtunwali. Badal comes first. The obligation to avenge a wrong falls not only on the man who suffered it but on his family and his tribe, which is why insults propagate and feuds outlive their causes. Feuds can be settled, through blood compensation, through mediation, through nanawatai, when the weaker party puts himself at the other’s mercy and the offer of peace is accepted. There are exits. All of them run through the collective.

A Pashtun elder given the nine steps would not call the man who used them forgiving. He would call him a thief. The grievance was joint property. Its holder was a trustee. He has disposed of an asset belonging to men not yet born, in exchange for a lower resting heart rate, and he did it without convening anyone.

The sixth room has fluorescent light and a folding table. A shop steward has a grievance form in front of him. In his trade the word means a filing, a step, a right secured by contract and enforceable by arbitration. The word Luskin uses for a pathology is the word he uses for a remedy. Bring him the training. He reads the corporate version, the one Luskin delivered to a hundred and twenty financial advisers with development plans and follow-up sessions, and he says what any steward says.

You’re telling my members their rules are unenforceable. My rules are in Article 12.

He is not being obtuse. He is reading correctly. A method that lowers the somatic cost of an unchanged situation lowers the pressure to change it. In a marriage that may be freedom. On a shop floor it is a reduction in filings, and reductions in filings have a dollar value, and somebody paid for the workshop.

Now take the word peace.

Luskin’s formulation is that forgiveness is another way of describing peacefulness, and elsewhere that the essence of the thing is “being resilient when things don’t go the way you want.” Peace here is a state of the nervous system. It has a pulse, a blood pressure, a Cohen score, a Spielberger score. It is the condition of a man for whom nothing is currently ringing the alarm.

Byron Bland, standing in the same building, meant something else. His framing of the Northern Irish problem after the 1997 ceasefire was that the question had changed from how to reach a deal into how to build relationships capable of holding one. Peace for him is a load-bearing structure between hostile populations. It is not a state of anyone’s body. It could exist in a country full of anxious people and fail in a country full of calm ones.

And the people Bland was addressing meant a third thing, which he had the honesty to draw on a sheet of paper in front of them. A death in the middle. The family on one side. The community on the other. Because the community holds that it owns the death as fully as the family does, it does not honor the family’s wish to heal, and it keeps the hatred and the revenge in service of its own politics.

That is the traditionalist and tribal position stated by a Presbyterian minister to a room of the bereaved, and it deserves better than the treatment it usually gets, which is to be filed under pathology. The community’s claim is coherent. A people whose accounts are open cannot afford members who close their own accounts privately, because each private closure lowers the price of the next injury. The community is not being cruel when it withholds permission to heal. It is defending a deterrent. Any man who has watched his group absorb a hit and do nothing understands what happens to the next hit.

Brendan Bradley had lost five relatives. His summary was that people will tell you they understand and they do not. He was talking about the outsiders. He may also, without meaning to, have been describing the room.

A Stoic freedman would side with Luskin more than with anyone else here, and the resemblance is genealogical rather than coincidental, since the rational-emotive therapy Luskin built on descends from that line. Epictetus (c. 50-135) taught a man to sort the world into what is up to him and what is not, and to keep his judgments in the first pile. What separates them is the warrant. The Stoic wants his opinions correct because the cosmos is rational and his soul should match it. Luskin wants them corrected because misjudgment dumps cholesterol into the blood. The technique survives the change of warrant. The reason for caring does not, and the reason is what a hero system is made of.

Take responsibility, which in his lineage means taking responsibility for your own emotions.

For Luskin that is emancipation. Your feeling is yours, it is produced inside you, and the man who caused it has no further control over the production line. He has been fired from the job of managing your inner weather.

For a gacaca court in Rwanda or a commissioner at a truth commission, responsibility runs the other way. It means the offender stands up and says what he did while the relatives listen. The victim’s interior is not the object. The public record is the object.

For a sponsor at a twelve-step table, responsibility means the fourth step and the eighth: a written inventory, a list of persons harmed, and amends made to them in person. That tradition agrees with Luskin about resentment more strongly than any church does. It holds resentment to be the chief destroyer of the alcoholic. And it prescribes confession to another human being and restitution to the injured party, which is exactly what Luskin’s private method dispenses with.

That collision is now inside a book. The 2025 recovery workbook carries Luskin’s name, Lyndon Harris’s, and Herb Kaighan’s, and applies the nine steps to addiction. Two hero systems have been merged in one paperback. One says get right with the people you hurt, out loud, by name, and then keep doing it for the rest of your life among witnesses. The other says the injury’s grip on your body is the target and the second party is optional. They can be made to cooperate. They cannot both be the ground.
Amazon

And take health, which is the warrant under everything.

Health arrived in this story from cardiology. Thoresen’s father died of a heart attack when Thoresen was nineteen, and Thoresen spent a quarter century with Meyer Friedman demonstrating that a modified temper produces a modified recurrence rate in men who have already had one infarction. Anger became a clinical variable before it became a moral one. Luskin’s dissertation stands in that inheritance, and the whole persuasive force of Forgive for Good is that it can offer a number.

An argument that runs on health can recommend only what is good for the body. It cannot form a sentence about what is worth dying for, and it cannot form a sentence about what is worth being sick for. It is not defective. It has a jurisdiction, and the jurisdiction ends at the skin.

Put four men in front of the same finding. The executive in the eight-hour session at the Graduate School of Business hears capacity and a longer earning arc. His employer hears fewer claims and fewer complaints. A man from a tradition of martyrdom hears a bad trade offered in confident language and declines it, because his people’s dead are not a stressor to be down-regulated. And a hospice nurse hears something Luskin would endorse and the executive would not, which is that a man with eleven weeks left has no cardiovascular reason to forgive anyone and might still want to.

How much of this does he know.

Some. He drew the line between forgiveness and reconciliation and enforced it, which is the single most protective thing in his system, because it meant no woman in that room was told to go back to anyone. He excluded violence and sexual abuse from the early trials rather than overclaim. He posted the Belfast data with the two participants who came out less forgiving left in. He says of his own equipment that his injury gave him empathy and “a bullshit detector that hears how people choose to stay stuck in victim mode.” That sentence knows that the victim role is chosen, which is to say it knows the role is a role.

What he appears not to have priced is that he is a vendor. His method is superb at the thing it measures and silent about the thing it changes. He has never studied whether the training reduces exit, whether the calm employee files less, whether the peaceful wife stays longer than she should, whether a population trained to be at peace with no asks for less. The question is answerable. It requires only a follow-up measure of behavior rather than affect, and in thirty years nobody in that program has taken it. That is what happens when a hero system tells you what to count.

His own hero. He is a clinician who buys years and pays for them in narrative, and his own immortality is the two hundred and twenty-five thousand copies and the seventeen people who slept better in Palo Alto. It is an American shape, built in a laboratory that had already proved that temper kills, funded by a foundation looking for virtues that scan, and sold in the only currency the country reliably accepts, which is a number attached to a lifespan.

The rival he never names is not the vengeful man. He handles the vengeful man easily. His rival is the man with a court: the halakhist whose grievance is held in trust until the offender comes with three witnesses, the elder whose grievance belongs to a lineage, the steward whose grievance is in Article 12, the widow whose village will assemble in the square when the price is paid. To all of them the phrase unenforceable rule is not a discovery but a jurisdictional claim, and one they reject. He has no argument against them. He has a blood pressure reading, which they have already told him is beside the point.

And the cost he cannot put a figure on is the one his instruments were never built to see. He took a duty that had cost the offender something and made it a skill that costs the injured man nothing, which is precisely why it travels, and a skill can be assigned, priced at two hundred and fifty-five dollars, taught to a hundred and twenty financial advisers, and made a condition of getting along. What the seventeen gave up in Encina Hall was 2.4 points of hurt and some part of the only office some of them had ever held. He measured the first with a clipboard. There is no clipboard for the second, and he did not build one, and the absence of that instrument is the research.

Sources

Becker‘s framework: The Denial of Death (1973) and Escape from Evil (1975).

Luskin’s own use of “hero”: the definition appears in Forgive for Good and is quoted at Montessori.org · his formulation of forgiveness as resilience, Greater Good · the “bullshit detector” line from the 2025 workbook’s introduction, The Forgive for Good Recovery Workbook

Sulha: the authorization, truce, first payment, blood redemption, and village-square ceremony, Business Conflict Management and ResearchGate · the mediator on forgiveness as the height of honor, Sharon Lang, “Sulha Peacemaking and the Politics of Persuasion

Maimonides: Mishneh Torah, Hilchot Teshuvah 2:9-10, and Shulchan Aruch, Orach Chayim 606:1 for the three requests and the transfer of sin, Sefaria and Unpacked · the Torah scholar who may not forgive his honor, Hilchot Teshuva

Pashtunwali, badal and nanawatai: GlobalSecurity.org and National Strategy

The corporate program, one hundred and twenty participants and eight pilots: Consortium for Research on Emotional Intelligence in Organizations

Posted in Fred Luskin | Comments Off on Fred Luskin: Forgive for Good

James C. Weidmann and the Making of Chateau Heartiste

On April 9, 2007, an anonymous man in Washington published a post called “Endless Dating.” He argued that prolonged serial dating and late marriage could not last, and that one of two things would follow. Either humans would evolve into animals capable of decades of hookups without turning to cats and pornography, or the people who dated serially and delayed children would fail to have enough of them, and selection would settle the matter. Twelve more posts followed that month. When a reader asked about the sex ratio at birth, the author answered in lowercase, offered sex-selective abortion and then the spontaneous abortion of male fetuses, floated pollutants, and closed by saying the imbalance meant nothing anyway because older men date younger women and no reverse trend compensates. The reader had asked a question. He received a ruling.

The scale was already larger than the evidence. That was the method, and it held for twelve years.

The archive index at heartiste.org lists every month of the run. Adding the monthly counts gives 5,409 posts between April 9, 2007, and May 9, 2019. The yearly totals are 153, 312, 299, 328, 288, 322, 378, 410, 555, 519, 677, 851, and then 317 in the final partial year. Anyone can check the sum in five minutes. The numbers matter later, because they contradict the way this story is usually told.

He called himself Roissy. In Story of O, published in Paris in 1954 by Anne Desclos (1907-1998) under the name Pauline Réage, with a preface by Jean Paulhan (1884-1968), a woman is taken to a château at Roissy and trained to serve a group of men. Choosing that name for a Washington dating blog was a claim about the reader as much as the writer. It said: this is not a seminar for men who cannot get dates. This is literature with a Continental pedigree.

Most of his readers had no idea. In a comment thread in March 2010, one man asked whether “Chateau” meant the author's studio apartment. Another sighed that he guessed nobody there had heard of Story of O. A third supplied the title of the sequel, Return to the Château, and added that it ended badly. The allusion worked as furniture. The house had a name in French and a man at the door.

The furniture was elaborate. Readers who submitted their own encounters did not simply email; they arrived. One rapped the wrought iron lion knocker seeking admittance. One whispered the password to the Chateau consigliere. One donned the black robes of a guest. At the end of the post the doors creaked shut and the readers were escorted to the property gate. The site ran standing features the way a magazine runs departments: Alpha Assessment, Beta of the Month and later Beta of the Year, Comment of the Week, Shiv of the Week, Hamster of the Month, Dating Market Value Test for Men, Dating Market Value Test for Women. Men wrote in with their failures and received numbered options for what they should have texted instead.

In the comment threads the proprietor did not reply in his own comment. He inserted a bracketed line inside another man's comment, lowercase, signed only “editor.” A reader's paragraph stands, and then, within it, beneath it, the ruling. No thread got away from him. A man could argue in the comments of Chateau Heartiste, and he could win against other commenters, and he could never have the last word.

Watch one thread. March 25, 2010, a post titled “Alpha Assessment: Big Tease Edition.” A reader named RF submits a text exchange in which a woman gives him her number, then tells him the next night that she is with her boyfriend, and he replies with “lol.” The proprietor spends four paragraphs establishing that the “lol” was a catastrophe, that it told her she had drawn blood, and then lists three better answers, ranked. Below, the commenters have noticed something else. Shel goes off topic: “Roissy in DC” sounded classy, well off, lucid, slightly predatory, and “Citizen Renegade” sounds like a basement, sophomoric, defensive. Switch it back. Stu asks what the name change is about. Carlton Grey asks whether the name is Chateau now. Charlie asks whether Chateau means his studio apartment, and gets the bracketed reply that Charlie has him confused with the bike messenger currently sleeping with Charlie's mother. Then, inside a friendly comment from a man called Dally, the editor explains himself: he had not been in Washington in a long while, so a name change was overdue, and beyond that, “i needed a new incarnation to keep me interested in doing this blog.”

That is a writer describing his own maintenance problem, in lowercase, in brackets, in the middle of someone else's paragraph. The persona had to be refreshed or the man behind it would stop.

The names moved in sequence. Roissy in DC on a WordPress subdomain, then Citizen Renegade by March 2010 while the underlying address stayed roissy.wordpress.com, then Chateau Heartiste at heartiste.wordpress.com, then, after 2019, heartiste.org. Anyone reconstructing the chronology from the surviving archive has to be careful here. The bylines and internal links in the old posts were normalized during the migrations, so a 2010 post now carries the byline Heartiste and links to pages that did not yet exist under that name. The comment text was not rewritten. When the archive and the comments disagree about what the site was called on a given day, the comments are the better witness.

The doctrine. Men fall along a scale from alpha to beta. The alpha generates desire; the beta supplies attention, money, security, and emotional labor and is spent rather than wanted. Attraction obeys triggers, and the triggers can be learned. Marriage suspends nothing. Two maxims from 2009 carried the argument for a decade: marriage offers no escape from the sexual market and the possibility of being outbid, and for many women five minutes of alpha outweighs five years of beta.

The bargain the blog offered was interpretation. A man arrived with a humiliation and left with a theory that made the humiliation legible and, better, general. He had not failed. He had been operating on false information supplied by a culture that told pretty lies, which was the site's tagline: “Where pretty lies perish.” His pain was tuition. Once he paid it he belonged to a small number of men who could see.

The style suited the bargain. He compressed well. He could take a diffuse social anxiety and reduce it to a line that sounded a century old. Never say it first. Give less than she gives. Keep her uncertain. Apologize twice in a lifetime and choose the occasions. Presented as tactics, these would have invited testing. Presented as commandments, numbered in Roman numerals, they invited obedience and memorization.

The epistemic architecture was built to be closed. A woman who chose a dominant man confirmed the theory. A woman who chose a gentle man was buying security, concealing her preferences, or running what the site called the rationalization hamster. A faithful marriage had not yet met the right temptation. A man who objected on moral grounds was a white knight performing chivalry for sexual return, and his objection became evidence about him. The vocabulary classified dissent before the dissent could be heard. That is efficient and it is fatal, because a system that converts every counterexample into a confirmation has stopped taking information from the world.

The site kept a permanent department for external validation: a category called Science Validates Game, 106 posts. In one of the last, from May 6, 2019, a political science paper finding that public apologies do not help politicians is read as confirmation of Commandment VIII, which had been published eleven years earlier. The literature arrived to ratify a conclusion already in force. Kate Barber, writing in Discourse, Context & Media in 2025, describes a related habit in extremist blogging. Embedded hyperlinks give an assertion the visual look of documentation while pointing at the writer's own site or at ideologically allied ones, and readers rarely click. She calls the effect quasi-objectification: the appearance of third-party responsibility for a claim the writer is making on his own authority. Chateau Heartiste appears in her material as one of the destinations.

Some of the observations underneath all this were sound. Desire is not a reward for good conduct. Kindness compels nothing. Status affects intimacy. People misreport their own motives, to others and to themselves. Marriage does not end competition. Most published relationship advice in 2007 was sentimental and told readers what they wanted to hear. A writer willing to say these things had material, and for several years he used it on particular people in particular rooms.

Then the particulars thinned. The woman at the bar in Dupont Circle became the American female. The unsuccessful man became a national type. The numbers show the change and they show something else that gets missed. Output ran near 300 posts a year from 2008 through 2013, rose to 555 in 2015, dipped to 519 in the election year of 2016, then climbed to 677 in 2017 and 851 in 2018. The peak month in the entire run is October 2018, with 128 posts. The site was at its most productive after Trump's election, not during the campaign, and by then its subject was no longer dating.

The category counts show what it had become. Game holds 1,101 posts and Girls 1,012, which is what you would expect. Ugly Truths holds 1,393. Culture holds 870, Goodbye America 759, Current Events 722, Globalization 443, Psy Ops 363, Trumperica 264, and a category using a slur-laden phrase about Jewish influence holds 275. Physiognomy Is Real holds 94. A man can file his own work and, in doing so, tell you what it was.

In seduction, the man who accepted the woman's emotional premises had lost the frame and would lose everything after it. In politics, the man who accepted his opponent's language had conceded before the argument started. Answer inside the categories and you lose; refuse the categories and you win. Donald Trump (b. 1946) fit the template on performance rather than policy. He boasted, exaggerated, insulted, declined to apologize, and appeared undamaged. The beta male stopped being the man who failed with women and became the journalist, the academic, the moderate conservative, the White man unwilling to defend his group.

Matthew N. Lyons, writing for Political Research Associates on January 20, 2017, listed James Weidmann under the name Roissy among alt-right figures who had also been active in the manosphere, and described “significant overlap between the manosphere and the Alt Right” across 4chan, 8chan, and Reddit. The site's own blogroll makes the same argument from the inside, and more precisely. It runs under three headings. GAME lists Roosh V, Rational Male, Krauser. MAGA MEN lists Steve Sailer (b. 1958), American Renaissance, Unqualified Reservations by Curtis Yarvin (b. 1973), Vox Popoli, West Hunter, Lion of the Blogosphere. A third heading, SYLLOGISM AND SYNTHESIS, lists Overcoming Bias by Robin Hanson (b. 1959), Arts & Letters Daily, and hbd chick. Read as a claim, the arrangement says that pickup writing, race science, academic contrarianism, and open racial nationalism form one continuous library, and that a man who reads the first shelf should feel no jolt reaching the last. That claim, presented as a sidebar, did more recruiting than most of the essays.

The synthesis never resolved two problems. A category called Marriage Is For Chumps holds 133 posts. The site spent years teaching men that marriage was a provisioning arrangement offering no protection, that the successful man kept his options and his leverage, and that emotional investment was a transfer to the other party. It also spent years arguing that White birth rates were collapsing and that women owed their people fidelity and children. A doctrine that praises male defection and demands female loyalty has a hole in the middle of it. The second problem is smaller in the writing and larger in the politics: the seduction theory was individualist to the bone, addressed to the exceptional man who could exploit a disordered market, and the racial program required solidarity from men who had been told for a decade that solidarity was how betas got used. Neoreaction wanted durable institutions and formal authority. The Chateau ran on opportunism.

The outing came early. On August 8, 2009, a Canadian feminist blogger published the name James C. Weidmann, asserted that his job involved investigating financial fraud, argued that a man employed to expose fraud should not be teaching men to defraud women, and called on his supposed employer and the D.C. police to hold him accountable. That is nine years and nine months before the blog ended. The name was in circulation, attached to an employer claim, from the second full year of the site's life.

He kept writing anonymous posts as though the outing had not happened, and the output rose. The later citations, David Futrelle's in December 2016 and Lyons's in January 2017, did not reveal the name. They normalized it. A claim that had lived in feminist blogs and hostile wikis became a line in a research report, and from there passed into academic writing, a Harvard-published glossary of red pill terms, and a 2021 report from Hope Not Hate on the overlap between misogyny and antisemitism.

WordPress removed the site in the second week of May 2019 and issued no itemized public explanation. Four accounts of that week survive.

At Lion of the Blogosphere the commenters sound bereaved. One writes that the deplatforming is beyond demoralizing. Another asks the missing man directly for instructions: CH, please advise, how can we help. A third works through the technical lesson, that hosting on someone else's servers exposes you and self-hosting only moves the problem to the ISP. These are men who had lost a room.

A sympathetic blogger reads it as a sequence. First the news industry, then social media, now hosting providers, and after that isolation, which is where tyranny starts.

A hostile blogger, writing at The Night Wind on May 13, 2019, makes the opposite argument on the same facts and takes the trouble to check something. He observes that the man ran a second WordPress site, a photojournal called Goodbye, America, that the second site stayed up with comments open, and that WordPress prohibits fairly narrow things. His conclusion: “Weidmann didn't get suspended for what he said, but for what he did.” He guesses incitement, on the strength of the race war material.

And Tyler Cowen (b. 1962) posted at Marginal Revolution on May 12, 2019, four sentences of economics. He remembered the years when a blog like his own would have had no platform at all, then the sudden arrival of millions of niches, and then the recent removals. By his accounting the internet had gained say 99 instead of say 100, and he advised against overreacting to the endowment effect of having briefly felt one had everything. Most of the removed sites he had never read.

Nobody in that week wrote about the women in the posts.

Seven years later the archive is still there The most recent post at heartiste.org is dated May 9, 2019, and the comment counts under the final entries are frozen: 64, 65, 171, 306. The footer reads 2026. The page metadata identifies the software as WooCommerce, and a banner at the bottom links to a chaga mushroom vendor with a tracking code. The site offers a Tor address. In the sidebar, above the category list, a live feed carries posts from a Gab account using the name Gaul Atreides, updated within the last week, writing in the house style about crime statistics, immigration, interracial couples, and Jewish influence, and advising that White women who cross the color line should be named and shamed.

James C. Weidmann is the standard attribution for Roissy, Citizen Renegade, and Heartiste, in circulation since 2009 and repeated by researchers, journalists, and reference works since. Here is what it does not support: a birth date, an education, a confirmed employer, a family, a current city, or an answer to whether the man writes today under another name. The employment claims, an accountant, a financial industry regulator, a nonprofit inside the Beltway, come from outing posts and hostile wikis and have never been confirmed on the record by anyone in a position to know. There is also a rumor about his ancestry, floated by rivals inside his own movement, who used the doctrine he had built to raise a question about whether he belonged to the people he claimed to defend. A writer who spends a decade teaching men to classify one another gets classified.

Lyons documented the overlap in personnel and platforms. Robin Mamié, Manoel Horta Ribeiro, and Robert West, at the ACM Web Science conference in 2021, tested the pipeline claim against more than 300 million comments across 115 subreddits and 526 YouTube channels between 2006 and 2018, and their result is more useful than either side's slogan. Users posting in pickup subreddits migrated to alt-right subreddits at rates above their comparison groups. Users commenting on pickup YouTube channels did not. Taken in aggregate the manosphere fed the alt-right less than the alt-lite did. Channels existed. A conveyor belt did not.

What Chateau Heartiste supplied was a grammar. Alpha and beta, frame and framing, cuck, hamster, pedestal, shiv. Terms invented to explain why a woman left a bar with one man rather than another turned out to be portable, and once a man had learned to see a dating scene as a status contest with a hidden hierarchy, he could see an election, an immigration debate, or a newsroom the same way, and feel that he was applying knowledge rather than acquiring an opinion. The grammar made politics feel bodily and personal, which is the source of both its reach and its unreliability.

He never converted any of it into a career. Neil Strauss (b. 1969) got a mass-market book out of the pickup world. Daryush Valizadeh (b. 1979) got books, a forum, a lecture tour, and eventually a religious conversion and a repudiation. Richard Spencer (b. 1978) got an organization and a press corps. Weidmann got 5,409 posts and a domain. When the audience moved to video, podcasts, and live audio, a voice with no face and no name had nowhere to go. The anonymity that made the persona credible, the observer who classified everyone and could be classified by no one, also fixed a ceiling on it. The asymmetry was the whole product. Give it up and the product is gone; keep it and the product cannot travel.

Sources

First post: “Endless Dating,” April 9, 2007, including the comment thread where he answers the sex-ratio question
The March 2010 renaming thread, with the reader comments (shel, Stu, Carlton Grey, Charlie, Dally) and the bracketed editor replies, including “i needed a new incarnation to keep me interested in doing this blog” Front page as of July 26, 2026: last native post May 9, 2019; 2026 copyright line; WooCommerce metadata; chaga affiliate banner; Tor address; the Gaul Atreides Gab feed
The post-count arithmetic: the monthly archive dropdown appears in the sidebar of every page on heartiste.org. Yearly totals 153 / 312 / 299 / 328 / 288 / 322 / 378 / 410 / 555 / 519 / 677 / 851 / 317, total 5,409. Peak month October 2018 at 128. I summed these myself; the claim that output peaked in 2017-2018 rather than 2016 is mine and rests entirely on that sum, so check it if you use it.
Category counts (Ugly Truths 1,393; Game 1,101; Girls 1,012; Culture 870; Goodbye America 759; Current Events 722; Globalization 443; Psy Ops 363; GloboHomoBezos 295; the antisemitic category 275; Trumperica 264; Marriage Is For Chumps 133; Science Validates Game 106; Physiognomy Is Real 94) also come from that same sidebar.
Science Validates Game” example, the apology study read as confirming Commandment VIII eleven years later
The blogroll headings and their contents (GAME / MAGA MEN / SYLLOGISM AND SYNTHESIS) are in the same sidebar. The reading of the blogroll as an implicit continuity claim is my inference, not the site’s statement.
Two of the last posts, if you want the late register in his own words: “Women Are Anathema to Revolutionary Movements” and “Ministry of Twatter

Attribution and identification:

The August 8, 2009 outing post, which is the earliest naming I located and which also originates the financial-regulator employment claim — This is the load-bearing correction to the received chronology. If you keep one new thing from this piece, keep this: the name was public in 2009, not 2016.
Matthew N. Lyons, “Ctrl-Alt-Delete,” Political Research Associates, January 20, 2017 — print version
Hope Not Hate, “Antisemitism and Misogyny: Overlap and Interplay,” 2021, by David Lawrence, which discusses him as a pickup writer who moved into racial and antisemitic politics. I have this from a secondhand snippet rather than the full report, so verify the page before citing. RationalWiki and incels.wiki are where most of the repeated biographical detail originates, including the accountant and FINRA claims. Both are unreliable and neither cites a primary source for any personal fact. Use them only as evidence about what circulated.

The 2019 removal, four points of view:

Readers Sympathetic reading (third pillar falling), which quotes and links the Hidden Dominion post of May 11, 2019 Hostile reading, including the observation that the second WordPress site stayed up Tyler Cowen, May 12, 2019
I checked and could not find any itemized public statement from WordPress naming the violated clause. If one exists I missed it.

Scholarship:

Kate Barber, “(Don’t) click here: Hyperlinks as a quasi-objectification strategy in epistemic legitimisation in extremists’ blog posts on sexual violence,” Discourse, Context & Media 66 (2025) 100912 — open PDF. Note the correction: her corpus is blog posts by extremist bloggers on sexual violence, and Chateau Heartiste appears as a link destination in that corpus. It is not a study of his hyperlinking. I described it accordingly.
Robin Mamié, Manoel Horta Ribeiro, Robert West, “Are Anti-Feminist Communities Gateways to the Far Right?,” Web Science 2021 — The specific finding I used, that pickup subreddit users migrated to alt-right subreddits while pickup YouTube commenters did not, and that the manosphere in aggregate migrated less than the alt-lite, is in their results section.

Posted in Alt Lite, Alt Right, Dating | Comments Off on James C. Weidmann and the Making of Chateau Heartiste

If the Populists Gain Power, Who Will be Their Favorite Economists?

I’m not going to lie, bro. The bench of populist economists is thin.

The star is Oren Cass, who does not have a doctorate. If nationalist populism becomes the governing philosophy of the Republican Party rather than a temporary Trump coalition, Cass is the person most likely to be treated as its principal economist. American Compass supplies what the movement otherwise lacks: a connected theory of tariffs, manufacturing, labor power, family policy, immigration restriction, financialization, and national economic sovereignty. Its political ascent is already visible. Vice President Vance, Secretary of State Marco Rubio, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, and Senator Josh Hawley have appeared at its major events. Bessent sat for a public discussion with Cass in June 2026.

Oren Cass’s importance would resemble that of John Kenneth Galbraith or Milton Friedman. He supplies the vocabulary, identifies the enemies, integrates policy fields, and tells politicians what their economic program means. He would probably become more powerful than economists with stronger academic records because he’ll be more useful.

Stephen Miran is the strongest candidate to become the movement’s technically credentialed economist. His importance is that he can translate Trump’s intuitions about tariffs, trade deficits, reserve currencies, and burden sharing into something resembling a formal macroeconomic theory. As chairman of the Council of Economic Advisers, he argued that conventional trade models failed because they assumed that trade deficits would correct themselves through currency adjustment. He connected persistent deficits to the dollar’s reserve role and defended tariffs as a way to redirect investment toward the United States. Miran has since left both the CEA and Federal Reserve, but his brief ascent showed that a nationalist administration wants economists who can defend policies that most of the profession rejects.

Michael Pettis may become the deepest intellectual source. Pettis explains American deindustrialization through global savings, capital flows, suppressed foreign consumption, and the United States’ role as absorber of last resort. This gives nationalists a more sophisticated explanation of trade deficits than “foreigners are cheating us.” American Compass has already adopted his work as a central part of its globalization program. A serious nationalist government interested in managing capital inflows, the dollar, and persistent trade imbalances would eventually need Pettis more than it needs tariff slogans.

Michael Pettis will remain a favorite of the fighting, Trump-centered wing. He has an economics doctorate and possesses something more valuable in populist politics: complete willingness to attack the professional consensus in public. As of July 1, 2026, he remained Assistant to the President and Senior Counselor for Trade and Manufacturing. Peter Navarro remained director of the National Economic Council. Navarro is likely to retain symbolic status as the economist who fought the free-trade establishment. His function is combat, justification, and bureaucratic pressure. Every time I hear him, or read him, I feel embarrassed and repulsed.

Kevin Hassett represents the continuing power of the older Republican economic establishment. He can defend tax reductions, deregulation, business investment, and conventional growth policy while accommodating Trump’s tariffs and immigration restrictions. The current administration’s program combines nationalist trade policy with large tax reductions, expensing, deregulation, and supply-side claims about investment. If the populists consolidate power without defeating the donor and business wings of the party, Hassett-style economists will remain inside the government as coalition managers.

George Borjas will be the favorite economist on immigration. His work argues that immigration can lower the wages of workers who compete most directly with new arrivals. American Compass is already using his research to argue that the H-1B system gives employers access to less mobile and less expensive labor. Nationalists will place Borjas against economists who emphasize aggregate growth, complementarities, entrepreneurship, and the relatively small average effects of immigration. He provides the movement with the simple and politically powerful proposition that labor scarcity raises worker bargaining power.

David Autor, Gordon Hanson, and David Dorn will be repeatedly cited. Their “China Shock” research established that exposure to Chinese import competition produced persistent employment and community effects that did not disappear through rapid worker relocation or adjustment. That research has already become evidentiary infrastructure for American Compass. Nationalists will invoke the findings while ignoring or opposing many of the authors’ other political positions. Autor will function as the establishment witness who admitted that the old trade story was inadequate.

Dani Rodrik will occupy a similar but more theoretical position. His argument that deep globalization, national self-government, and democratic politics cannot all be maximized simultaneously is almost perfectly designed for nationalist appropriation. His support for industrial policy and greater national policy autonomy makes him useful to them. His liberal politics, climate commitments, and opposition to authoritarianism will keep him from becoming identified with the American populist right. He will be the economist they quote when they want Harvard authority for limiting globalization.

Anne Case and Angus Deaton will be the movement’s favorite diagnosticians of working-class decline. Their research on deaths from drugs, alcohol, and suicide, and on the widening divide between Americans with and without college degrees, supplies empirical support for the claim that GDP growth concealed social disintegration. Nationalists will cite them to show that the market order failed non-college America.

Family-centered nationalism will elevate Melissa Kearney and Catherine Pakaluk. Kearney supplies mainstream empirical authority for the economic advantages associated with stable two-parent families. Pakaluk is more culturally aligned with religious and natalist conservatives. Her work examines women who deliberately choose large families despite falling fertility. Kearney would be the empirical citation. Pakaluk could become the movement intellectual.

E.J. Antoni is likely to gain official and media status if loyalty and rapid policy defense become more important than recognition inside academic economics. He is Heritage’s chief economist and has become a regular defender of the administration’s inflation, budget, and growth claims. He could become important in congressional hearings, conservative media, and staffing networks without becoming intellectually central.

Christopher Phelan and Aaron Hedlund represent another category: reputable academic macroeconomists willing to serve in a populist administration. They currently occupy the senior positions listed by the Council of Economic Advisers. Their status will depend on whether nationalist consolidation still seeks approval from academic economics. Phelan could provide institutional respectability. He is unlikely to become a mass political economist or ideological founder.

The historical canon would also change. Milton Friedman and Friedrich Hayek would be demoted. They would remain useful on regulation, socialism, school choice, and government bureaucracy. Arthur Laffer would survive as the authority for tax cuts.

The people moving upward in the historical canon would be Alexander Hamilton, Friedrich List, Henry Charles Carey, and perhaps John Maynard Keynes. Hamilton offers national development, public credit, and manufacturing. List offers productive power and infant-industry protection. Carey offers an indigenous American protectionist tradition. Keynes offers tools for managing investment, demand, capital flows, and international imbalances, although nationalist conservatives would separate those ideas from the later welfare-state Keynesianism.

The likely hierarchy according to ChatGPT is therefore:

Oren Cass as the movement builder.

Stephen Miran as the technical defender of Trump-era nationalism.

Michael Pettis as the most serious theorist of trade and capital imbalances.

Peter Navarro as the political combatant.

George Borjas as the immigration economist.

Autor, Dorn, and Hanson as the empirical witnesses for deindustrialization.

Dani Rodrik as the respectable heterodox authority.

Case and Deaton as the diagnosticians of social collapse.

Kearney and Pakaluk as the family and fertility economists.

Hassett, Phelan, and perhaps Laffer as bridges to the older Republican establishment.

The crucial point is that the nationalist-populist economic canon will be assembled issue by issue according to what is situationally convenient. Its leaders will take tariffs from Miran and Navarro, trade imbalances from Pettis, labor-market evidence from Autor and Borjas, industrial policy from Rodrik and Cass, family analysis from Kearney and Pakaluk, and tax policy from Hassett and Laffer. The political synthesis will come from Cass, Lighthizer, Bessent, and elected politicians. Most of them are not going to knock your socks off. They will provide ammunition, while those in power decide where to fire it.

The available material clusters in three areas: trade imbalances (Pettis, Autor), labor supply (Borjas), and family formation (Kearney, Pakaluk). There is no nationalist monetary theory, no nationalist account of the price level, no nationalist growth or productivity theory, and no nationalist fiscal framework. Those holes explain the personnel. Hassett (b. 1962), Warsh (b. 1970), and Laffer (b. 1940) stay inside a populist government because the movement has nothing of its own to put where they stand. The composition of the coalition follows from the gaps in the canon.

On whether economists matter, the useful literature separates channels. Daniel Hirschman and Elizabeth Popp Berman argued in 2014 that economists influence policy through three routes: professional authority, institutional position, and what Berman later called the economic style of reasoning, the cost-benefit habits embedded in agency procedure. Berman’s Thinking Like an Economist (2022) makes the case that the durable victories came through the second and third routes. Peter Hall‘s The Political Power of Economic Ideas (1989) and Mark Blyth‘s Great Transformations (2002) add that ideas do their work in periods of uncertainty, as weapons for assembling coalitions and then as blueprints for institutions. Marion Fourcade‘s Economists and Societies (2009) explains why the discipline reproduces the way it does. explains why the discipline reproduces the way it does.

Two things fall out of that literature.

First, economists hold the most power where the public is not watching. Bank capital rules, actuarial assumptions, Medicare payment formulas, the discount rate in a regulatory impact analysis. Trade and immigration are now the loudest subjects in American politics. High salience destroys technocratic authority. So the fields the populists care about most are the fields where no economist of any persuasion will govern, and the fields economists will keep governing are ones no populist will contest.

Second, the supply-side precedent settles the question of whether a thin bench is fatal. Jude Wanniski (1936-2005) was a journalist. Robert Bartley (1937-2003) was an editorial page editor. Laffer had a Stanford doctorate and modest standing in the profession. Norman Ture and Paul Craig Roberts (b. 1939) were staff economists. That group reorganized American tax policy for forty years against the near-unanimous view of academic macroeconomics. They won because they supplied a rule a congressman could state in one sentence and a staffer could apply without calling anyone, and because they spent three decades fighting over how the Joint Committee on Taxation scores a bill. A movement does not need great economists. It needs a decision procedure and a scoring convention.

Until February the tariff program ran on presidential discretion. On February 20, 2026, the Supreme Court held in Learning Resources, Inc. v. Trump that IEEPA does not authorize the President to impose tariffs. The administration pivoted within days to Section 122 of the Trade Act of 1974, a temporary balance-of-payments surcharge capped at 150 days. That surcharge expired by operation of law on July 24, 2026, with no extension legislation pending. The replacement is a Section 301 regime proposing duties of ten to twelve and a half percent across forty-six countries, which carries no statutory sunset.

Discretion required no economists. It required one man. Section 301 and Section 232 require administrative records: country-specific findings of unreasonable or discriminatory practice, hearings, responses to comments, injury evidence, causal claims that survive review in the Court of International Trade and the Federal Circuit. That work gets done by staff economists at USTR, Commerce, and the International Trade Commission, an apparatus that has been running antidumping and countervailing injury determinations for decades without producing a single famous name. The Court did more to hand economists power over populist trade policy than any appointment could. Whether the movement can staff that apparatus is the test, and it will be settled by people who appear on nobody’s list of favorite economists.

The industrial policy toolkit is left-coded: Mazzucato (b. 1968), Ha-Joon Chang (b. 1963), Rodrik (b. 1957). The tax toolkit is right-coded. The evidentiary base belongs to liberals who reject the program, Autor (b. 1967), Case (b. 1958), Deaton (b. 1945). A canon assembled from other people’s research cannot run a seminar, and without a seminar there is no reproduction. Think tanks reproduce staff. Departments reproduce scholars. American Compass has produced a generation of Hill aides and no dissertations. That guarantees a movement whose sources will always be available for hostile quotation at the worst moment.

The personnel record already shows the strain. Miran left the Council of Economic Advisers on February 3, 2026, and left the Fed on May 22, 2026, succeeded by Warsh. Pierre Yared, the acting chairman since September, returned to Columbia at the end of June 2026. Three chairs or acting chairs in eighteen months. The credentialed people arrive, defend the policy, and go back to a university or a bank. The people who stay are the ones with no academic exit. As consolidation proceeds, that ratio shifts further toward the permanent staff, and forecast quality falls, because the man who can afford to say the number is wrong has already left the building.

What I would watch, in order of how much it predicts.

Measurement and scoring. Whether CBO’s baseline treats tariff revenue as durable. Whether OIRA’s cost-benefit guidance keeps the revisions to Circular A-4. Whether immigration’s fiscal effects get scored on a Borjas method or a National Academies method. Whether anyone institutionalizes a domestic-production statistic alongside GDP in the Federal statistical system, something Cass has wanted for years. A statistic embedded at BEA outlasts every name on the list.

The Pettis test. His theory implies capital-account measures: taxes on inbound portfolio flows, willingness to surrender reserve-currency privileges, a weaker dollar with higher long rates. Miran’s Mar-a-Lago paper flirted with it. If the movement takes the diagnosis and refuses the medicine, Pettis is decoration.

The List problem. List argued for protection by a rising industrial power catching up to a leader. The United States is a mature, high-wage, services-dominated economy holding the reserve currency with nobody ahead of it. The closer comparison is Britain after 1900, Chamberlain’s tariff reform, a declining industrial hegemon arguing about imperial preference and losing the argument for thirty years. Or Latin American import substitution, where capacity got built, productivity stalled, and the payments crisis arrived on schedule. The essay explaining why the American case escapes those outcomes has not been written.

Finally, the number. Manufacturing employment sits near twelve and a half million and has been flat for a decade. Run the tariffs for eight years. If the number does not move and consumers carry the cost, no canon saves the movement. If it goes to fifteen million, the profession will reorganize around the result inside a decade, and the same journals now publishing tariff skepticism will publish the revision, with citations to Autor and Pettis and none to Navarro.

Economists hold power when they hold a procedure. They hold little when they hold a microphone. The populist bench is short on microphones and shorter on procedures, and the Court just told them they need procedures to keep the policy they already have.

Posted in Economics | Comments Off on If the Populists Gain Power, Who Will be Their Favorite Economists?

Live Questions in Psychology

Psychology in 2026 has no sovereign question. It has a fight over what counts as a finding, and underneath that fight, a change in what it costs to produce one. The cost change explains most of the status movement, so I would start there.

The reform movement won. Preregistration, multi-site collaboration, adequate power, open data, severe testing. The victory raised the price of a high-prestige result. A clever experiment on ninety undergraduates used to buy a career. Now the price of admission is a consortium, a registry entry, a population cohort, or a randomized trial inside a real institution. Prestige in psychology has migrated from ingenuity to capital. That migration happened just as the American state began withdrawing the capital so fewer places can afford to do work the field respects, and the places that can will increasingly sit outside the United States.

The live questions.

First, whether psychology’s objects exist. When a researcher says depression, intelligence, grit, or self-control, what is he claiming is there? Denny Borsboom and the Amsterdam methods group own this question. Eiko Fried carries it into clinical research, where the network view treats symptoms as producing and sustaining one another. Nobody has answered it. The question has enormous downstream reach, because every other question in the discipline assumes it has been settled.

Second, whether psychology deserves belief. Simine Vazire made that question an editorial program by running Psychological Science, which she has edited since the start of 2024 on a four-year term. Brian Nosek supplies the infrastructure rather than the challenge. Vazire holds the more powerful position, because an editor decides what a finding has to look like before it can be a finding.

Third, whether artificial intelligence explains cognition or imitates its outputs. Iris van Rooij and Olivia Guest at Radboud published the critical case in 2026, arguing that psychology’s weak theory and AI‘s habit of confusing engineered artifacts for minds combine into a perfect storm. Guest puts the practical objection well: the point of science is to produce knowledge, and science cannot be automated. The constructive answer comes from Stanford, where the argument runs that a model trained on human-scale input and subjected to real experiments can serve as a testable theory. Van Rooij is rising because AI made her old demand for formal explanation urgent.

Fourth, what digital life does to young people. This is where public status and disciplinary status split most visibly. Jonathan Haidt (b. 1963) and Jean Twenge (b. 1971) hold the public and legislative ground. Amy Orben and Candice Odgers hold the methodological ground. The interesting development is that Orben stopped arguing and started spending. She and Dan Lewer
are running the IRL Trial in Bradford, roughly four thousand students aged twelve to fifteen, half of them randomly assigned to daily social media limits and a nine at night to seven in the morning curfew, with a comparison group under no restriction. Orben calls it the first large-scale experimental reduction of social media use in healthy minors anywhere. Read her own words carefully and the standard framing collapses: she says the evidence that social media harms individual children, including severe harm, is irrefutable. The dispute concerns population-level causal size, not whether harm occurs. Her group also expects results on the Australian under-sixteen ban within about a year. Within eighteen months this question gets an answer, and whoever is right collects a great deal of status.

Fifth, what genetics predicts and what prediction licenses. Kathryn Paige Harden at Texas asks the question in its morally loaded form. Original Sin: On the Genetics of Vice, the Problem of Blame, and the Future of Forgiveness came out from Random House in March 2026. Scientists called it magnificent. The Los Angeles Review of Books treated it as scientific Calvinism and a rehash of eugenics.

Sixth, morality and collective behavior under technological and institutional pressure. Crockett at Princeton took a 2026 Troland Research Award from the National Academy of Sciences for a mechanistic theory of moral cognition, with the citation pointing to how technologies such as social media exploit moral learning and erode community trust. Betsy Levy Paluck offers the answer template: pick a process, intervene in a school or a post-conflict society, and measure behavior.

Seventh, whether the discipline describes humanity or affluent institutional life. Joseph Henrich still owns the question. The answer is arriving through international networks, which weakens any single department’s claim to the topic.

Eighth, whether competing theories can be made to risk defeat. The consciousness field ran an adversarial collaboration on integrated information theory and global workspace theory, preregistered the contrasting predictions, separated theory owners from data collection, and embarrassed both camps. The method won, not either theory. Other subfields are copying it.

On the asker and answerer question, I would put it more sharply than a division of labor. Asking is portable and cheap. Answering is expensive and local. Metascience gave a generation of psychologists a route to high status that required no laboratory, no grant, no participants, and no wait. That is the cheapest prestige available in the discipline, which explains its growth better than its intellectual merit does, and its intellectual merit is real. The corresponding risk is a field full of people who audit and few who build. Vazire, van Rooij, Borsboom, and Guest ask. Nosek, Paluck, Orben, Frank, Goodman, Craske, and Jessica Schleider build.

The questions have become consortium-shaped. Princeton has the fastest rise, holding Crockett, Tom Griffiths, Paluck, Shafir, and Cohen at the intersection of computation, morality, and field experimentation. Stanford has the broadest claim and absorbs new questions rather than chasing them. Amsterdam owns the foundational question about what psychological objects are. Cambridge’s MRC Cognition and Brain Sciences Unit owns adolescent digital mental health, and Orben directs the group there. Leiden, Radboud, and Northwestern are rising in narrower lanes. Two of my four leaders sit outside the United States, and I expect that share to grow.

Moving down. The losses attach to styles. Small samples. Counterintuitive single effects. Theory written after the results. Universal claims from American sophomores. Generic screen-time correlations. Candidate genes. Diagnostic categories treated as natural objects. Prediction models announced before prospective validation. The celebrity social psychologist who owns one memorable finding has lost the most.

The methodological closure is mostly deserved. It also has victims. Preregistration culture penalizes description, exploration, case study, and any population too small or too rare to power a trial. Some true things about unusual people are now hard to publish.

The editorial closure operates through harm standards. Nature Human Behaviour reserves the right to require changes or decline work when anticipated harm to groups outweighs benefit, and presents this as research ethics. Editors who hold that power can use it against accurate findings, and the policy does not have to be abused for authors to anticipate it and self-censor.

The professional closure runs through organizational position-taking. When a body like the American Psychological Association adopts a firm stance on a contested clinical question, youth gender medicine being the current example, it converts an empirical dispute into a loyalty test. Nobody has to be punished for the incentive to work.

The fiscal closure now outweighs the other three combined. The fiscal 2027 budget request released April 3, 2026 proposes dissolving the National Science Foundation’s Social, Behavioral and Economic Sciences directorate and zeroing its funding, with continuing grants aligned to administration priorities transferred elsewhere. That directorate funds roughly sixty-three percent of American academic research in the social and psychological sciences. NSF leadership told staff the same day that it would begin dissolving the directorate before the end of the fiscal year, telling rotators to prepare to return to their universities. The agency has awarded about six hundred thirteen grants in fiscal 2026, roughly a fifth of the 2021 through 2024 pace, and has no confirmed director. The entire National Science Board was fired on April 25, 2026. Congress restored much of what the White House tried to cut a year earlier, so the outcome remains open, and the directorate page was still live in early July. The internal pressures shift what gets published. This one shifts what gets done.

I would add a fifth force nobody has priced yet. If large models can produce plausible synthetic participants and plausible literature reviews, the cheap end of psychology loses its reason to collect human data at all. Van Rooij and Guest argue that on epistemic grounds. The near-term effect will be economic, and it will arrive fastest in exactly the underfunded departments that can no longer afford real samples.

Editors, prize committees, and infrastructure owners still control status flows. The trade publisher has become an independent route around all three. Harden and Haidt both took it. Both gained enormous public standing and paid an internal price. That route will get more crowded as the grants dry up.

Posted in Psychology | Comments Off on Live Questions in Psychology

Live Questions in Jewish Studies

Jewish Studies in America runs on two currencies now, and they no longer trade at par.

The first is scholarly credit. It goes to the researcher who takes an inherited category, shows it does not hold, and then does the work in languages, archives, fieldwork, objects, law, or numbers to provide the replacement. The second is institutional credit. It goes to whoever can promise a president, a donor, or a federal investigator that the university is combating antisemitism, protecting Jewish students, honoring Holocaust memory, or defending Jewish civilization. A scholar can hold one currency in great quantity and almost none of the other. Some of the sharpest people in the field are invisible to donors. Some of the most visible people in the field such as Deborah Lipstadt do not set anyone’s research agenda.

No department owns the discipline. It sits in history, religion, literature, anthropology, sociology, linguistics, law, and a scattering of endowed centers. The Association for Jewish Studies carries well over 1,900 individual members and a conference of some 1,200 people across roughly 190 sessions. Authority is dispersed by design and by accident, which means the live questions get set by conference divisions, institute themes, and book prize.

The hottest question is what antisemitism is in the American setting. Not whether it rose after 2023, which everyone concedes, but what belongs under the name. Is it one prejudice among many, a distinct conspiracy structure, a form of racialization, a religious inheritance, a political tool, or some braid of all of them? How much of it comes from the right, the left, religious subcultures, online media, or the ordinary indifference of institutions? Where does campus anti-Zionism cross over? Can a university police conduct without policing historical judgment? And the which interventions reduce hostility rather than produce a statement, a training, an investigation, and a settlement.

Maurice Samuels at Yale built the most durable house for that question. He founded the program there in 2011 and has argued for keeping the subject historical while the politics around it boils. Jonathan Judaken (b. 1968) at Washington University is the one climbing fastest as a conceptual questioner. His work puts antisemitism into conversation with racism, colonialism, and critical theory, asks whether the inherited definitions still do any work, and collected a major historical prize in 2025. Lila Corwin Berman at NYU asks the institutional version, which is the sharper one: who gets to found an antisemitism center, write its mission, hire its staff, and speak for scholarship to the people writing the checks. Her willingness to criticize centers built around a predetermined mission has raised her standing among colleagues worried about who controls the field. Jeffrey Veidlinger at Michigan supplies the institutional answer. He runs a center that studies antisemitism alongside other hatreds and has held that comparative line against pressure to narrow it into advocacy.

Leonard Saxe and the Cohen Center at Brandeis hold down the empirical side. They run the surveys and campus studies that let anyone test a claim about Jewish students. The strength is evidence. The limit is that measurement inherits its definitions before the first question gets asked, so the survey can only settle arguments the survey design already permits. Public figures such as Deborah Lipstadt (b. 1947) carry enormous visibility.

The second live question is who counts as Jewish in America. The old version worried about intermarriage and disappearance. The new version asks about people with one Jewish parent, converts, Jews of no religion, Black and Asian and Latino Jews, queer and trans Jews, Haredim, secular Yiddishists, and anyone whose Jewishness is familial, political, linguistic, or occasional. Do population surveys find Jewish identity or manufacture an administrative copy of it? Who disappears when a foundation defines a countable population before deciding what to fund? Berman is the strongest senior questioner here because she ties identity to money and institutional power. Sarah Bunin Benor supplies an answer. Her work on Jewish languages shows people performing difference through vocabulary, accent, naming, and setting. Michigan has made the argument explicit by choosing Jewish peoplehood as a future institute theme. The continuity vocabulary is losing scholarly credit while surviving in fundraising, where urgency sells.

Third, Haredi life. For decades much American Jewish scholarship treated liberal denominational Judaism as the center and Haredim as a remnant with a birthrate. That position is gone. David Myers and Nomi Stolzenberg reframed the subject when they showed how a disciplined religious community uses American constitutional law, municipal incorporation, electoral bargaining, and property development to carve out autonomy inside a liberal state. Ayala Fader took the other route and found the doubters who stay inside, running concealed intellectual lives through their phones. Chaya Nove is the young scholar rising, and she argues the field romanticized Yiddish as the language of a murdered European past while ignoring the hundreds of thousands of people speaking and changing it in Brooklyn and Rockland County. Programs that keep treating the liberal synagogue as representative American Judaism will lose relevance. Institutions that combine language, ethnography, law, and sociology will gain.

Fourth, whether the field can stop treating Ashkenazi experience as the unmarked default. The question is whether emancipation, secularization, assimilation, diaspora, race, and modernity look different when the story starts in Salonica or Baghdad or Rabat instead of Berlin or Warsaw. Sarah Abrevaya Stein at UCLA and Devin Naar at Washington have made Sephardi and Ottoman material central. The AJS has written race, gender, queer studies, disability, and digital humanities into its formal divisions.

Fifth, the premodern question. Was there ever a single coherent Judaism, or have scholars projected a later idea of unified religion backward onto communities that shared little? How much authority did rabbis hold over people who left no texts? Mira Balberg reads rabbinic material as a system for organizing bodies, knowledge, and selfhood. Ra’anan Boustan has pushed social heterogeneity, material culture, and the construction of tradition. The movement runs from canonical text alone toward text plus archaeology, inscriptions, objects, food, illness, and the neighbors. Philological mastery still commands respect and no longer sets agendas.

Sixth, Jewish law and ethics. Julia Watts Belser made disability an analytic category, working across ethics, gender, sexuality, and rabbinic interpretation. Rebecca Epstein-Levi is rising fast on sex, risk, consent, and Jewish ethics, and she does the rare thing of posing the question and building the framework in the same book. This area has intellectual energy and little money, because its conclusions do not convert into a campaign.

Seventh, Holocaust memory after the survivors. Preservation is solved. The new questions are epistemological. Does digital testimony preserve encounter or simulate it? What breaks when an interview gets chopped into searchable clips tagged by someone else’s categories? What happens when a generative system produces plausible testimony that never happened? How does a scholar write about ordinary survival, compromise, and postwar family wreckage without bending it toward redemption? Hannah Pollin-Galay has gained standing by making language part of Holocaust history. Nove’s work treats recorded testimony as a linguistic archive carrying dialect, class, and migration. Public history institutions are gaining money faster than the archival theorists are gaining lines.

The eighth cluster has no commanding figure yet. Podcasts, streaming instruction, digital archives, online conversion and doubt, and models trained on digitized Jewish texts by people who cannot read them are all remaking who counts as an interpreter of Judaism. Michigan has already named media as a theme. The risk is that Jewish Studies cedes the whole territory to computer scientists and communications faculty with method and no Hebrew.

On askers and answerers, the field rarely rewards a provocateur. Berman asks who controls American Jewish institutions and categories and money, and demographers and institutional historians fill in behind her. Judaken and Samuels set the conceptual terms on antisemitism, Saxe and Brandeis supply the counts, Veidlinger supplies the model of a center that survives its own funding. Myers and Stolzenberg reframed Haredi autonomy as an American legal development, and Fader and Nove answer at close range with what people say and believe. Belser and Epstein-Levi do both jobs.

If department means department, NYU’s Skirball has the strongest claim: breadth, Berman’s American Jewish history center, and a new antisemitism center that embodies the exact tension she has criticized. For choosing frontier questions on purpose, Michigan’s Frankel Institute has the best claim, since its run of themes reads like a map of where the field is going. Penn’s Katz Center holds greater all-field convening prestige without binding fellows to a mission. Brandeis leads on contemporary evidence. Yale remains the respected address for antisemitism as a scholarly subject. UCLA stays near the top for Sephardi and Mediterranean work

Moving up intellectually: Berman, Judaken, Veidlinger, Benor, Belser, Epstein-Levi, Nove, Pollin-Galay, Ayelet Brinn. Moving up institutionally: Michigan, NYU, Brandeis, Cornell on the strength of a five million dollar gift that endows faculty lines, Florida Atlantic with a twenty million dollar gift and a new building, Denver with an endowed chair and expanded course offerings. Capacity and visibility are not the same as leadership, and the newer money buys the first two.

Indiana’s program has taken the clearest damage. A longtime director removed, a specialist in contemporary antisemitism installed over faculty objection, and then disputes over what a graduate student may research and travel to present. The removed director lost power and gained sympathy. His replacement gained control and became a contested figure inside the profession. Columbia’s standing suffers less from anything its Jewish Studies faculty did than from the spectacle of a university negotiating its academic priorities under a federal funding threat. At Washington, established faculty objected when the university built a parallel antisemitism operation staffed by people without equivalent expertise in the field, which is what bypassing a discipline looks like from inside it. A federal agency spent months trying to compel Penn to hand over names of Jewish faculty, students, and staff before dropping that demand this month.

Claims of closure from the left exist. The profession’s vocabulary and conference structure lean left-liberal, and work defending Zionism as a legitimate Jewish attachment or treating Jewish peoplehood in normative terms draws more suspicion than comparable work in anti-colonial framing. I have not seen a case of a left-led program stripping funding or replacing leadership over a research question that matches the documented record at Indiana. The field is pressed from four sides at once. Donors want compliance with a mission. Administrators want reputational cover. Governments want a demonstrable action. Activists want moral clarity. Scholars want permission to make distinctions that inconvenience all four.

The funding picture explains most of the rest. Targeted money floods in while the surrounding humanities contract. A single federal humanities grant of more than ten million dollars, the largest that agency has ever made, went to a Jewish civilization project whose purposes were named before the research began. Against that, the discipline’s own open awards look like pocket change: a thousand dollars for contingent faculty research, five thousand toward a first book, thirty-three thousand for a dissertation year, fifteen thousand for the top book prize. Many of the new antisemitism positions are temporary, off the tenure track, or housed in administration, which produces the strange result that the best-funded subject in the field employs the least protected scholars. Not every targeted gift restricts; Cornell’s appears to buy durable faculty capacity, and Michigan has shown that donor money can fund a comparative program. The test is whether the gift pays for scholars and infrastructure or for a conclusion.

Rank the money and you get the field’s future. Antisemitism, Holocaust education, student protection, and Jewish civilization are climbing. Demography and communal identity hold steady because they yield findings a foundation can act on. Sephardi, Haredi, race, gender, disability, and digital work rise in reputation while receiving little support. Languages, archives, philology, and ancient and medieval history keep their intellectual standing and lose bargaining power, because they cannot promise a president anything by Friday.

The danger is the conversion of a field that investigates Jewish life into a service provider hired to confirm what a university, a foundation, a government, or a communal organization already believes about Jewish life. Watch the grant titles. Wherever the title contains the finding, the research has already been spent.

Posted in Anti-Semitism, Jews | Comments Off on Live Questions in Jewish Studies